Skip to main content

Full text of "Occasional papers of the California Academy of Sciences"

See other formats


The  Galapagos  Islands 

A  History  of  Their  Exploration 


The  Galapagos  Islands 

A  History  of  Their  Exploration 

BY 

JOSEPH  RICHARD  SLEVIN 

THE  CUEATOR  OF  THE  DEPARTMENT  OF  HERPETOLOGY 
CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES 


SAN    FRANCISCO 
CALIFORNIA    ACADEMY    OF    SCIENCES 

1959 


OCCASIONAL  PAPEKS   NO.  XXV 
OF  THE  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 

Issued  December  22,  1959 

COMMITTEE   ON  PUBLICATION 

Dr.  Egbert  C.  Miller,  Chairman 
Dr.  Edward  L.  Kessel,  Editor 


DEDICATIOX 

To  Eohert  Cuymingham  Miller,  Director  of 
the  California  Academy  of  Sciences,  whose 
interest  in  the  project  made  its  completion 
possihJe,  this  volume  is  gratefully  dedicated 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 


Preface       i^ 

The  Galapagos  Islands 1 

Description  of  the  Islands 1 

Water 5 

Inti'oduced  Animals '^ 

Native  Fauna "7 

Volcanoes " 

Climate 10 

Discovery H 

Origin 1^ 

Cartography 18 

Early  Visitors ^^ 

Enderby  Whalers 52 

Visiting  Men-of-war  and  Sealers 54 

The  United  States  Frigate  Essex 58 

British  Frigates  Briton  and  Tagus ''3 

His  Britannic  Majesty's  Ship  Beagle '75 

Voyage  of  Le  Genie 89 

Voyage  of  the  Corvette  Decres 101 

Inhabitants 105 

The  Galapagos  "Post  Office" 108 

Shipwrecks HI 

Expeditions  to  the  Galapagos 114 

Air  Base 126 

Tortoises 12T 

Preservation  of  Galapagos  Fauna 135 

Selected  Bibliography HO 


PREFACE 

It  is  not  the  intention  of  tlie  author  to  compile  in  tlie  present 
work  a  complete  bibliooraphy  of  Galapagos  literature,  ])ut  rather  to 
treat  of  the  history  of  the  islands  from  the  time  of  their  discovery 
to  the  present,  bringing  to  light  historical  events  and  documents 
unknown  to  many  Galapagos  students  as  well  as  giving  an  account 
of  some  of  the  men  and  shi])s  connected  with  their  history. 

A  selected  bibliogra])hy,  however,  is  appended  for  those  who  wish 
to  make  a  serious  study  of  the  flora  and  fauna  of  these  islands,  or  for 
those  who  merely  wish  to  read  of  the  numerous  explorers  and  visitors 
before  and  after  the  memorable  voyage  of  the  Beagle. 

Probably  no  other  group  of  islands  in  the  world  has  been  the  object 
of  so  much  intensive  study  by  the  world's  most  distinguished  scientists. 
It  was  amongst  these  now  famous  islands  that  Charles  Darwin  first 
formed  his  ideas  as  to  the  origin  of  species,  and  where  he  started  on 
a  career  that  made  him  one  of  the  greatest  naturalists  of  all  time. 

The  Galapagos  have  been  one  of  the  principal  fields  of  endeavor 
of  the  California  Academy  of  Sciences  since  its  original  expedition 
there  in  1905-06,  and  its  collections  from  the  Galapagos  Archipelago 
are  unsurpassed. 

To  enumerate  all  those  who  have  assisted  in  com])iling  these  data 
would  make  far  too  lengthy  a  list  and  to  these  my  thanks  are  due. 
There  are.  however,  those  to  whom  I  am  especially  indebted  and  with- 
out whose  help  the  project  would  have  been  impossible :  The  Eeverend 
Padre  Emilio  del  Sol,  of  the  Church  of  Santa  Maria  del  Mercado, 
Berlanga,  Spain,  furnished  the  photographs  of  the  burial  place  and 
wood  carving  of  Fray  Tomas,  the  discoverer  of  the  Galapagos;  Captain 
H.  J.  Hennessy  and  Commander  W.  E.  May  of  the  Royal  Navy  on  duty 
at  the  Admiralty  v/ere  most  helpful,  as  well  as  the  Imperial  War  Mu- 
seum and  the  Maritime  Museum  which  supplied  naval  photographs 
and  prints;  the  British  Museum  Library  allowed  the  use  of  old  maps 
and  diaries  and  the  Public  Records  Office  the  data  from  the  various 
old  logs  and  letters;  ]\Ir.  H.  W.  Parker,  of  the  British  Museum  of 
Natural  History,  extended  many  personal  courtesies;  Rear  Admiral 
Francisco  Benito  Perera,  of  the  Spanish  Navy,  and  Captain  Proctor 
Thornton,  U.S.N. (Ret.),  have  been  most  helpful  in  securing  data 
regarding  the  early  Spanish  ships;  the  Pennsylvania  Historical  So- 
ciety very  kindly  allowed  the  use  of  the  Feltus  diary;  Dr.  Paul 
Chabanaud,  of  the  Museum  d'Histoire  Naturelle,  Paris,  France,  se- 
cured the  reports  of  the  French  vessels  of  war,  Le    Genie  and  Decres, 

ix 


from  the  French  Admiralty;  Dr.  F.  X.  Williams,  formerly  with  the 
Hawaiian  Sugar  Planters  Association,  sent  much  information  regard- 
ing the  early  whalers.  Also,  I  wish  to  thanlv  especially  IVIiss  Veronica 
Sexton,  Librarian  of  th.e  Academy,  who  was  most  solicitons  in  attending 
to  many  requests,  and  Mrs.  Lillian  Dempster,  of  the  Depai'tment  of 
Ichthyology,  for  translating  the  many  Spanish  letters  connected  with 
the  research. 

Last,  but  not  least,  I  feel  deeply  indebted  to  Mrs.  Barbara  Oordon, 
of  the  Academy's  television  staff,  who  so  painstakingly  typed  the 
manuscript. 

The  Author^ 


^  [Joseph  Richard  Slevin.  for  more  than  fifty-three  years  associated  with  the  California  Academy  of 
Sciences  in  its  Department  of  Herpetology,  passed  away  February  IS,  1957,  in  his  seventy-sixth  year.  He 
first  visited  the  Galapagos  Islands  in  1905  as  a  member  of  the  Academy's  Galapagos  Expedition.  From 
that  date  until  the  time  of  his  death,  he  maintained  an  active  interest  in  those  islands  and  published  a 
number  of  scientific  and  popular  papers  about  them.  The  manuscript  for  the  present  paper  was  completed 
shortly  before  his  death. — Editor.] 


THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 

The  (ialapagos  Au'hipela<^o,  or  Archipielago  de  Colon  as  it  is 
called  by  the  (.ioveniment  of  Ecuador,  was  annexed  by  that  country 
on  February  12,  1832.  The  history  of  these  islands  remained  more  or 
less  obscure  to  tlie  world  for  many  years  after  their  discovery  as 
they  had  no  strategic  value  in  tlie  scheme  of  events  until  the  con- 
struction of  the  Panama  Canal.  Then  at  once  they  became  of  the 
greatest  importance  to  the  United  States  as  a  base  for  the  protection 
of  that  waterway  in  time  of  war,  and  were  used  as  such  in  World 
War  II.  Any  mention  of  a  plan  to  lease  or  purchase  them  by  the 
United  States  immediately  brought  a  storm  of  jn-otest  from  all  Latin 
America  and  it  was  impossible  to  come  to  any  terms  with  the  Gov- 
ernment of  Ecuador  for  permanent  occupancy. 

The  archipelago,  consisting  of  some  fifteen  islands  and  numerous 
islets  and  rocks,  extends  from  Latitude  1°-1:0'  N.  to  1°36'  S.  and  from 
Longitude  89°16'58"  to  90°1'  W.,  the  nearest  point  to  the  mainland 
being  Mt.  Pitt  on  Chatham  Island,  which  is  502.5  miles  N.  87°50'  W. 
of  Marlinspike  Kock,  Cape  San  Lorenzo,  Ecuador.  The  equator  passes 
through  the  northernmost  volcano  of  Albemarle  Island. - 

The  islands  themselves  are  in  reality  immense  lava  piles  projecting 
out  of  the  ocean,  some  with  perfectly  formed  craters,  and  there  are 
hundreds  upon  hundreds  of  minor  ones  together  with  fumaroles  and 
vents  scattered  over  the  landscape.  Great  lava  flows  extend  from  the 
crater  rims  to  the  sea.  These,  the  most  striking  features  of  the  land- 
scape, vary  greatly,  some  being  composed  of  huge  black  or  brown  slabs 
that  have  the  appearance  of  age,  while  others  are  rough,  black  boulders 
that  appear  to  be  of  recent  origin,  so  much  so  that  one  would  think 
they  had  hardly  cooled. 

Description  of  the  Islands 

Albemarle,  shaped  somewhat  like  a  boot,  is  the  largest  of  the  group, 
being  approximately  seventy-five  miles  in  length  and  forty-five  in 
breadth  at  the  southern  end,  the  widest  part.  Narborough,  James,  In- 
defatigable, Chatham,  Charles,  Bindloe,  Abingdon,  Tower,  and  Hood 
are  next  in  size  and  importance,  while  the  remainder  range  from  islets 
of  a  mile  or  less  to  mere  rocks. 


2  [The  author  has  used  the  English  names  for  islands  and  localities  throughout  his  manuscript  which 
was  prepared  from  the  English  viewpoint  and  is  published  in  connection  with  the  Darwinian  Centennial 
year  of  1959.  Most  of  these  names  are  not  official  inasmuch  as  they  have  been  replaced  with  Spanish 
names  by  the  Government  of  Ecuador.  See  pages  2  5-26  for  a  list  of  alternatives. — Editor.! 

[1] 


2  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

The  mountains  of  the  Galapagos  are  best  represented  on  Albemarle 
and  Narborough  islands,  the  former  having  five  large  volcanoes,  the 
broadest  of  which,  Villamil  Mountain,  is  4,890  feet.  The  crater,  some- 
what oval  in  shape,  is  approximately  five  miles  in  diameter,  and  the 
area  about  the  rim  is  open  country  with  a  scattering  of  small  trees. 
As  it  is  often  covered  with  clouds,  there  is  considerable  moisture,  re- 
sulting in  a  luxurious  growth  of  grass  furnishing  marvelous  grazing 
land  for  the  wild  cattle  which  range  about  the  southern  slope  above 
the  tree  belt.  The  base  of  the  mountain  is  surrounded  by  barren 
lava  beds. 

Iguana  Cove  Mountain,  5,540  feet  in  height,  is  of  a  somewhat 
different  type.  The  southern  slopes,  being  exposed  to  the  prevailing 
southerly  winds,  are  covered  by  a  dense  growth  of  vegetation  from 
the  crater  rim  to  the  shoreline,  while  the  northern  ones  are  barren. 
The  line  of  demarcation  between  lava  flow  and  vegetation  is  so  re- 
markably distinct  that  it  is  the  first  thing  that  strikes  the  eye  while 
sailing  along  Albemarle's  western  coast. 

Cowley  Mountain,  3,650  feet  in  height,  is  of  still  another  type, 
the  lower  slopes  being  covered  by  pumice  with  a  very  scant  growth  of 
vegetation  up  to  the  vicinity  of  the  crater  rim.  Here  a  wide  belt  of 
sword  grass  forms  an  impenetrable  barrier  surrounding  the  crater  rim. 

The  two  northern  mountains,  Tagus  Cove,  4,300  feet,  and  Banks 
Ba3',  5,500  feet,  are  much  more  barren  in  appearance,  although  there 
is  sparse  vegetation  at  their  lower  levels.  Neither  of  these  mountains 
is  as  spectacular  as  are  the  southern  ones,  though  like  them  they  have 
well-formed  craters. 

Narborough,  a  huge  mountain  of  lava,  is  no  doubt  the  most  bar- 
ren and  least  known  of  the  larger  islands,  the  greater  portion  of  it 
being  a  series  of  black  lava  flows  with  only  small  streaks  of  vegetation 
showing  on  the  steep  eastern  slope,  while  the  southwestern  slope,  which 
is  exposed  to  the  southerly  breezes,  shows  considerable  vegetation 
despite  the  most  violent  eruptions  that  have  taken  place.  The  island 
rises  to  a  height  of  about  4,500  feet  and  has  a  lake  in  the  crater  floor 
which  in  turn  has  a  small  crater  with  a  lake  of  its  own.  As  no  anchor- 
ages were  marked  on  the  earlier  charts,  its  waters  were  given  a  wide 
berth  by  navigators  in  general  and  hiiidings  were  made  from  small 
boats  while  the  vessel  hove  to  oft"  shore  or  lay  at  anchor  in  Tagus  Cove 
across  the  strait.  IVIr.  Templeton  Crocker's  yacht  Zaca,  while  on  an 
expedition  for  the  California  Academy  of  Sciences,  was  the  first  vessel 
to  chart  an  ancliorage  on  Narborough.   It  was  named  California  Cove. 

The  great  lava  flows  of  All)emarle  and  Narborough  vary  consid- 
erably in  character,  some  being  composed  of  huge  black  or  brown 


No.  25J 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS 


Fig.  1.  Aerial  view  of  the  crater  of  the  Narborough  volcano,  showing  its 
lake  which  surrounds  a  secondary  crater  which  has  a  lake  of  its  own.  Photo 
courtesy  of  Captain  Paul  P.  Lila,  U.S.A.A.F. 


slabs  that  have  the  appearance  of  great  age;  others  appear  to  be  of 
very  recent  origin. 

Two  small  islands  of  a  distinct  type,  Duncan  and  Tower,  have 
well-formed  craters,  the  former  with  its  lava  flows  covered  with  lichens, 
giving  the  appearance  of  great  age.  Its  crater  floor  is  composed  of  red 
volcanic  ash.  Tower  Island,  by  contrast,  is  composed  of  black  lava 
and  has  a  crater  lake  of  brackish  water. 

The  other  larger  islands.  Indefatigable,  James,  Chatham,  Charles, 
and  Hood,  are  all  of  a  somewhat  different  type,  the  main  craters 
having  broken  down  to  the  extent  that  they  are  no  longer  well  de- 
flned,  or  even  visible.  The  tops  of  all  except  Hood,  which  is  a  very  low 
island  only  about  650  feet  in  height,  are  covered  with  vegetation,  and 
Chatham  and  Charles  have  open  areas  in  the  vicinity  of  their  summits. 

On  a  visit  to  Charles  Island  in  1928,  much  of  the  open  area  found 
in  1905  had  been  encroached  upon  by  a  lemon  thicket  on  top  of  the 
central  plateau  so  that  the  open  area  had  practically  disappeared;  no 
doubt  the  landscape  changes  from  time  to  time  and  descriptions  may 
not  remain  applicable. 

The  tops  of  all  the  islands  and  of  all  the  volcanoes  have  now  been 
reached  on  foot  by  some  or  several  members  of  the  Academy's  various 
expeditions. 


CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES 


[Oc.  Papkbs 


Ml".  KoUo  II.  Beck,  chief  of  the  Academy's  expedition  of  1905-06, 
climbed  to  the  top  of  Narborough  and  reported  seeing  the  lake  in  the 
crater  now  shown  on  H.  0.  Chart  No.  1798  from  the  survey  of  the 
Galapagos  made  by  the  U.S.S.  Bowditch  in  1942. 

The  top  of  Indefatigable  was  readied  by  the  members  of  the  Tem- 
pleton  Crocker  expedition  to  the  (lalapagos  Islands  in  the  interests 
of  the  Academy,  and  Mr.  John  Thomas  Howell,  the  Academy's  Cura- 
tor of  Botany,  gave  an  excellent  description  of  the  ascent  in  the  Sierra 
Club  BuUetin,  volume  27,  number  4,  August,  1942. 

When  the  United  States  Army  established  its  air  base  in  the 
Galapagos,  much  of  the  area  was  photographed  from  the  air.  From 
these  aerial  surveys  it  was  ])ossible  to  make  additions  and  corrections 
to  the  survey  of  1835,  which  was  in  use  until  it  was  replaced  by  the 
U.S.S.  Bowditch  survey.  Among  the  changes  made  were  the  listing  of 
the  crater  lake  on  Narborough  and  the  dropping  of  the  supposed  cen- 
tral crater  on  Indefatigable  Island.  The  need  for  this  addition  and  cor- 


Fig.  2.  On  Tuesday,  August  10,  11*32,  members  of  the  Crocker  Expedition 
to  the  Galapagos  Islands  conquered  Indefatigable  and  were  the  first  to  see  the 
highlands  from  the  highest  point  on  the  island. 

Looking  in  a  southeasterly  direction  from  the  remnant  of  a  crater  rim,  the 
highest  point  on  Indefatigable  Island,  2835  feet  above  sea  level.  The  chief  cor- 
rection made  in  the  chart  of  the  U.S.S.  Bouditih  (1942)  was  the  omission  of  a 
great  central  crater  which  had  been  shown  for  this  island  on  the  chart  of 
H.M.S.  Beagle  (1835). 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS 


reel  ion  first  became  known  throui-li  the  Academy's  explorers  who 
conquered  the  mountains  on  I'oot  and  were  the  first  to  see  the  crater 
hike  of  Narl)orough  and  to  f>ive  a  proper  descrii)ti()n  of  the  top  of  Inde- 
fatii>ahle.  The  latter  island  had  defied  several  attempts  to  reach  its 
sinnmit. 

Water 
For  all  visitors  to  the  (Jalapagos,  water  seems  to  have  been  one  of 
the  o-reatest  problems,  and  from  the  accounts  of  the  early  naviga- 
tors they  spent  much  time  in  search  of  it,  mostly  with  little  success. 
On  rare  occasions,  when  a  copious  rainfall  occurred,  a  few  depressions 
in  the  lava  beds  or  the  bottom  of  the  arroyos  were  found  to  contain 
small  amounts  of  water,  but  a  generous  supply  where  a  ship  could  be 
watered  from  along  the  coast  is  not  existent.    There  is  one  spot,  how- 


Fig.  3.  This  wateiiiole,  about  lialf  a  mile  south  of  Tagus  Cove,  Albemarle 
Island,  was  found  to  be  full  by  Captain  Amaso  Delano  on  August  21,  1801,  and 
he  watered  his  ship  Perseverence  from  it  over  one  hundred  and  four  years 
before  the  Expedition  of  the  California  Academy  of  Sciences  to  the  Galapagos 
Islands  replenished  the  water  supply  of  the  schooner  Academy  from  the  same 
hole.  A  tarpaulin  was  thrown  over  the  hole  to  help  keep  out  the  dust.  The  water 
was  bailed  out  into  a  breaker  or  barrel,  rolled  to  the  water's  edge  and  into  the 
sea,  and  then  parbuckled  into  the  skiff. 


6  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

ever,  on  the  east  coast  of  Chatham  Island  (Freshwater  Bay)  which 
might  have  saved  many  an  early  visitor  from  a  shortage  of  water  if 
it  had  been  discovered.  A  small  stream  trickles  down  from  some  per- 
manent ponds  on  the  plateau  and  finds  its  way  to  a  basin  in  the  rocks 
just  above  the  tide  line.  It  is  this  basin  that  was  pictured  in  a  draw- 
ing made  by  Midshipman  CI.  W.  P.  Edwardes  of  H.M.S.  Daphne  shown 
at  the  bottom  of  his  chart  of  Freshwater  Bay,  surveyed  during  the 
visit  of  that  vessel  to  the  Galapagos  in  1836. 

On  Albemarle  Island,  just  above  half  a  mile  south  of  the  mouth 
of  Tagus  Cove,  a  small  basin  in  the  tufa  collected  about  forty  to  fifty 
gallons  per  day  from  underground  seepage,  and  the  Academy's  expedi- 
tion of  1905-06  watered  the  schooner  from  this  basin  while  at  anchor 
in  Tagus  Cove.  It  is  not  certain,  however,  whether  the  underground 
flow  can  be  relied  upon  throughout  the  year.  Again  at  the  southern 
end  of  the  island,  at  Villamil  anchorage,  some  waterholes  three  or  four 
miles  inland  furnish  a  moderate  supply  of  water  which,  altliough 
drinkable,  has  a  strong  taste  of  sulphur.  The  grasslands  about  the  top 
of  the  mountain  have  waterholes  with  a  constant  supply  of  good  drink- 
ing water,  but  of  course  this  is  an  impossible  source  as  far  as  watering 
a  ship  is  concerned. 

Chatham  Island  also  has  good  fresh  water  in  some  parts  of  the 
plateau  and  water  can  be  hauled  down  by  ox  team  in  case  of  necessity, 
though  it  is  not  a  very  practical  method  of  watering  a  ship. 

The  plateau  of  Charles  Island,  like  Chatham,  also  has  good  drink- 
ing water  in  some  springs  near  the  base  of  the  main  peak,  but  the 
supply  is  not  nearly  as  plentiful  as  that  of  Chatham. 

During  the  rainy  season,  at  the  northern  end  of  James  Bay  on 
James  Island  and  about  opposite  Albany  Island,  water  collects  in  some 
depressions  in  the  lava.  It  was  here  that  the  buccaneers  invariably 
searched  for  water  and,  at  times,  found  it  in  small  quantities  as  they 
did  in  simihir  places  elsewhere  on  the  larger  islands. 

No  one  need  die  of  thirst  in  the  higher  portions  of  Indefatigable 
as  the  summit  of  that  island  is  covered  practically  daily  by  clouds 
which  create  sufficient  moisture  to  fill  depressions  in  the  lava  and 
make  possible  its  dense  vegetation.  Again,  however,  this  does  not  help 
the  thirsty  mariner  at  the  shoreline. 

A  casual  investigation  of  the  Galapagos  coastline  will  at  once  suf- 
fice to  show  the  visitor  wli>-  tlie  water  ])r()blom  of  the  early  voyagers 
was  a  major  one. 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


Introduced  Animals 

Of  late  years,  owiiiii  to  the  activities  oi'  tuna  Imats  and  various 
yachts  which  liave  called  ;i1  the  islands,  it  is  diificult  to  tell  what  do- 
mestic animals  have  been  introduced  and  on  what  islands.  It  is  known, 
howovei-.  that  rats  occur  everywhere  and  that  with  the  exception  of  pigs 
and  cats  on  Indefatioahle,  which  are  a  comparatively  hite  imi)ortation. 
the  islands  listed  have  been  inhabited  as  follows : 


AIhc7narJe 

Ciuitham 

dogs 

dogs 

cats 

cats 

cattle 

cattle 

burros 

burros 

Barringfon 

Hood 

goats 

goats 

Charles 
dogs 
cats 
goats 
cattle 
pigs 
burros 


James 
goats 
burros 


South  Seymour 
goats 


Inclefatigahle 
dogs 
cats 
burros 
pigs 


Native  Fauna 

AVhile  the  neighboring  continent  of  South  America,  only  500  miles 
away,  harbors  birds  of  the  most  gorgeous  plumage  in  its  tropical  for- 
ests and  has  a  varied  and  wonderful  mammal  population,  the  avifauna 
of  the  Galapagos  is  most  sombre,  the  little  crimson  flycatcher  and  the 
beautiful  pink  flamingo  giving  the  only  touches  of  real  color. 

Of  the  Galapagos  fauna,  the  gigantic  land  tortoises  from  wdiich 
the  islands  get  their  name,  gahrpago  being  the  Spanish  for  tortoise, 
naturally  claim  first  attention.  These  huge  and  grotesque  reptiles  have 
been  found  living  in  no  other  place  in  the  world  excc])t  the  islands 
off  southeast  Africa  wiiere  they  no  longer  exist  in  the  wald  state  as 
they  do  in  the  Galapagos.  Whether  the  Galapagos  tortoise  can  sur- 
vive is  a  question.  In  the  past  they  furnished  a  ready  supply  of  fresh 
meat  for  the  early  voyagers,  especially  for  the  whalers  who  frequented 


8  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

the  Pacific,  as  the  waters  around  the  Galapagos  were  one  of  their 
favorite  cruising  grounds.  Tortoises  were  removed  by  the  thousands 
during  the  long  period  of  the  whaling  activity  which  started  in  the 
early  1790's  and  continued  without  decline  until  the  1860's.  At  the 
present  time  these  tortoises  are  hard  pressed  by  their  enemies,  the 
wild  dogs  being  the  worst  if  we  except  man.  AVhile  the  dogs  kill  the 
fully  grown  tortoises,  the  rats  and  hawks  destroy  the  young  as  soon 
as  they  hatch  from  the  egg,  so  that  the  percentage  of  survivors  from 
a  nest  is  undoubtedly  small.  Certainly  the  tortoise  has  an  uphill  bat- 
tle to  survive  and  is  barely  holding  its  own.  The  land  iguana,  formerly 
living  in  large  colonies  on  James,  Indefatigable,  and  Albemarle 
islands,  is  extinct  on  the  two  first  and  very  scarce  on  the  last,  a  few 
scattered  ones  still  surviving  at  the  north  end  of  Albemarle  where 
the  dogs,  owing  to  the  extreme  roughness  of  the  terrain,  have  not 
penetrated  to  any  great  extent.  Colonies  on  Barrington  and  South 
Seymour  [Baltra],  the  other  islands  they  are  known  to  inhabit,  have 
been  successful  in  surviving,  man  being  their  worst  enemy. 

The  sea  iguana,  found  nowhere  else  in  the  world,  is  unique  in  that 
it  is  the  only  reptile  known  that  depends  solely  on  the  sea  for  its 
food.  This  inhabitant  of  the  Galapagos  is  abundant  and  is  probably 
the  native  species  that  stands  the  best  chance  for  suiwival.  Living 
along  the  rocky  coasts  where  their  food,  a  species  of  sea  lettuce,  is 
found,  they  can  take  to  the  water  and  swim  to  outlying  rocks  for 
safety,  their  only  risk  that  of  being  cauglit  by  a  shark  while  en  route. 
A  great  danger,  however,  which  these  iguanas  have  to  face  is  that  of 
having  their  nests  destroyed  by  dogs,  rats,  or  pigs. 

Excluding  a  species  of  sea  snake,  which  has  been  seen  in  Galapagos 
waters,  and  is  of  course  venomous,  a  few  species  of  lizards  and  harm- 
less snakes  complete  the  reptile  fauna. 

Bird  life  is  abundant  on  the  islands  and  there  are  various  types 
of  land  birds,  such  as  hawks,  owls,  and  flycatchers,  together  with  the 
little  finches  that  so  excited  Darwin's  curiosity.  Among  the  water 
birds  are  ducks,  herons,  and  the  beautiful  pink  flamingos  which  are 
found  ill  the  lagoons  along  the  coasts.  Like  many  other  isolated 
islands,  the  Galapagos  furnish  nesting  sites  for  thousands  upon  thou- 
sands of  sea  birds.  One  of  these,  the  flightless  cormorant,  like  the  sea 
iguana  is  found  nowhere  else  in  the  world. 

Tiie  iiiaiiimal  and  insect  faunas,  to  say  the  least,  are  both  incon- 
spicuous, the  foniicr  consisting  of  a  bat  and  a  few  species  of  rodents, 
some  of  which  may  recently  have  been  eliminated  l)ecause  of  their  in- 
ability to  compete  with  introduced  rats.  The  insect  fauna  consists  of 
various  types  of  beetles  and  the  like,  together  with  a  few  species  of 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  9 

butterflies  and  lunvk-motlis,  not  one  of  which  attains  the  beautiful  col- 
oring- of  many  of  the  species  on  the  adjacent  mainland. 

Native  faunas  tliroughout  the  world  are  having  a  struggle  to  sur- 
vive and  that  of  the  Galapagos  is  not  an  exception.  Besides  having  to 
contend  with  man  for  four  hundred  years  and  more,  natural  and 
introduced  enemies  nuike  survival  so  precarious  that  even  though 
the  government  of  Ecuador  has  wisely  made  the  archipelago  a  wild- 
life refuge,  it  is  a  question  whether  much  of  its  native  animal  life 
will  survive.  It  may  be  that  the  small  land  birds  will  go  completely, 
as  the  cats  increase,  just  as  some  species  have  done  in  other  places, 
for  example  on  Guadalupe  Island  off  Baja  California,  Mexico. 

Volcanoes 

The  Galapagos  are  certainly  a  land  of  fire,  but  whether  the  Inca 
Tupac  Yupanqui  ever  saw  the  legendary  Nina-Chumbi,  island  of  fire, 
no  one  know^s.  Various  early  voyagers  were  greatly  impressed  by  the 
great  volcanoes  and  invariably  mention  them  in  the  accounts  of 
their  travels. 

In  1801,  Amasa  Delano  observed,  from  his  anchorage  at  James 
Bay,  a  remarkable  eruption  of  one  of  the  mountains  of  central  Albe- 
marle. Probably  the  greatest  eruption  ever  seen,  however,  was  that 
observed  by  Captain  Benjamin  Morrell  of  the  sealing  schooner  Tartar 
when  the  main  crater  of  Narborough  erupted  in  February,  1825.  His 
vessel  was  anchored  in  Banks  Bay  when  at  4 :30  a.m.  the  molten  lava 
started  pouring  over  the  rim  of  the  crater  forming  a  river  of  liquid 
fire  that  flowed  to  the  sea.  By  11  a.m.  the  temperature  reached  113°F. 
and  that  of  the  water  100°.  The  eruption  continued  and  the  situation 
of  the  vessel  became  perilous,  though  she  was  anchored  some  ten  miles 
to  the  northward  of  the  volcano.  The  heat,  however,  was  so  great 
that  pitch  in  the  vessel's  seams  melted  and  the  tar  dropped  from  the 
rigging.  The  following  day,  several  of  the  crew  complained  of  faint- 
ness  when  the  temperature  rose  to  123°  and  the  water  to  105°. 

Fortunately,  a  light  easterly  breeze  sprang  up  at  8  p.]\l,  the  anchor 
Avas  hoisted,  and  the  Tartar  was  able  to  make  its  way  through  the 
channel  between  Albemarle  and  Narborough  islands,  thus  saving  itself 
from  a  catastrophe.  While  passing  through  the  strait,  the  thermometer 
rose  to  147°  and  the  water  to  150°.  By  11  p.m.  the  schooner  anchored 
at  the  southern  end  of  Elizabeth  Bay,  but  as  the  volcano  continued  to 
erupt  the  heat  became  so  intense  that  the  anchorage  was  abandoned. 
The  Tartar  was  still  within  sight  of  the  volcano  almost  two  weeks  from 


10  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

the  start  of  the  eruption,  and  though  the  violence  had  subsided,  the 
volcano  was  still  active.  This  was  probably  as  great  an  eruption  as  any 
ever  seen  by  man.  Narborough  seems  to  be  a  particularly  active  volcano 
as  Lord  Byron,  while  at  Tagus  Cove  on  H.M.S.  Blonde,  observed  an 
eruption  just  the  year  before  (1825). 

Many  late  visitors  have  reported  seeing  minor  craters  active.  A 
British  naval  officer.  Captain  Donald  McLennan,  in  command  of  the 
brig  ColoJiel  Allan,  who  sailed  from  Clrovesend  on  August  19,  1817, 
for  the  South  Seas,  stopped  at  the  islands  and  mentioned  "there  are 
several  volcanos  on  tlie  Islands  that  are  occasionally  seen  to  burn 
with  great  fury,  one  of  which  was  seen  by  the  Colonel  Allan  on  her 
last  voyage,  about  two  years  since,  the  flames  fi'om  it  rose  to  a  great 
height  and  was  seen  at  the  distance  of  several  leagues." 

Captain  McLennan  also  saw  several  of  the  minor  craters  of  Albe- 
marle in  eruption. 

On  the  expedition  of  the  California  Academy  of  Sciences  in  1905- 
06,  many  fumaroles  were  seen,  and  Bindloe,  Abingdon,  James,  and  the 
great  crater  of  Villamil  ^Mountain  were  all  spouting  steam.  Dr.  Wil- 
liam Beebe,  in  1925,  witnessed  a  minor  crater  in  eruption  near  Cape 
Marshall,  Albemarle,  as  did  Captain  Lackey  of  the  LT.S.S.  Mempliis 
in  1938  and  Templeton  Crocker's  yacht  Zaca  in  1933.  On  the  voyage 
of  Captain  Allan  Hancock's  Oaxaca  in  1937-38,  a  spectacular  erup- 
tion of  a  minor  crater  in  southeastern  Narborougli  was  observed,  tlie 
molten  red  lava  pouring  into  the  sea,  discoloring  the  water  and  killing, 
thousands  of  fish.  Volcanic  activity  is  more  apt  to  be  seen  in  northern 
Albemarle  and  on  Narborough  where  secondary  craters  are  numerous. 
Of  late  years,  not  a  single  one  of  the  main  craters  has  shown  any  signs 
of  recent  eruptions  with  the  exception  of  the  Villamil  ^lountain  crater, 
where  a  jet  of  steam  has  been  in  evidence  for  many  years.  It  is  here 
that  a  small  sulphur  deposit,  claimed  to  ])e  of  a  very  high  grade,  has 
been  worked  at  intervals. 

Clijniate 

Though  the  Galapagos  are  situated  dircdly  on  the  equator,  which 
would  lead  one  to  suppose  that  tempcralui-cs  might  be  excessive,  the 
islands  have  a  delightful  climate,  the  thermometer  rarely  going  above 
SOT.  The  Humboldt  Current,  sweeping  u])  from  the  south,  turns 
westward  when  it  reaches  the  Ecuadorian  coast  and,  ])assing  through 
the  southern  grouj)  of  the  Galapagos,  ])athes  their  shores  with  the  cool 
waters  of  the  Antarctic,  creating  an  ideal  climate.   The  Panama  Cur- 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  11 

rent,  whicli  is  several  degrees  warmer,  encircles  the  northern  group  of 
islands,  but  these,  too,  have  a  climate  that  is  delightful. 

The  seasons  are  variable  and  uncertain,  but  si)ring  may  ])e  con- 
sidered as  llic  period  bclweeu  -lanuary  and  .luuc,  while  duly  to  De- 
cember may  be  considered  the  dry  season,  although  at  high  elevations, 
which  are  usually  covered  with  clouds,  there  is  considerable  moisture. 
Dampier  (1864)  found  rains  in  November-December  and  January  and 
fair  weather  in  i\Iay-June-July-August. 

The  prevailing  southeasterly  winds  support  vegetation  on  the  higher 
elevations  and  in  some  cases,  as  at  Iguana  Cove,  it  extends  to  the 
beach  line.  Despite  the  tremendous  eruptions  that  have  taken  place 
on  Narborough  Island,  there  is  a  considerable  green  zone  on  the 
western  slopes. 

Discovery 

Whether  the  Inca  king,  Tupac  Yupanqui,  who  is  credited  by  Sar- 
miento  with  having  discovered  the  Galapagos  Islands,  really  did  so 
is  a  ciuestion.  As  the  Incas  possessed  no  written  language,  the  story 
of  the  voyage  of  the  Inca  king  is  purely  legendary. 

The  compilation  of  the  Inca  history  entrusted  to  Captain  Pedro 
Sarmiento  de  Gamboa,  cosmographer  of  Peru,  by  Don  Francisco  de 
Toledo,  viceroy,  governor,  and  captain  general  of  the  kingdom  of  Peru, 
is  from  information  given  by  the  Inca  descendants  who  were  called 
upon  to  give  testimony  to  the  traditions  handed  down  by  their  ancestors 
and  which  were  supposed  to  have  been  learned  by  heart. 

The  story  of  some  merchants  coming  from  western  seas  and  giving 
glowing  accounts  of  the  land  from  whence  they  came,  reached  the  ears 
of  Tupac  Yupanqui,  an  ambitious  man  who  was  not  satisfied  with 
the  lands  in  his  possession  but  longed  for  further  conquests.  To  assure 
himself  that  the  merchants  of  the  West  were  giving  a  truthful  account 
of  their  voyage,  he  called  upon  Antarqui,  renowned  for  his  magic 
powers,  to  give  an  opinion  as  to  their  truthfulness.  Having  assured 
the  Inca  king  their  stories  were  true,  Antarqui  set  out  to  prove  it 
by  making  the  voyage  to  the  Avest  himself  and  came  back  w4th  re- 
markable tales  of  his  exploration.  Thus  assured,  Tupac  Yupanqui  is 
said  to  have  embarked  with  some  twenty  thousand  men  on  a  fleet 
of  rafts  leaving,  according  to  Miguel  Cavello  de  Balboa,  from  the  coast 
of  Manta  near  Guayaquil  on  a  voyage  wdiich  lasted  more  than  a  year. 
As  the  legend  goes,  Tupac  Yupanqui  sailed  on  and  on  until  he  dis- 
covered two  islands  which  he  named  Nina-Chumbi  (island  of  fire) 
and  Ilahua-Chumbi    (outer  island).    These,  Cavello  says,  may  have 


12 


CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES 


[Oc.  Papkrs 


Fig.  4.  The  Very  Reverend  Fray  Tomas  de  Berlanga,  Fourth  Bishop  of 
Panama  and  discoverer  of  the  Galapagos  Islands.  (From  a  wood  carving  in  the 
Church  of  Santa  Maria  del  Mercado,  Berlanga,  Spain.) 


No.  1^5]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  13 

been  two  of  the  (lab'ipajios.  Upon  tlic  return  from  his  voyage,  which 
is  supi^osed  to  have  taken  phice  sixty  years  or  so  previous  to  that  of 
Fray  Tomas  de  Berlanga,  it  is  stated  he  brought  ])ac'k  the  skin  and 
jawbone  of  a  horse.  The  Spaniards  state,  however,  that  the  iiorse  was 
unknown  to  the  Indians  of  the  New  World  until  1519,  when  Hernando 
Cortes  landed  at  Vei-a  Cruz  to  begin  his  march  on  the  capital  of  the 
Aztecs,  at  which  time  he  brought  some  sixteen  horses  to  be  u.sed  for 
cavalry  mounts. 

Of  course,  it  is  well  known  that  the  early  navigators  did  make 
voyages  on  various  types  of  rafts  rigged  with  sails  and  rudders,  or 
centerboards  which  acted  as  such,  but  to  transport  an  army  of  twenty 
thousand  men  over  seas  and  be  out  for  more  than  a  year  seems  rather 
improbable. 

History  records  the  discoverer  of  the  Galapagos  as  Fray  Tomas 
de  Berlanga,  the  Bisho])  of  Panama.  He  was  born  in  Berlanga,  Spain 
(the  date  uncertain),  and  died  in  the  town  of  his  birth  in  1551,  being 
buried  in  the  Capilla  del  Obispo  de  Panama  o  de  los  Cristos  of  the 
Colegiata  de  Berlanga. 

Admitted  to  the  Dominican  Order  at  San  Esteban  de  Salamanca 
in  1508,  he  obtained  at  Eome  in  1528  the  establishment  of  a  separate 
province  named  Santa  Cruz,  of  which  he  was  made  provincial  in  1530. 
His  territory  included  all  lands  so  far  discovered  and  to  be  discovered 
on  the  w^est  coast  of  South  America,  so  the  then  unknown  Galapagos 
Islands  came  wdthin  his  jurisdiction.  In  1533  Fray  Tomas  succeeded 
the  Franciscan  Friar  ]Marti  Bejar  and  became  the  fourth  Bishop 
of  Panama. 

Spanish  conquests  in  the  New  World  now  saw  the  Empire  of  the 
Incas  fall  to  Pizarro  and  his  lieutenant  Diego  de  Almagro,  who  ex- 
tended their  conquests  farther  southward  bringing  more  territory 
into  the  diocese  of  Bishop  Tomas. 

Eumors  of  dissension  between  the  conquerors  having  reached  the 
ears  of  Emperor  Carlos  V,  he  issued  a  decree  dated  July  19,  1534, 
giving  the  power  to  Fray  Tomas  de  Berlanga  to  arbitrate  any  dispute 
between  them  and  ordering  the  bishop  to  Peru  on  his  mission.  Leav- 
ing Panama  on  February  23,  1535,  his  vessel  was  caught  in  one  of 
the  calms  so  prevalent  in  those  regions,  and  the  equatorial  current, 
setting  his  vessel  to  the  westward,  carried  him  out  to  the  Galapagos. 
His  letter  to  his  Emperor  is  the  first  document  ever  written  pertaining 
to  them.  This  most  interesting  letter,  a  translation  of  wliich  follows,  con- 
tains the  first  mention  of  the  giant  land  tortoises  inhabiting  the  Gala- 
pagos and  from  which  the  archipelago  gets  its  name,  the  tameness  of  the 


14 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


[Oc.  Papers 


Fig.  5.    Capillu  del  Obispo  de  Panama  o  de  los  Cristos,  burial  place  of  Fray 
Tomas.   The  large  slab  of  dark  slate  at  the  foot  of  the  altar  covers  the  tomb. 


birds  which  has  been  remarked  upon  by  mo.st  all  visitors  thereafter, 
and  the  grotesque  iguanas  which  constitute  another  remarkable  fea- 
ture of  a  most  unique  fauna.  Little  did  the  reverend  bishop  know  that 
he  had  discovered  a  zoological  paradise  that  was  to  claim  the  atten- 
tion of  the  world's  leading  scientists  for  well  over  a  hundred  years 
ainl  which  still  continues  to  do  so. 

Puerto  Viejo,  April  26,  1535. 
Sacred  Imperial  Catholic  Majesty: 

It  seemed  right  to  me  to  let  Your  Majesty  know  the  progress  of  my 
trip  from  the  time  when  I  left  Panama,  which  was  on  the  twenty- 
third  of  Fel)iuary  of  the  current  year,  until  I  arrived  in  this  new 
town  of  Puerto  Viejo. 

The  ship  sailed  with  very  good  breezes  for  seven  days,  and  the 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  15 

pilot  kept  near  land  and  we  had  a  six-day  calm;  the  currents  wei'e 
so  strong  and  engulfed  us  in  such  a  way  that  on  Wednesday,  the  tenth 
of  March,  we  sighted  an  island;  and,  as  on  board  there  was  enough 
water  for  only  tw-o  more  days,  they  agreed  to  lower  the  life-boat  and 
go  on  land  for  water  and  grass  for  the  horses,  and  once  out,  they 
found  nothing  but  seals,  and  turtles,  and  such  big  tortoises,  that  each 
could  carry  a  man  on  top  of  itself,  and  many  iguanas  that  are  like 
serpents. 

On  another  day,  we  saw  another  island  larger  than  the  first,  and 
with  great  sierras;  and  thinking  that  on  account  of  its  size  and  mon- 
strous shape,  there  could  not  fail  to  be  rivers  and  fruits,  we  went 
to  it,  because  the  distance  around  the  first  one  was  about  four  or  five 
leagues  and  around  the  other,  ten  or  twelve  leagues,  and  at  this  junc- 
ture the  water  on  the  ship  gave  out  and  we  were  three  days  in  reach- 
ing the  island  on  account  of  the  calms,  during  which  all  of  us,  as  well 
as  the  horses,  suffered  great  hardships. 

The  boat  once  anchored,  we  all  went  on  land,  and  some  were  given 
charge  of  making  a  well,  and  others  looking  for  water  over  the 
island;  from  the  well  there  came  out  water  saltier  than  that  of  the 
sea;  on  land  they  were  not  able  to  find  even  a  drop  of  water  for  two 
days  and  with  the  thirst  the  people  felt  they  resorted  to  a  leaf  of 
some  thistles  like  prickly  pears,  and  because  they  were  somewhat 
juicy,  although  not  very  tasty,  we  began  to  eat  of  them  and  squeeze 
them  to  draw  all  the  water  from  them,  and  drawn,  it  looked  like 
slops,  or  lye,  and  they  drank  of  it  as  if  it  were  rose  water. 

On  Passion  Sunday,  I  had  them  bring  on  land  the  things  necessary 
for  saying  Mass,  and  after  it  was  said,  I  again  sent  the  people  in 
twos  and  threes,  over  different  parts.  The  Lord  deigned  that  they 
should  find  in  a  ravine  among  the  rocks  as  much  as  a  hogshead  of 
water,  and  after  they  had  drawn  that,  they  found  more  and  more. 
In  fine,  eight  hogsheads  were  filled  and  the  barrels  and  the  jugs  that 
there  were  on  the  boat,  but  through  the  lack  of  water  we  lost  one 
man  and  two  days  after  we  left  the  island  we  lost  another;  and  ten 
horses  died. 

From  this  island  we  saw  two  others,  one  much  larger  than  all, 
which  was  easily  fifteen  or  twenty  leagues  around;  the  other  was 
medium;  I  took  the  latitude  to  know  where  the  islands  were  and 
they  are  between  half  a  degree  and  a  degree  and  a  half  south  lati- 
tude. On  this  second  one,  the  same  conditions  prevailed  as  on  the 
first;  many  seals,  turtles,  iguanas,  tortoises,  many  birds  like  those 
of  Spain,  but  so  silly  they  do  not  know  how  to  flee,  and  many  were 
caught  in  the  hand.  The  other  two  islands  we  did  not  touch;  I  do 
not  know  their  character.  On  this  one,  on  the  sands  of  the  shore, 
there  were  small  stones,  that  we  stepped  on  as  we  landed,  and  they 
were  diamond-like  stones  and  others  amber  colored;  but  on  this  whole 
island,  I  do  not  think  that  there  is  a  place  where  one  might  sow  a 
bushel  of  corn,  because  most  of  it  is  full  of  very  big  stones,  so  much 
so,  that  it  seems  as  though  some  time  God  had  showered  stones;  and 
the  earth  that  there  is,  is  like  dross,  worthless,  because  it  has  not 


16  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Ot.  Papers 

the  power  of  raising  a  little  grass,  but  only  some  thistles,  the  leaf 
of  which  I  said  we  picked.  Thinking  that  we  were  not  more  than 
twenty  or  thirty  leagues  from  this  soil  of  Peru,  we  were  satisfied 
with  the  water  already  mentioned,  although  we  might  have  filled 
more  of  our  casks;  but  we  set  sail,  and  with  medium  weather  we 
sailed  eleven  days  without  sighting  land,  and  the  pilot  and  the  mas- 
ter of  the  ship  came  to  me  to  ask  me  where  we  were  and  to  tell  me 
there  was  only  one  hogshead  of  water  on  the  ship.  I  tried  to  take 
the  altitude  of  the  sun  that  day  and  found  that  we  were  three  degrees 
south  latitude,  and  I  realized  that  with  the  direction  we  were  tak- 
ing, we  were  becoming  more  and  more  engulfed,  that  we  were  not 
even  heading  for  land,  because  we  were  sailing  south;  I  had  them 
tack  on  the  other  side,  and  the  hogshead  of  water  I  had  divided  as 
follows:  half  was  given  for  the  animals,  and  with  the  other  half  a 
beverage  was  made  which  was  put  into  the  wine  cask,  for  I  held  it 
as  certain  that  we  could  not  be  far  from  land,  and  we  sailed  for 
eight  days,  all  of  which  the  hogshead  of  the  beverage  lasted,  by 
giving  a  ration  to  each  one  with  which  he  was  satisfied.  And  when 
the  hogshead  gave  out  and  there  was  no  relief  for  us,  we  sighted  land 
and  we  had  calm  for  two  days,  during  which  we  drank  only  wine, 
but  we  took  heart  on  sighting  land.  We  entered  the  bay  and  river  of 
the  Caraques  on  Friday,  the  ninth  of  April,  and  we  met  there  the 
people  of  the  galleon  from  Nicaragua,  who  had  left  Nicaragua  eight 
months  before,  so  we  considered  our  trip  good  in  comparison  with 
theirs. 

The  bay  of  the  Caraques  is  at  half  a  degree  south  latitude  and  on 
the  maps  it  is  three  degrees;  from  this  bay  to  Puerto  Vie  jo  it  is  nine 
leagues  along  the  sea-coast;  and  the  said  bay  is  one  of  the  most  beau- 
tiful ports  that  there  can  be  in  the  world,  and  the  boats  can  moor 
there,  and  they  can  sail  up  it  three  or  four  leagues  and  they  do  not 
know  whether  any  more.  Commander  Pedro  de  Alvarado  landed 
here  and  destroyed  a  town  of  Indians  that  was  there  and  frightened 
others;  and  it  is  a  pity  to  see  the  havoc  wherever  he  went  with 
his  men. 

From  this  bay  I  landed  with  the  passengers  and  we  set  out  on 
foot,  because  our  animals  were  worn  out  from  coming  to  this  town 
from  Puerto  Viejo,  and  walking,  we  came  to  a  valley  which  is  called 
Charapoto,  which  has  a  very  good  river,  where  there  are  many 
Indians  now  peaceful,  because  Captain  Francisco  Pizarro  has  behaved 
so  well  that  he  is  at  peace  with  about  thirty  chiefs.  This  captain  and 
lieutenant  governor  is  so  well  looked  upon  l)y  them  that  they  bring 
him  food  of  corn  and  fish  and  venison,  and  whatever  is  necessary, 
and  if  by  chance  when  they  go  to  see  some  land  they  capture  some 
Indians,  they  immediately  return  them  to  their  native  soil  and 
they  give  them  a  cross,  so  that  on  account  of  it  no  Spaniard  will  do 
them  any  narm,  and  that  any  one  who  wants  to  come  to  see  it  should 
l)ring  some  sign  and  that  way  no  harm  will  be  done  to  them.  If 
he  learns  that  any  gold  or  silver  is  taken  from  them,  he  immediately 
has  it  I'eturned  to  them,  and  some  of  them  have  brought  it  to  him 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  17 

and  he  tells  them  that  he  has  not  come  for  their  gold  or  their  silver, 
hut  rather  so  that  they  may  know  God  and  your  Majesty,  and  that 
your  Majesty  will  give  them  masters,  who  will  have  charge  of  teach- 
ing them  the  things  of  the  Holy  Catholic  Faith,  and  that,  on  account 
of  their  solicitude,  they  must  undertake  to  feed  them.  The  keeping 
of  this  Captain  seems  to  me  very  very  good  for  the  serving  of  Our 
Lord  and  Your  Majesty,  and  for  relieving  your  royal  conscience;  and 
since  he  has  a  great  thing  to  do,  I  have  told  him  your  Majesty's  in- 
tention in  this  matter,  and  he  is  determined  not  to  deviate  from  it 
very  soon. 

There  are  great  gold  mines,  and  here  I  have  the  information  from 
those  who  were  with  Alvarado,  that  six  leagues  from  this  town 
there  are  very  good  gold  mines.  There  is  thought  to  be  a  bed  of 
emeralds,  because  the  Indians  have  them  in  their  jewelry;  ordi- 
narily the  said  Indians  have  their  touches  and  points  and  some  of 
them  of  very  great  qualities.  It  is  thought  that  before  half  a  year  a 
good  part  of  this  land  will  be  peaceful,  owing  to  the  good  treatment 
given  them  by  the  already  mentioned  captain  and  lieutenant;  and 
your  Majesty  should  support  him  in  it,  and  it  is  necessary  consid- 
ering the  importunities  of  the  men  that  he  has,  because  they  follow 
with  longing  eyes  every  trace  of  gold  that  they  see. 

God  willing,  I  shall  leave  for  the  town  of  San  Miguel  in  four  days. 
The  whereabouts  of  the  Governor,  Don  Francisco  Pizarro,  is  not 
known  at  present.  He  is  quite  far  from  here,  although  some  think 
and  they  said  that  he  is  coming  to  the  Town  of  Truxillo,  which  is 
between  San  Miguel  and  Xauxa. 

The  Lord  fill  Your  Sacred  Majesty  with  holy  love  and  grace  for 
many  years  and  with  the  conservation  of  your  realms  and  an  in- 
crease of  other  new  ones  as  I  hope.  From  this  new  town  of  Puerto 
Viejo,  the  twenty-sixth  of  April,  in  the  year  fifteen  hundred  and 
thirty-five.  I  am  Your  Sacred  Imperial  Catholic  Majesty's  most  true 
servant  and  subject  and  perpetual  Chaplain  who  kisses  your  royal 
feet  and  hands.  Fray  Tomas  eps.  Locastelli  Auril. 

Origin 

The  origin  of  the  Islands  is  still  a  question  of  debate.  Whether 
they  are  oceanic  islands  thrust  up  from  the  ocean  bed  or  whether 
they  were  formed  by  subsidence  has  claimed  the  attention  of  the 
most  renowned  naturalists  and  geologists  from  the  time  of  Darwin's 
voyage  on  the  Beagle  to  the  present  day.  When  Darwin,  Baur,  Agassiz, 
and  many  other  scholars  pursued  their  studies,  they  did  not  have 
the  advantage  of  those  who  came  after  them,  being  entirely  unaware 
that  Pliocene  fossils  existed  on  certain  of  the  islands;  nor  did  they 
have  the  flora  and  fauna  at  hand  that  enabled  later  students  to  draw 
their  conclusions. 


18  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

There  were  two  distinct  schools  of  thought  on  the  subject.  Such 
noted  scientists  as  Darwin,  Wallace,  Agassiz,  Wolf,  and  many  others 
were  strong  advocates  of  the  oceanic  theory,  while  Ridgway,  Gadow, 
Van  Denburgh,  Barbour,  and  Baur  were  in  favor  of  subsidence. 

It  was,  however,  more  or  less  a  general  opinion  amongst  many  that 
there  was  a  Galapagos  land  mass  extending  much  closer  to  the  coast 
than  the  islands  do  today,  but  not  necessarily  a  direct  connection  with 
the  mainland. 

The  late  Ur.  John  Van  Denburgh  of  the  Academy's  staff  made  an 
exhaustive  study  of  the  reptiles  and  came  to  the  conclusion  that  at 
one  time  there  was  a  Galapagos  land  mass  that  gradually  broke  up 
to  form  the  present  archipelago.  Remarkably  enough,  he  thought  that 
Duncan  Island,  which  shows  signs  of  great  age,  was  an  island  in  a 
crater-like  bay  before  the  islands  surrounding  it  were  actually  sep- 
arated from  each  other.  A  parallel  case  in  miniature  is  taking  place 
today,  the  crater  of  Narborough  containing  a  lake  with  a  small  crater 
near  its  center,  which  in  turn  contains  a  small  lake. 

Cartography 

The  position  of  the  Galapagos  was  fairly  well  known  to  the  early 
navigators.  Bishop  Tomas,  while  on  his  voyage  from  Panama  to  Peru, 
took  the  latitude  and  placed  the  islands  as  being  between  half  a  degree 
and  a  degree  and  a  half  south  of  the  ecpiator,  so  he  was  not  far  off  in  his 
calculations  as  the  main  portion  of  the  archipelago  does  extend  1°25' 
south  of  the  equator.  The  islands  appear  on  Ortelius'  Theatruni  Orhis 
Terrarum,  published  at  Antwerp  in  1570,  as  "Insulae  de  los  Galo- 
pegos,"  and  in  his  Peniviae  Auriferae  Regionis  Typiis,  of  1574  they 
are  named  "Isolas  de  Galapagas"  and  are  represented  as  one  island 
witli  two  adjacent  islets. 

The  Jesuit  Father  Matteo  Ricci's  Chinese  Maps  of  the  World  ( 1584- 
1608)  show  an  area  labeled  "South  Seas"  and  a  group  of  islands  in 
the  approximate  position  of  the  Galapagos,  though  no  name  is  given 
them. 

The  early  navigators  placed  them  about  two  degrees  to  Ihe  west- 
ward of  the  80th  meridian,  ])ut  Dampier,  one  of  the  early  buccaneers, 
claimed  they  were  farther  to  the  westward,  and  in  this  he  was  cor- 
rect as  the  main  portion  of  the  archipelago  lies  west  of  tlie  f)0th,  and 
all  of  it  to  the  westward  of  the  8nth  meridian. 

While  the  Gah'ipagos  appeared  as  early  as  1570  on  the  chart  of 
Abraham  Ortelius,  as  well  as  on  other  charts  by  various  cartographers 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


19 


at  laid'  dates,  no  a1tonii)t  was  made  to  attach  individual  names  until 
William  Ambrose  Cowley  made  his  chart  of  1684  and  Captain  Col- 
nett  made  his  in  1798-171)4.  They  were  named  mostly  after  the  Eng- 
lisli  king-s,  admirals,  the  nobility,  buccaneers,  and  early  visitors  to 
the  islands. 

After  1570,  the  islands  appeared  on  many  maps  of  the  early  car- 
togra])hers.    A  ma]>  drawn  by  Guilielmus  Hack,  in  16S4,  shows  the 


C;aI.I.AFA«6s  tm.Xyiys  ,  /ffJrrrl^^U  Amhmme  CowW  ••  lB«4 


T 


u 


«M 


I       ) 


kUnd 


S3 


LoHWraman* 


Idamt 


1  -  —  - 


T   Jf  JC        C    R   JE    .4     T 


Byml 

Kami  ar  MuiniDoMs 


S    O    U    T  H 


Jl^l.  »^«  Kx* 


BmJltv>tt4. 


FtTf^tM 


Di-M*  or  yomroLUt 

ISLAXO 


I 


S       E 


A 


KiliK  (TiarU"*"!"  l»lan«l 


V  ^; 


trm^iJtuU  ft'mrf    84  /hr*tfi  du  I.iutnt 


fti 


—  • 


\  It    /».  /,/^fiJ  .iMiai  Harm  dr  f.itr^tttln  nm-fAtut  tx  tO  ■ntlalf'm  fr»m  .USrm,tr4r  {.rUlui 


Fig.  6.  First  chart  of  tlie  Galapagos  Islands,  made  by  Ambrose  Cowley  in 
1684.  He  also  made  enlarged  drawings  of  many  of  the  islands,  two  of  which 
are  shown  in  figures  7  and  8. 


20  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

islands  without  individual  names  and  the  printer's  name  is  not  given. 

Another  map,  printed  for  II.  Moll  of  London,  1744,  entitled  A  Map 
of  South  America  With  aU  the  European  Settlements  d'  whutever 
else  is  remarkable  from  the  latest  &  best  Observations,  shows  the  islands 
in  their  relative  positions  and  gives  the  old  English  names,  as  does 
a  chart  by  Samuel  Dunn,  ])rinted  in  1787  by  Laurie  and  Whittle  of 
London.  A  chart  with  no  more  data  than  the  name  Nueva  y  Correcta 
Carta  Del  Mar  Pacific  a  6  del  Sur,  dated  1744,  shows  some  twelve 
islands  with  old  Spanish  names  used  as  follows :  Isla  de  Esperanza, 
San  Clemente,  Isabel,  Carenero,  and  Maria  del  Aguado.  With  the 
exception  of  Isabel  (Albemarle),  it  is  impossible  to  name  them  by 
comparing  them  with  a  modern  map. 

Mercator  in  his  Orbis  Terrae  Compendioso  Descripto  of  1587, 
represents  the  Galapagos  as  a  cluster  of  islets  just  above  the  equator 
and  in  his  map  of  the  New  World,  1622,  just  below  it.  There  seemed 
to  be  no  doubt  to  any  of  the  cartographers  that  the  islands  were  on 
or  close  to  the  equator.  Tatton's  map,  of  1600,  represents  the  archi- 
pelago by  a  small  cluster  of  islets  just  below  the  equator,  and  Herrar's 
map,  of  1601,  is  practically  identical. 

In  1793-94,  Captain  James  Colnett  made  a  chart  in  which  the 
islands  are  fairly  correct  as  to  their  relative  positions.  This  was  the 
first  chart  that  could  be  considered  as  at  all  workable.  Arrowsmith 
of  London  printed  a  chart  in  1798  which  is  based  on  Colnett's,  but 
it  is  not  nearly  so  complete  inasmuch  as  coastlines  are  omitted  and 
Indefatigable,  which  is  called  Norfolk,  is  represented  as  a  mere  islet. 
Also,  much  useful  information  given  in  the  original  chart  is  omitted, 
such  as  places  to  water  and  careen  ships,  and  to  gather  wood.  It  is 
noteworthy  that  the  famous  Galapagos  "post  office"  is  marked  on  the 
original  chart,  though  no  mention  is  made  of  it  in  Colnett's  log. 

In  the  early  1800's,  three  other  charts  of  the  Galapagos  came  into 
being  and  ap])ai-ently  were  part  of  the  work  of  Captain  Colnett,  though 
none  was  as  complete  as  his  first  one.  All  have  the  same  error  in  the 
coastline  of  Albemarle,  each  one  showing  a  large  bight  in  the  south- 
east coast  of  the  island.  Tiiis  is  the  worst  error  in  Colnett's  chart,. 
It  was  corrected  in  the  survey  of  II. M.S.  Beagle  in  1835.  The  charts 
in  question  are  tliose  of  Captain  l*()i'ter  of  tlie  U.S.  frigate  Essex; 
Captain  P.  Pi])on,  K.N.,  of  II.M.S.  Tdf/us;  and  Captain  -lohn  Fyffe  of 
II. M.S.  Indi faliqablc.  None  of  them  can  be  said  to  e(|ual  th(>  original 
of  Captain  (V)lnett. 

It  was  not  until  LS35  that  a  real  survey  was  undertaken  and  that 
was  done  by  II.M.S.  Beagle  under  command  of  Captain  Kobert  Fitz- 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


21 


Roy,  R.N.  This  distinonished  officer  nuide  a  complete  survey  of  the 
archipelago  and  i)rodiiced  a  real  navigational  chart  that  was  pub- 
lished by  the  Ilydrograpliic  Office  of  the  Admiralty  and  used  by  all 
countries  from  the  date  of  the  survey  until  the  year  1942,  when 
another  survey  was  made  by  the  U.S.S.  Bowditch. 

During-  the  cruise  of  the  Beagle,  many  detailed  anchorages  were 
made  on  the  following  islands :  Albemarle,  at  Iguana  Cove  and  Tagus 
rove;  Charles,  at  Post  Office  Bay;  Chatham,  at  Freshwater  Bay  and 
Tarrapin  Road;  Hood,  at  Gardner  Bay;  James,  at  Sulivan  Bay. 

Ships  of  the  Royal  Navy  going  to  and  homeward  bound  from  sta- 
tion at  Esquimault,  B.  C,  stopped  at  the  Galapagos  on  the  lookout 
for  shipwrecked  sailors  on  their  inhospitable  shores.  They  took  ad- 
vantage of  their  various  visits  to  plot  additional  anchorages. 

In  18-1:6,  II.M.S.  Pandora  surveyed  Conway  Bay,  Indefatigable 
Island,  and  resurveyed  Post  Office  Bay,  Charles  Island,  and  Fresh- 
water Bay,  Chatham  Island. 

^Midshipman  G.  W.  P.  Edwardes  of  the  Daphne  made  a  sketch 
of  the  latter  spot,  showing  the  difficulties  that  would  be  encountered 
watering  on  a  rocky  coast  five  miles  off  a  lee  shore,  the  prevailing 


Fig.  7.    Cowley's  drawing  of  Albemarle  Island. 


22 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


[Oc.  Papers 


winds  being  from  the  southeast.  In  later  years,  two  more  anchorages 
were  plotted  by  the  British:  Sappho  Cove,  Chatham  Island,  by 
H.M.S.  Sappho,  after  which  the  cove  was  named,  and  Webb  Cove, 
Albemarle  Island,  named  after  CI.  A.  C.  Webb,  navigating  officer  of 
H.M.S.  Cormorant,  which  made  the  survey. 

The  Italian,  French,  and  United  States  navies  also  participated 
in  mapping  the  Galapagos.  In  1882  and  1885,  the  Italian  corvette 
Vettor  Pisani  visited  Wreck  Bay,  Chatham  Island,  and  in  1887  Mid- 
shipman Estienne  of  the  French  corvette  Decres  plotted  an  anchor- 
age at  Black  Beach,  Charles  Island.  In  1909,  the  U.S.S.  Yorktown 
charted  Cartago  Bay  on  the  east  coast  of  Albemarle,  and  as  late  as 
1925,  a  reconnaissance  of  Darwin  Bay,  Tower  Island,  was  made  by 
the  U.S.S.  Marhhhead.  In  the  last  general  survey,  made  by  the  U.S.S. 
Boivditch  in  1942,  there  was  at  least  one  major  correction,  the  re- 
moval of  the  supposed  well-formed  crater  on  Indefatigable.  This 
crater  appears  on  all  charts  to  that  date  but  is  now  known  not  to  exist. 
Since  the  islands  were  used  as  a  military  base  during  World  War  II 
they  have  been  flown  over  and  mapped  from  the  air,  and  the  great 
mountains  no  longer  hold  any  secrets. 

A;(lo)i'  ri  |.»1  i  Dihohllic  I  liiKc  o|;  \()r||(ill\.il.sl;i  n  d.  >- 


v■.«■l^•lK■|i.,l 


< 


Fig.  8.    Cowley's  di-iwins  of  Indefatigable  Island  which  he  called  Duke  of 
Norffolk's  Island. 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  23 

In  May,  1932,  Captain  Garland  Rotch  of  the  yacht  Zaca,  while  on 
the  Temploton  Crocker  Expedition  of  the  California  Academy  of  Sci- 
ences to  the  Galapagos  Islands,  made  two  sketch  surveys  of  anchor- 
ages not  yet  charted.  One  of  these  was  on  the  northeast  side  of  Nar- 
borough  Island  and  he  called  it  California  Cove.  The  other  was 
Academy  Bay,  Indefatigable  Island,  locally  known  as  Puerto  Presi- 
dente  Ayora,  although  Academy  Bay  is  its  official  name. 

In  1892,  the  Republic  of  Ecuador  renamed  the  Galapagos  "Archi- 
pielago  de  Colon,"  in  honor  of  the  famed  mariner  Christopher  Co- 
lumbus, and  that  is  the  official  name.  Galapagos,  however,  seems  to 
be  preferred,  and  is  more  commonly  used. 

The  survey  made  by  Captain  Alonzo  de  Torres,  of  the  Spanish 
Xavy,  in  1793,  under  the  orders  of  the  Viceroy  of  Peru,  was  useless 
as  a  navigational  chart,  but  added  some  new  names  to  individual 
islands,  though  it  is  not  possible  to  attach  them  to  the  correct  ones 
in  most  cases. 

From  a  study  of  Cowley's  map,  the  islands  can  be  properly  placed. 
The  large  bight  on  the  west  coast  of  Duke  of  Norfolk  Island  (Inde- 
fatigable) is  Conway  Bay  and  this  gives  a  fix  for  Duncan  Island, 
though  the  island  is  a  little  off  position.  Albemarle  and  James  are 
decidedly  so  and  taking  this  into  consideration  Duncan  Island  is  the 
Sir  Anthony  Dean's^  of  Cowley,  and  his  chart  reads  as  follows: 

Duke  of  Albemarle  Island 

The  Earl  of  Abington's  Island 

Captain  Bindlos's  Island 

Brattles  Island 

King  Charles's  Island 

Grossman's  Island 

Lord  Culpeper's  Island 

Dassigney's  Island  (Chatham) 

Dean's  Island  (Duncan) 

Ewres's  Island  (Tower) 

King  James's  Island 

Narbrough  Island 

Duke  of  Norfolk's  Island  (Indefatigable) 

Lord  Wenman's  Island 

Albanie  Island 

Cowley's  Inchanted  Island 

Considerable  confusion  has  resulted  from  applying  so  many  dif- 
ferent names  to  the  islands.  The  following  list  of  the  more  important 


2  A  famous  shipwright  in  the  reign  of  King  Charles  II. 


24 


CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES 


[Oc.  Papers 


Fig.  9.  Map  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  with  the  principal  islands  and  locali- 
ties named.  Minor  isJands,  rocks,  and  other  localities  are  indicated  by  number 
as  follows:  1.  California  Cove,  2.  Cape  Rose,  3.  Union  Rock,  4.  Bura  Rock, 
5.  Cartago  Bay,  6.  Blanca  Rock,  7.  Cowley  Island,  8.  Albany  Island.  9.  Sulivan 
Bay,  10.  Bainbridge  Rocks,  11.  Beagle  Islands,  12.  Nameless  Island.  13.  Eden 
Island,  14.  Conway  Bay,  15.  Guy  Fawkes  Islands,  16.  Daphne  Islands,  17.  Gordon 
Rocks,  18.  Plaza  Islands,  19;  Wreck  Bay,  20.  Dalrymple  Rock,  21.  Kicker  Rock, 
22.  Sappho  Cove,  23.  Terrapin  Road,  24.  Este  Rock,  25.  Whale  Rock,  26  Lobos 
Rock,  27.  Gardner  Bay,  28.  Black  Beach,  29.  Onslow  Islands,  30.  Champion 
Island.  31.  Enderby  Island,  32.  Caldwell  Island,  33.  Watson  Island. 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:    THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


25 


names  will  help  to  identify  synonyms.  [The  present  official  names  are 
printed  in  boldface  type. — Editor.] 


English 

Abingdon 
Albany- 
Albemarle 

South  Seymour 
Bnrrington 

Beagle 

llindloe 

Brattle 

Bartholomew 

Caldwell 
Champion 

Charles 
Chatham 

Cowley 

Crossman 
Culpepper 
Daphne 
Duncan 

Eden 

Enderby 

Gardner 

(near  Charles) 
Gardner 

(near  Hood) 
Guy  Fawkes 
Hood 


Indefatigable 


learned  after 
Earl  of  Abingdon 

George  Monk,  Duke  of 

Albemarle 


Admiral  Samuel 
Barrington,  R.N. 

Captain  John  liindloe 

Nicholas  Brattle 

Lt.  David  Ewen 
Bartholomew,  R.N. 

Admiral  Caldwell,  R.N. 

Andrew  Champion, 
whaler 

King  Charles  II 

William  Pitt,  First  Earl 
of  Chatham 

Ambrose  Cowley, 
buccaneer 

Richard  Crossman 

Lord  Culpepper 

H.M.S.  Daphne 

Admiral  Viscount  Dun- 
can, R.  N, 

Samuel  Enderby,  whaler 
Lord  Gardner 


The  English  conspirator 
Admiral  Viscount  Sam- 
uel Hood,  N.R. 
II. M.^.  Indefatigahle 


Other  names 
Pinta,  Geraldino 

Isabela,  Santa  Gertrudis 

Baltra 
Santa  Fe 


Marchena,  Torres 

Tortuga 

Bartolome 


Santa  Maria,  Floreana 
San  Christobal,  Dassig- 
ney,  Grande 


Los  Hei'manos 
Darwin,  Guerra 


Pinzon,  Dean 


Espanola 

Santa  Cruz,  Bolivia, 
Norfolk,  Porter,  Val- 
dez,  Chavez,  San 
Clemente 


26 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES 


[Oc.  Papers 


English 

Named  after 

Other  names 

James 

King-  James  II 

San  Salvador,  Olmedo, 
Santiago,  Clil,  York 

Jervis 

Admiral  John  Jervis 

Rabida 

Nameless 

Isla  sin  Nombre,  Bewel 
Rock 

Narborough 

Admiral  Sir  John  Nar- 
brough 

Fernandina,  Plata 

Onslow 

Plaza 

North  Seymour 

Seymour 

Tower 

Grcnovesa,  Ewres 

Watson 

AVenman 

Lord  Wainman 

Wolf,  Nunez,  Gasna, 
Genovesa  Ewres 

In  addition  to  the  above  islands,  there  are  a  number  of  islets 
which  are  referred  to  as  rocks.  The  principal  ones  are  as  follows: 
Bainbridge,  Blanca,  Bura,  Dalrymple,  Este,  Gordon,  Kicker,  Lobos, 
Eedonda,  Union,  Whale.  The  two  outstanding  rocks  are  Kicker  Rock, 
off  the  northern  coast  of  Chatham,  which  has  been  referred  to  as 
"Sleeping  Lion,"  and  spoken  of  many  times  by  Captain  Colnett 
as  the  "remarkable  rock,"  and  Roca  Redonda,  about  fifteen  miles  off 
the  north  point  of  Albemarle.  This  rock  was  no  doubt  named  on 
account  of  its  shape,  redonda  meaning  square  sail.  Both  of  these  rocks 
are  pictured  on  the  chart  of  Captain  Pipon.  Both  Captain  Colnett  on 
the  Rattler  and  Captain  Porter  on  the  Essex  had  difficulty  with  the 
currents  setting  them  too  close  to  Redonda  and  narrowly  escaped 
hitting  it. 

Many  of  the  capes  and  bays  of  the  Galapagos  were  named  after 
the  ships  which  surveyed  them  or  after  people  connected  with  the  his- 
tory of  the  islands,  such  as : 


Alhemarlc  Island: 

Banks  Bay,  after  Sir  Joseph  Banks,  famous  botanist. 

Essex  Point,  named  by  Porter  after  Frigate  Essex. 

Tagus  Cove,  II.M.S.  Tagus,  called  Banks  Cove  by  Colnett. 

Cape  Berkeley,  The  Honorable  Ca])tain  Berkeley,  R.N. 

Cape  Rose,  Jean  Rose,  buccaneer  and  companion  of  Davis  (Davies) 

AVcbb  Cove,  Lieutenant  G.  A.  C.  Webb,  R.  N. 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:    THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  27 

James  Island: 

Cowan  Bay  (James  Bay)  named  by  Captain  Porter  in  memory  of 

Lieutenant  -lolm  S.  Cowan  of  the  Frigate  Essex,  who  was  killed 

in  a  duel  and  ])uried  there. 
Sulivan  Bay.  Lieutenant  James  Sulivan  of  II.^M.S.  Beagle. 

Ciiatham  Island: 

Sappho  Cove,  H.M.S.  Sapjiho. 

Indefatigable  Island: 

Academy  Bay,  American  schooner  Academy. 
Conway  Bay,  H.M.S.  Conway. 

EARLY  VISITORS 

To  list  all  the  vessels  which  have  visited  the  (Ia];i]iai>os  would  be 
rather  an  impossible,  as  well  as  a  useless  task,  many  of  them  being  mere 
]Jeasure  yachts  with  no  serious  purpose  in  view.  The  vessels  of  the 
eai'ly  visitors,  men-of-war,  and  those  engaged  in  expeditions,  how- 
ever, have  a  direct  connection  with  the  islands,  being  a  real  part  of 
their  history,  and  it  is  to  these  that  attention  is  given. 

Before  the  opening  of  the  Panama  Canal,  ships  of  the  Royal  Navy 
going  to,  or  coming  from,  station  at  Esquimault,  invariably  made 
the  Galapagos  a  port  of  call  to  look  for  shipwrecked  sailors  or  chart 
some  particular  anchorage.  Men-of-war  of  several  nations,  including 
the  L'nited  States,  Great  Britain,  France,  and  Italy,  have  made  reg- 
ular surveys,  or  at  least  a  reconnaissance  of  certain  parts  of  the  island 
coastlines. 

After  their  discovery,  the  Galapagos  were  deserted  for  some  ten 
years  or  more,  their  next  visitor  being  Diego  Rivadeneira  who  landed 
there  in  1546.  A  former  captain  of  Diego  Centano  who  had  broken 
relations  with  Pizarro  and  was  now  waging  war  against  him,  he  was 
sent  to  the  coast  to  procure  a  vessel  in  which  he  and  his  companions 
might  escape  the  civil  war  then  being  waged  by  the  Spaniards.  On 
arriving  at  Arica,  he,  by  deceit  and  treachery,  seized  a  ship,  deserted 
his  commander,  Centano,  and  put  to  sea  so  as  not  to  fall  into  the  hands 
of  the  conqueror,  Pizarro.  Like  Fray  Tomas,  he  also  encountered 
baffling  winds  and  currents  and  was  carried  out  to  the  Galapagos, 
where,  like  other  visitors,  he  arrived  short  of  food  and  water.  He 
was  immediately  struck  by  the  size  of  the  giant  tortoises,  the  iguanas, 
and  the  tameness  of  the  birds,  which  he  commented  on  when  he  finally 
arrived  in  New  Spain. 


28  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

Incidentally,  he  is  the  first  to  make  mention  of  the  Galapagos  hawk, 
a  striking'  and  familiar  bird  on  many  of  the  islands.  Replenishing  his 
supplies,  he  once  more  attempted  to  reach  New  Spain  and  after  a 
difficult  voyage,  beset  by  calms  and  currents,  landed  in  what  is  now 
Guatemala.  Strange  to  say,  he,  like  the  discoverer,  gave  no  name  to 
the  land  he  had  visited. 

When  in  1573,  Basco  Nunnez  de  Balboa  marched  across  the  Isthmus 
of  Darien,  he  climbed  the  mountains  forming  the  backbone  of  the 
isthmus  and  was  the  first  European  to  see  the  waters  of  the  Pacific 
Ocean.  From  his  position,  on  the  top  of  the  mountain  ridge,  the  waters 
of  both  the  Atlantic  and  Pacific  were  visible.  The  isthmus  extending 
in  an  easterly  and  westerly  direction,  he  had  the  Atlantic  at  his  back 
to  the  north  and  the  Pacific  to  the  south,  which  he  called  the  South 
Sea  and  by  which  name  it  was  thereafter  known  to  the  early  navi- 
gators. In  these  waters,  bordering  Central  America  and  northern 
South  America,  the  buccaneers  spent  much  of  their  time  looting  and 
burning  the  coastal  cities  and  towns  and  capturing  the  Spanish  ships 
they  encountered.  It  was  the  Galapagos  they  used  as  a  base  to  victual, 
fuel,  water,  and  careen  their  ships  while  cruising  these  waters  in 
search  of  their  quarry.  Among  the  most  famous  were  Davis,  Cook, 
AVafer,  Knight,  Dampier,  Ambrose  Cowley,  and  John  Eaton. 

On  April  8,  1684,  Captains  Eaton  and  Cook  in  the  Nicholas  and 
Bachelor's  Delight  sailing  from  Juan  Fernandez  to  the  American 
coast,  sighted  one  of  the  eastern  islands  of  the  Galapagos  on  May  31, 
1684.  On  board  these  ships  were  Dampier,  Cowley,  and  Davis.  Pro- 
ceeding to  James  Island,  anchorage  was  made  on  tlie  west  coast,  to 
the  southward  of  Albany  Island.  Cowley  named  this  anchorage  Albany 
Bay  and  it  was  thereafter  one  of  the  favorite  spots  of  the  buccaneers, 
as  it  was  here  they  found  an  abundance  of  tortoises,  fire  wood,  and, 
in  tlie  rainy  season,  a  sufficient  supply"  of  water  for  their  ships. 

Some  one  hundred  years  after.  Captain  James  Colnett  in  tlie  ship 
Rattler  visited  this  very  spot  and  mentioned  that  some  of  his  crew 
found  old  stone  jars,  daggers,  and  implements  of  iron  scattered  about. 
Here,  the  buccaneers  erected  shelters  and  made  caches  of  provisions  to 
replenish  Iheir  stores  on  future  visits,  and  it  was  here  that  Dampier 
remarked  1h;it  Ihe  tortoises  were  very  fat  and  tliat  Ihe  oil  saved  was 
stored  in  jars  and  used  instead  of  butter  to  eat  with  dum])lings. 

On  this  visit,  the  presence  of  snakes  in  the  Galapagos  was  first 
mentioned,  wlien  Dampier  said  "Thei-e  ai-e  some  green  snakes  on  these 
islands." 

Among  the  precious  documents  ])ieserved  in  London  are  the  diaries 
of  two  of  lliese  ])uccaneers,  Cowkn-  and  Davis,  and  as  1hev  deal  so  inti- 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  29 

mately  with  the  early  (iah'ipafios  history,  specimen  pajjes  of  them  are 
reproduced,  with  the  permission  of  the  Britisli  Museum,  given  from 
photostatic  copies  of  the  originals.  To  portray  a  true  picture  of  the  life 
of  a  buccaneer  in  the  Galapagos  over  200  years  ago,  transcriptions  of 
several  pages  of  each  diary  are  given  below.'* 

Excerpts  fro:\i  the  Journal  of  Ambrose  Cowley 

May  lG8>t 

Our  departure  from  the  Lobos  to  the  Hand  Gallapagoes  with  the 
description  of  those  Hands  and  what  wee  did  tliere 


The  19th  day  of  May  about  5  in  the  afternoone  wee  departed  from 
the  Lobos  bound  for  the  Gallapagoes  which  by  the  account  wee  had  of 
them  were  Hands  lyeing  under  the  line  about  90  or  100  leagues  off 
shoare 

Wee  tooke  all  the  prises  with  us  and  steered  away  N  W  by  N  till 
within  half  a  degrees  from  the  Equinoctiall  and  had  the  winds  at 
S  S  W  and  S  by  W  at  last  at  So:  a  small  gale  and  then  our  prises  could 
hardly  maintaine  their  Latitute 

The  31 :  day  of  may  about  noone  wee  first  discovered  the  Hands  and 
at  5  a  clocke  anchored  at  the  Easter  side  of  the  Eastermost  Hand  in  16 
fathom  water  hard  sand  a  mile  from  the  shoare  Cap."  Eaton  came  to  a 
mile  to  Leward  of  us  and  one  of  the  Prises  gott  to  anchor  at  the  north 
End  of  the  Hand  but  the  other  two  could  not  fetch  in 

There  wee  went  a  shoare  and  found  the  Largest  Land  Turtle  that 
ever  I  saw  but  the  Hand  rocky  and  barren  without  (A)  wood  or  water 

The  next  morning  wee  weighed  and  stood  to  the  northward  to  fetch 
in  our  two  prises  to  any  of  the  Hands  where  wee  could  get  anchoring. 

Wee  came  close  under  Captain  Eatons  sterne  and  desired  him  to 
stand  of  to  the  Prises  and  help  them  in,  for  (D)  our  Captain  being 
sick  desired  to  be  a  shoare  therefore  wee  made  our  way  to  the  next 
Hand  to  (X)  to  Leward  of  us  and  at  2  a  clocke  in  the  afternoone  an- 
chored at  the  N  E  end  of  the  next  Hand  in  15  fathoms  clean  ground  a 
quarter  of  a  mile  from  the  shoare  and  before  night  one  of  the  Prises 


(A)  by  the  sea  sides  are  small  bushes  of  burton  wood  but  none  within  land  the  Hand 

being  all  rock  and  many  Dita  bushes  among  them 

(D)   he  was  taken  sick  at  John  Fernandoes  and  had  never  been  well  since 

(X)   to  the  northward  at  the  north  end  of  the  Hand  where  he  saw  water  running  down 

from  the  rocks 


^[Because  of  his  untimely  death,  the  author  left  only  tentative  transcriptions  of  those 
portions  of  these  diaries  which  he  wished  to  quote.  These  tran.scriptions  have  been  re-worked 
and  completed  with  the  assistance  of  a  number  of  people,  especially  Mr.  Alan  E.  Leviton,  Dr. 
Leo  G.  Hertlein,  Mr.  Ignatius  McGuire,  and  Dr.  John  B.  Gleason.  The  first  three  are  staff 
members  of  the  California  Academy  of  Sciences  and  were  very  helpful  in  deciphering  certain 
particularly  difficult  passages.  Dr.  Gleason  is  a  member  of  ihe  Department  of  English,  Uni- 
versity of  San  Francisco.  He  carefully  went  over  the  transcriptions,  checked  them  against  the 
photostatic  copies,  and  contributed  a  number  of  important  final  corrections  and  completions. 
Owing  to  the  lack  of  photostatic  copies  among  the  author's  effects,  it  hai-  been  impossible  to 
check  any  others  of  his  numerous  transcriptions  against  the  original  manuscripts. — Editor.] 


30 


CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OP   SCIENCES 


[Oc.  Papers 


came  to  us  but  Eaton  and  the  other  two  did  not  come  in  till  the  next 

day  after 

There  wee  went  ashoare  and  made  a  tent  for  our  Commander 
When  we  came  first  ashoare  wee  found  severall  large  green  turtles 

on  the  land  sleeping  which  wee  turned  on  their  backs  to  prevent  them 


Orb 


[im- 


-kw /. 


^-y 


-iT^itf    A*V.' 


jn  a'u> >\x  t  //lc  ;un //ft  «;»  of  /A^  lUu" <^  . '.] / 

->",  ->^-,,  7," 


h  (ii-i  '-"^^^^^    clan   J,}.^an?  J  jii/D'hr  ,^ i\^  .nniU^tpm  ,)lc 


^it 


,,,...,. ^f 


u/r  i  .^'f.u/:<L 


\ 


Fig.  lu.    The  first  of  three  pages  from  the  diary  of  Ambrose  Cowley.  See  the 
accompanying  transcription  of  this  page  and  those  shown  in  figures  11  and  12. 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


31 


from  goeing  into  the  water  againe.'  But  the  next  day  when  wee  found 
more  come  a  shoare  to  sleepe  wee  turned  those  on  their  bellyes  again 
which  wee  turned  the  night  before  for  wee  could  go  ashoare  at  any 
time  and  (A[l] )  kill  as  many  as  wee  had  ocasion  for 


/■s^r'Trr 


iiiKC  u'S-f 


•?^ 


Cy^-'f^^  .jtJS^     ,irntcjJ  ^m'tfttri   ^,^n^r  UK-'-}^lJ<r4'//Q  j'/iar<<_ 


^ 


^^(c^  fchim}  '7  i'n    //^-  n'^'f-^  fea^^n  .>/tP 


^cc/ti  ail' l^  i/cav- 
ffiCtyx- 


111 


'f«.iie^  -(fOiji 


Fig.  11.    The  second  of  three  pages  from  the  diary  of  Ambrose  Cowley. 


(A  [1])  our  cook  went  ashore  every  morning  &  where  he  picked  &  chused  soe  many  as  he 
thought  would  serve  us  all  the  day  for  wee  did  eat  nothing  else  all  the  time  which  we  lay  here 


32  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

There  is  but  ordinary  rideing  at  this  place  unless  within  Cables 
lenght  of  the  shoare  for  it  is  steepe  and  the  wind  blows  right  off  shoare 
and  if  an  anchor  startes  it  never  holds  againe  but  you  must  putt  to 
sea  and  there  is  no  rideing  any  where  else  about  the  Hand. 

The  Hand  is  likewise  a  barren  Rocky  Hand  like  the  former  but  noe 
water  only  in  ponds  which  retaines  it  in  the  wett  season  and  keeps 
all  the  year 

Wee  stayed  there  twelve  dayes  and  gott  a  shoare  about  5000  sacks 
of  flower  and  piled  them  againe  and  heap'd  for  a  store  and  there  we 
concluded  to  goe  to  Ria  Lexa  haveing  a  Pilott  for  it  who  told  us  it  was 
a  very  rich  town  and  easily  taken  but  before  I  proceed  further  I  shall 
give  you  the  description  of  these  Hands  and  what  I  have  not  of  my  own 
knowledge  I  had  from  Captain  Davies  who  was  there  afterwards  and 
careened  his  ship  at  neither  of  these  that  wee  were  at  but  at  others  to 
the  westward  of  them 

These  Hand  called  the  Gallopagoes  as  I  [I] 

June  lG8-'f 

have  been  told  doe  reach  from  the  latitude  of  one  Degree  south  to  5 
degrees  north  tending  N  W  but  of  that  wee  have  noe  certainty  there- 
fore I  shall  only  speake  of  these  which  I  have  seene  which  lay  all  of 
them  under  or  neare  the  Lyne  within  a  degree  of  either  side 

These  are  about  14  in  number  most  of  them  large  considerable 
Hands  they  all  of  them  swarme  with  Land  Turtle  and  guanos  which 
are  both  extraordinary  fatt  and  sweete  and  the  sea  abounds  with  green 
turtle  and  fish 

I  have  allready  given  some  relation  of  the  green  (A[2])  Turtle 
Avhich  are  soe  plenty  there  that  though  wee  were  about  200  soules  yett 
wee  killed  every  morning  on  the  Bay  as  many  as  served  us  all  day  the 
whole  time  of  our  abode  there  and  might  have  kill'd  many  more 
though  they  differr  in  nature  from  the  West  India  Turtle  yett  are  very 
sweet  wholesome  meate 

And  the  (b)  fish  is  as  plenty  there  as  at  John  Fernandoes 
Guanos  are  as  plenty  there  as  in  any  place  of  the  world  and  extraor- 
dinary sweet  meate  but  the  Land  Turtle  as  they  exceed  in  sweetness 
soe  doe  they  in  like  manner  in  numbers  for  it  is  incredible  to  reporte 
how  numerous  they  are  and  I  beleive  there  is  not  any  place  in  the 
world  that  have  such  plenty  of  these  Creatures — Now  left  us  consider 
if  there  is  any  thing  else  worth  of  observation  in  these  Hands 

In  the  first  place  I  have  denoted  those  two  which  I  was  on,  to  be 


(D    Description  of  the  gallapagos 

(A  [2])  the  turtle  is  a  large  Creature  living  in  the  sea  but  conies  ashore  to  lay  eggs  wch 
are  hatched  by  the  sand  there  are  three  sortes  of  them,  the  green  turtle  the  hawkes  bill  and  the 
log  or  head,  the  first  are  good  wholesome  meat  but  their  shells  very  thin  and  used  for  inlay  and 
not  worth  above  4  d  ye  pound  the  hawkes  bill  are  indifferent  good  meat  in  some  places  but 
much  ranker  than  the  green  turtle  but  each  shell  of  great  vallew  but  the  Logerhead  soe  called 
from  ye  bigness  of  his  head  is  neither  good  flesh  nor  shell  yet  sometimes  Eaton  but  they  are  all 
better  or  worse  meat  according  to  the  ground  they  feed  in 

(b)  see  page  (66) 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS 


33 


l)ant'!i  dry  Hands.  I  must  cont'ess  my  Curiosity  would  have  carryed 
me  further  in  search  to  find  any  thing  protital  on  them  but  our  busi- 
ness was  not  to  search  places  to  settle  in.  only  to  linde  conveniencies 


//^'u:    H\^:f 


'  /lavc  Ci-Cn.  /..■'O');^^  reach  nr/n  />^*^  tn/i^a.J(_ 

X^^/ic    /h>Jt<i^-  Joii^/l.   /.-»  ^'^VyMVy /A'r//L   /^rn- 

-^CK'-I  /r  (1^  I'u/  J.^ /fai/ /i'Ci£  /lai-^  tirecetAunk 


I  //- 


7:.',r 


xr]f  ..' 


/^-cM^'T.r'^-t^y    /.. ',rr"        7,.. 


^  .<'  /.'".'  ./;  /'"ii'^f  cx,.w 


J,:'- 


6i( 


/-tv  ,.'<-■  y-'J  //u  (/ /A    i<  ic  //:.innc  f  in  niifr:c'''r.<    -,■ ,      -^ 


6/ A  6i^i^f-  ^rr 


(1:   /(i 


L 


Fig.  12.    The  third  of  three  pages  from  the  diary  of  Ambrose  Cowley. 


34  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

to  Cai-reen  which  at  this  time  wee  did  not  think  convenient  yett  Cap- 
tain (A[3])  Davies  after  I  left  liim  came  thither  and  carreened  at 
some  Hands  to  the  westward  of  these  wh  he  found  to  be  good  habitable 
Hands  haveing  a  deep  soft  soyle  which  if  cultivated  would  produce 
any  thing  that  grows  in  these  Clymatts 

They  likewise  are  well  watered  and  plenty  of  good  timber  fitt  for 
any  uses  and  places  enough  to  carreen  in,  soe  that  take  them  by  and 
large  they  are  extraordinary  good  Hands  where  a  ship  in  distress  may 
have  any  thing  that  can  be  expected  from  places  not  inhabitated  for 
there  is  both  food  and  water  and  fire  wood  and  timber  for  other  uses 
besides  masts  and  yards  may  be  had  and  good  secure  places  to  Car- 
reen in  and  with  a  little  payne  salt  may  be  gathered 

Wee  departed  from  the  Gallapagoes  bound  to  the  Hand  Cocos  which 
wee  mist  .... 

this  Hand  where  wee  Lay  is  in  00°  30  m  no  Latt. 

Excerpts  from  the  Journal  of  Edward  Davies^ 

Wee  lay  at  Lobus  above  eight  and  forty  houres,  and  knowing  that 
wee  had  more  than  an  hundred  prisoners  on  board  not  knowing  where 
to  gett  water,  nor  where  to  find  a  place  of  making  a  Magazeene  for 
flower  but  that  wee  should  be  hunted  out  and  have  our  flower  de- 
stroyed, wee  sailed  away  to  the  Westward  to  see  if  wee  could  find 
those  Islands  called  the  Galipoloes,  which  made  the  Spaniards  laugh 
at  us  telling  us  they  were  Inchanted  Islands,  and  that  there  was  never 
any  but  one  Captaine  Porialto  that  had  ever  seene  them,  but  would 
not  come  neare  them  to  Anchor  at  them,  and  that  they  were  but 
shadowes  and  noe  reall  Islands.  Wee  steered  away  North  AVest  till  wee 
came  under  the  Line,  then  wee  Directed  our  Course  West  and  West  by 
South,  wee  having  the  wind  at  South  South  East. 

June  1684 
About  the  beginning  of  this  Month  wee  saw  an  Island  on  our  Star- 
board side  making  high  Land  and  Low  Land,  being  a  very  likely  Is- 
land to  have  water,  upon  being  well  Repleinshed  with  wood,  but  by 
reason  of  the  strong  Current  that  runneth  there  wee  could  not  fetch 
it,  That  Island  I  named  King  Charles  the  Seconds  Island,  by  my 
Judgement  it  lyeth  in  the  Latitude  of  one  South  Latitude  and  Thirty 
Minutes — Longitude  two  hundred  and  seaventy  eight  Degrees  and  fifty 
minutes  standing  still  to  the  Westward  I  saw  severall  Islands,  but 
that  which  I  liked  ])est,  I  came  to  Anchor  under  in  a  good  Bay  having 
seaven  fathom  water,  there  being  upon  this  Island  to  the  South  end  a 
good  Harbor  for  many  Sliipps  to  ride,  I  beleive  his  Majestyes  Navy 
might  ride  iliere  in  safety,  wee  put  the  Boat  a  shoare,  but  found  no 
water  there  but  wee  found  Land  Turtle  very  great,  and  Sea  turtle  very 


^Ambrose  Cowley  is  followed  in  the  spelling  of  Davies  though  it  is  commonly  found 
Davis  in  the  literature. 

(A  [3])  when  he  was  here  the  second  time  Eat  nothing  but  Land  turtle  and  gave  6  or  7 
Jars  of  oyle  for  each  mess 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:    THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


35 


good  and  large  and  great  plenty,  and  a  sort  of  ft'owles  called  fflemingo 
with  Goanoes,  which  our  men  brought  aboard,  the  small  Birds  being 
not  in  the  least  possessed  with  feare,  they  lighted  on  our  mens  heads 


U--.AI-Ji 


V 


■r^ 


■  H,,fTfv%lt  : 


'.,<.      »^/^..^    ^-i    ,-iC^     t.x.f.    >;Hl»    r^r-rf-    V,,-^;..<  .«>,Jt,.-,^^'    ,,4-»^    'A'-^'A  '7'<^\«P<3^^^V— 


V  •>  .    o-«»-  n-i\\i     nf~»..-„      „^„,,„'  ,,  ,Vii    ^o    ,«     yo  "> 


•«-   '«!»!' v».    ,-;.?'.„.,  ;..,^ 


3  '»•«-•"     JVIJ.; 


>  >*.'»JU< 


'■•  \.^    (n.s     h.rt'    „^JJ      rCA-,-    -r^i  (L   ,  "    ,      ,f  .-  ^ 

■  .rM'l.'S  .    ..,      ',-,.'»>.  .,-nA.    .vtiii  «.„„v   4 


-t^,.K  i^  .^    ,-,  ,^^   t^  ^•^^^^ 


-n* 


V" 


Fig.  13.    A  page  from  the  diary  of  Edward  Davies.  See  the  accompanying 
transcription. 


36  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

and  Armes  and  they  tooke  them  off,  which  at  first  seemed  strange  to 
me  but  I  did  the  same  my  selfe  after  that. 

This  Island  I  named  the  Duke  of  Yoi-kes  Island,  but  now  by  the 
Grace  of  God  King  James  the  Seconds  Island.  The  Island  lyeth  from 
the  Latitude  of  one  Degree  South  to  the  Line  Equinoctiall : 

The  Island  on  the  East  side  of  the  Island  stretches  away  West 
North  West  and  at  the  Westmost  end  is  a  goodly  sandy  bay  about  the 
point  where  there  lyeth  a  fine  high  Island  very  greene,  which  maketh 
a  good  Harbor,  where  there  is  water,  and  good  Turtle  Sea  and  Land 
Turtle  and  good  ffowles  in  abundance,  from  that  point  the  Land 
stretcheth  away  South  West  and  by  South  and  further  of  King  James's 
Island,  and  the  Duke  of  Albemarles  Island,  they  stretching  away  all 
one  Course,  differing  not  much  in  Latitude  or  Longitude,  not  more 
than  twenty  Minutes,  the  Dukes  Island  stretching  more  to  the  North- 
ward, and  further  to  the  Southward  then  that  part  of  the  Island  that 
I  . .  .  withall,  but  I  cannot  say  how  farr  his  Ma  jestyes  Island  stretcheth 
away  to  the  South  East,  by  reason  that  most  of  those  Islands  having 
had  sulphurous  matter  that  hath  sett  them  on  fire,  they  have  beene 
burned  formerly,  and  some  parts  of  them  blowne  up,  the  Land  and 
Rocks  or  some  of  them  are  lying  in  soe  much  Confusion  that  there  is 
no  Travelling  on  them,  the  Land  that  has  l)eene  burnt  seemed  like  to 
Cindars,  but  very  heavy,  which  made  me  thinke  they  were  mixt  with 
some  mettall,  for  the  Mother  of  Mettalls  is  here  in  great  plenty  upon 
this  Hand  which  they  say  is  Brimstone 

June  1684: 

Wee  were  sailing  along  the  Duke  of  Albemarles  Island,  the  sun 
shineing  made  us  thinke  our  hill  had  been  coverd  with  Gold,  when 
wee  came  to  see  it,  it  was  fine  Brimestone  as  fine  as  flower.  The  Duke 
of  Norfolks  Island  lying  to  the  Eastward  of  the  Kings  Island,  lying 
from  the  Latitude  of  thirty  five  minutes  South  to  the  Latitude  of  five 
minutes  North,  and  Longitude  two  hundred  and  seaventy  seaven  De- 
grees forty  two  Minutes;  I  sent  a  shipp  to  discover  it  which  sailed 
alhnost  round  it,  on  the  North  side  there  is  good  Road,  the  Island  being 
about  forty  miles  in  Length,  lying  to  the  Eastward  of  King  James's 
Island  tenne  Leagues:  King  James  the  Seconds  Island  lyeth  the  North- 
ermost  end  under  the  Line,  and  the  Southermost  end  about  one  Degree. 
The  Island  maketh  like  the  point  of  a  ffort,  the  Land  stretcheth  from 
the  Eastermost  point  West  North  West  twelve  Leages,  the  other  part  of 
the  Island  stretcheth  away  to  the  Southward,  the  Northermost  part  of 
it  lyeth  in  the  Longitude  of  Two  hundred  seaventy  seaven  Degrees 
twelve  Minutes  and  noe  Latitudes,  There  being  upon  this  Island  Land 
turtle  allniost  two  hundred  pounde  weight  a  peice,  I  sate  upon  the 
Back  of  one  of  them  when  they  came  aboard  to  try  his  strength,  he 
would  have  carryed  me  had  I  beene  much  heavier,  the  flesh  of  them  to 
many  of  our  Judgements  exceeded  the  sea  turtle,  although  the  sea 
turtle  there  is  as  good  as  ever  I  eat  in  any  part  of  the  World,  where 
they  have  beene  accounted  most  rare,  ffrom  King  James's  Island  wee 
sailed  to  another  Island  lying  to  the  Westward  of  the  Kings  Island 
stretching  away  to  the  Northward  North  West  and  bv  West  to  the  Lati- 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  37 

tude  of  fifteene  Minutes  North  the  Land  being  very  high  up  in  the 
Country  by  the  water  side  making  as  you  come  in  from  the  Eastward 
like  to  a  long  Ridge  or  plaine  hill  the  Eastmost  side  of  it  being  an 
Iron  Shoare  where  there  is  no  coming  to  an  Anchor.  It  Looketh  into 
the  Southward  of  King  Jame's  Island,  I  sailed  to  the  North  end  thereof 
where  by  thence  I  lett  goe  an  Anchor  in  good  ground,  wee  being  then 
five  shipps  in  Company,  three  of  them  allmost  Loaden  with  provision, 
as  flower,  sweete  Meates,  and  Sugar,  wee  seeking  a  place  to  putt  this 
provisions  on  shoare  against  a  time  of  scarcity,  this  end  l)eing  the 
worst  part  of  the  Island,  yett  it  affordeth  provision  in  abundance  as 
fllsh,  turtle,  Alguanas,  and  ffowles  in  abundance,  this  Island  I  gave  the 
name  of  the  Duke  of  Albemarles  Island  there  belonging  to  it  a  stately 
Harbour  lying  on  the  West  side  thereof,  wee  sailed  along  the  West  side 
of  the  Island  towards  the  Southward ;  this  Island  lyeth  from  the  Lati- 
tude of  one  Degree  thirty  Minutes  South  to  the  Latitude  of  fRfteene 
Minutes  North  by  Judgement  for  wee  could  not  gett  to  the  South  end 
thereof  for  the  strong  Current,  but  having  seene  it  at  a  Distance, 
there  being  in  number  fifteene  Islands  that  I  have  seene,  I  have  named 
eight  of  them.  .  .  . 

June  1684 

Wee  sailed  to  the  North  West  end  of  the  Duke  of  Albemarles  Island 
where  wee  put  on  shoare  fifteene  hundred  Baggs  of  fflower,  wee  carry- 
ing our  Captaine  on  shoare  he  having  beene  three  weekes  sick,  wee 
sought  for  water  but  could  find  none,  wee  were  forced  to  go  to  the 
Mayne  to  water  .... 

Raveneaii  de  Liissan,  a  contemporary  of  Cowley  and  Davis, 
made  some  interesting  remarks  of  his  voyage  to  the  South  Seasy 
in  1684.    His  journal  states: 

At  noon  on  the  eighth  we  crossed  the  equator,  passing  the  Galapes 
islands  which  lay  west  a  dozen  leagues  off  to  the  leeward. 

These  eight  islands  stretch  north  and  south  of  Cape  Blanco  and 
east  and  west  of  Queaquille.  They  abound  in  sea-tortoises  that  land 
there  all  day  long,  while  in  the  woods  it  is  difficult  to  step  without 
finding  land-tortoises  and  hordes  of  lizards  and  agoutis  lying  about. 
These  adjacent  waters  are  also  full  of  fishes,  that  come  up  to  die  on 
land.  On  the  other  hand,  these  advantages  are  overweighed  by  the 
shortage  of  water  from  which  these  islands  suffer. 

The  following  year  (1685)  Davis,  accompanied  by  William 
Knight,  a  fellow  buccaneer,  made  a  second  visit  to  the  Galapagos.  On 
arrival  he  took  on  some  of  the  stores  from  the  cache  made  on  his  pre- 
vious visit  and  sailed  for  the  coast  of  South  America. 

Davis  apparently  appreciated  the  islands  as  he  again  returned 
in  1687  for  his  third  visit  to  victual  and  careen  his  ship.  After  dry- 
ing some  fish,  salting  the  flesh  of  tlie  land  tortoise,  and  filling  sixty 
eight-gallon  jars  with  the  oil  of  the  land  tortoise  while  he  was  repair- 
ing his  ship,  he  again  set  sail  for  the  South  American  coast. 


38  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

A  later  buccaneer  was  Captain  Woodes  Rogers,  an  Englishman, 
who,  in  1708,  with  a  commission  from  the  Lord  High  Admiral,  set 
out  for  the  South  Seas  in  the  ship  Duke  accompanied  by  Captain 
Stephen  Courtney  in  the  Duchess.  Kogers  was  financed  by  some  mer- 
chants of  Bristol  with  instructions  to  war  against  the  Spaniards  and 
the  French.  On  May  8,  1709,  Rogers  left  the  coast  of  Peru  bound  for 
the  Galapagos,  which  he  sighted  on  May  16.  The  failure  to  water  his 
ships  before  leaving  the  mainland  prevented  any  lengthy  stop  and 
he  left  for  the  mainland  to  do  so.  September  10  found  him  back  at  the 
Galapagos  where  he  took  on  a  supply  of  tortoises  and  wood  and  left 
again  to  loot  and  burn  the  towns  of  New  Spain  and  capture  any  Span- 
ish ship  he  might  encounter. 

Tliough  the  buccaneers  had  not  entirelj^  ceased  operations,  another 
type  of  seaman  appeared  in  Galapagos  waters  for  the  purpose  of 
exploration  and  annexing  new  lands. 

One  of  the  earliest  of  this  type  was  M.  de  Beauchesne  Gouin,  a  cap- 
tain in  the  French  navy,  sent  out  by  a  company  formed  in  France  for 
the  purpose  of  establishing  colonies  in  the  countries  of  South  Amer- 
ica not  yet  occupied  ])y  Europeans,  and  also  for  trading  his  cargo 
with  Spaniards,  although  they  were  forl)idden  to  trade  with  any  but 
their  own  countrymen.  He  sailed  from  France  on  Desember  17,  1698, 
on  board  the  frigate  PhiUppeaux  accompanied  by  the  bark  Maurepas. 
After  a  four-months  visit  to  the  ports  of  Chile  and  Peru,  Beauchesne 
sailed  for  the  Galapagos,  arriving  there  on  June  7,  1700. 

Ensign  Le  Sieur  de  Villefort,  of  the  PJiilippeaux,  reported  that 
neither  fresh  water  nor  trees  were  found,  l)ut  an  abundance  of  fish 
and  tortoises  were  found  to  refresh  the  crews.  From  his  descrip- 
tion of  the  anchorage,  his  mention  of  a  small  island  and  the 
finding  of  the  materials  for  the  repair  of  ships,  the  Fhilippeaux  must 
certainly  have  been  anchored  in  what  the  buccaneer  Cowley  called 
Albany  Bay,  James  Island,  the  isle  referred  to  as  Isle  a  Tabac  by 
Villefort.  According  to  his  diary,  the  other  two  islands  visited.  Health 
Island  or  Isle  de  Saute,  and  the  Isle  Mascarin,  are  no  doubt  Charles 
and  Hood  in  the  order  mentioned.  At  the  latter  island,  he  remarked 
with  surprise  the  sighting  of  a  numl)er  of  large  whales  so  near 
the  line.  After  a  stop  of  just  a  month,  he  headed  south  for  the  passage 
round  the  Horn  and  his  return  to  Europe. 

In  1720  Captain  Clipperton,  Dampier's  chief  mate  and  discoverer 
of  the  island  named  after  him,  touched  at  the  Galapagos  to  replenish 
his  supplies  for  his  voyage  to  the  Bay  of  Panama,  but  makes  no 
special  mention  of  his  activities.   He  cruised  the  South  Sea,  captured 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  39 

two  or  three  prizes,  plundered  the  town  of  Truxillo,  and  finally  lei't 
for  China. 

The  voyage  of  Captain  James  Colnett,  K.X.,  was  no  doubt  the  most 
outstanding  of  the  early  voyages.  In  1792,  Captain  Colnett  w^as  com- 
missioned by  His  ^Majesty's  Government  to  investigate  the  ])ossil)ilities 
of  spermaceti-whale  fisheries  in  the  South  Sea  and  his  appointment 
w^as  received  with  great  pleasure  by  Samuel  Enderby  &  Sons,  lead- 
ers in  the  whaling  industry  of  Great  Britain.  The  matter  of  a  proper 
vessel  for  the  voyage  was  a  problem  as  there  was  none  for  sale  on 
the  market.  The  Admiralty  was  petitioned  for  the  loan  of  a  vessel 
and  Ilis  Majesty's  sloop-of-war,  Rattler,  of  three  hundred  and  sev- 
enty-four tons  was  selected.  The  alterations  necessary  for  such  a 
voyage  would  make  it  impossible  to  turn  the  vessel  back  to  the  Navy 
for  further  use  as  a  vessel  of  w^ar,  so  the  firm  of  Enderby  &  Sons 
agreed  to  purchase  it  on  release  by  His  Majesty's  Government.  This 
having  l^een  agreed  upon,  H.M.S.  Rattler  was  stricken  from  the 
register  and  Enderby  &  Sons  stood  the  expense  of  the  alterations. 
Captain  Colnett  was  granted  a  leave  of  absence  to  make  the  voyage 
and  the  Rattler  became  an  ordinary  whaler.  The  voyage  of  this  vessel 
is  so  intimately  connected  with  the  islands  that  its  log  which  follows 
will  be  of  deepest  interest  to  any  student  of  Galapagos  history. 

Before  the  extended  visit  which  began  on  March  13,  1794,  Captain 
Colnett  made  a  short  stop  from  June  13  to  28,  1793,  when,  on  account 
of  unfavorable  wdnds,  he  sailed  for  the  mainland.  However,  on  June  25, 
he  hove  to  long  enough  to  send  a  boat  ashore  to  look  for  water,  w^hich, 
on  finding  none,  brought  back  a  tortoise  and  several  turtles. 

On  June  27,  he  sent  two  boats  ashore  to  look  for  water,  both  of 
which  met  with  no  success.  Tlie  Rattler  then  was  headed  tow'ard  the 
Coast  and  did  not  return  to  the  Galapagos  until  March  12,  1794,  when 
Colnett  starts  the  log  of  his  second  visit.  The  account  of  the  June, 
1793,  visit  is  as  follows : 

June  24,  1793 

We  saw  one  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  distant  about  6  or  7  leagues 
wore  and  stood  off  till  dayliglit. 

Wore  and  stood  to  the  westward  Ex  of  land  from  W  10  S  to 
W  30  N  and  the  body  which  formed  two  points  and  overlaped  as  if 
two  different  isles  W  ex  from  S  E  to  W  3.5  S  nearest  land  S  7  W 
8  miles.   Sent  a  boat  on  shore  Lat.  00°  40'  0"  S  Long  89°  OOW. 

June  25,  1793 

Light  breezes  and  cloudy  hove  too  and  sent  a  boat  on  shore  with 
the  chief  mate.  Boat  returned  and  found  no  water  but  saw  a  number 


40  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

of  land  birds,  a  few  seals  a  tortoise  a  land  turpan  which  they  caught, 
also  several  turtle,  a  turtle  dove  and  a  guana  nor  was  there  a  single 
vegetable  that  could  be  eat. 

Light  airs  and  flying  showers.  Found  the  current  had  set  us 
considerably  to  Leeward  —  made  all  sail.  Lat  00°  38'  00"  S  Long. 
89°  W. 

June  26,  1793 

Mod.  breezes  and  cloudy  stood  in  for  the  land  keeping  the  lead 
going  sounded  36  fthms  at  5  or  6  miles  distant  to  19  fthms  at  l^^ 
distant  at  4  o'clock  came  too  in  19  fthm  EX  of  land  from  S  13  W  to 
E  34  N  a  rock  at  the  SW  point  like  a  sperm  whales  head  mouth 
open  and  up.  I  sounded  all  around  the  ship  and  towards  the  shore 
the  soundings  gradually  decreased  and  sandy  bottom,  landed  with 
two  boats  ahead  the  ship  to  look  for  water  and  sent  a  third  to  the 
S  W  neither  found  any  water  but  the  boat  that  went  to  the  Wt 
found  much  sand  which  we  supposed  from  the  weight  contained 
some  mineral  ore. 

Lat.  00°  45'  -  30"  S  Long  89°  26' 

June  27,  1793 

Afternoon  and  night  moderate  breezes  and  cloudy  at  daylight  sent 
two  boats  away  one  east  the  other  to  west  to  search  the  isle  for  water 
and  in  the  evening  they  retd  neither  of  them  succeeding.  Through 
the  day  moderate  breezes  and  pleasant  weather.  Procured  many  small 
ducks  or  teal  and  other  sea  birds  found  in  these  climates  also  great 
quantity  of  turtle  of  the  latter  more  to  be  found  on  every  beach 
than  a  dozen  ships  could  destroy  the  boat  from  the  west  brought  in 
a  large  quantity  of  the  sand  found  yesterday  and  the  crew  had  trav- 
eled a  long  way  inland.  I  also  sent  one  party  to  travel  to  the  Eward 
in  Land. 

Lat  45'  30" 

June  28,  1793 

During  the  night  strong  breezes  and  clear  towards  day  light 
cloudy  found  nothing  was  to  be  procured  here  that  could  be  ex- 
pected from  so  large  an  isle  in  this  climate  at  day  light  weighed  and 
stood  along  shore  to  the  Et  ward  with  intentions  once  more  to  en- 
deaver  to  beat  round  to  the  S. 

Lat  00°   38'  S 

June  29,  1793 

Moderate  breeze  and  Flying  clouds.  Many  seal  and  birds  accom- 
panying us  and  great  quantity  of  the  cream  colored  spawn  on  the 
water  as  we  fell  in  with  coming  from  the  main 

Lat  00°  47'  00"  Long  88°  5' 

June  30,  1793 

Gentle  breezes  and  hazy  land   N  5°   W   Distnt   7   or   8    Leagues 
Lat  1°  1"  S  Long  89°  W 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  41 

July  1,  1793 

Light  airs  cloudy  with  smooth  W  at  2  and  pleasant  sea.  A  small 
island  to  the  south  bore  from  W  to  SW  distant  from  the  nearest  part 
4  or  5  leagues. 

Lat  1°  19'  Long  89°  39'  W 

July  2,  1793 

Light  breezes  cloudy  Made  sail  light  breezes  and  cloudy  the  isle 
first  anchored  at  to  Dist  10  or  13  leagues.  Saw  a  large  school  of 
porpoises.  Mod  breezes  &  cloudy  many  Birds  accomp. 

Lat  1"  25'  Long  88°  33'  30" 

July  3,  1793. 

Light  airs  and  Cloudy  Saw  many  Black  fish  Porpoises  &  Albecores 
—  also  turtles  and  sea  birds.  Slight  winds  inclining  to  calm  and 
cloudy 

Made  all  sail 

Moderate  breezes  few  sea  birds  seen  and  no  fish 

Lat  1°  31'  S  Long  88°  00'  W 

July  4,  1793 

Moderate  breezes  &  cloudy  All  sails  set  Saw  many  porpoises 
Black  fish  albecores  &  turtle  also  many  sea  birds.  Shortened  sail  to 
the  topsails  for  the  night. 

Black  fish  porpoises  and  turtles  seen  many  birds  accompany  Saw 
a  Hump  back  whale 

Lat  1°  24'  S  Long  87°  16' 

July  5,  1793 

Light  breezes  and  cloudy  weather 

Many  boobies  and  other  birds  also  porpoises  and  Black  fish 

Shortened  sail  for  the  night 

Dark  cloudy  gloomy  weather  with  appearance  of  a  strong  current 
from  many  riplines  seen  all  around. 

Turtle  Bonnetta  Albecore  Black  fish  and  porpoises  seen  also 
Man  of  War  birds  gulls  etc. 

Lat  1°  14'  S  Long  86°  00 

The  Battler  then  left  for  the  coast  of  Peru  and  did  not  return 
until  ]\Iarch  12,  1794,  when  the  second  visit  began. 

March  12,  1794 

Saw  one  of  the  Galapagos  bearing  south  hauled  up  for  it. 

On  March  13,  1794,  the  log  is  headed  "At  the  Galapagos  Isls."' 

March   13,   1794 

Moderate  bj-eezes  at  N.  E.  stood  along  to  the  SW  with  an  in- 
tention of  passing  to  the  W  of  a  Remarkable  Rock  resembling  in 
height  and  size  and  shape  on  several  points  of  view  one  of  the  Kickers 


42  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

which  lay  N  of  a  Deep  Bay  in  which  one  of  the  boats  had  good  sound- 
ings when  here  before  off  the  Rock  to  the  N  of  it  2  cables  length 
19  fm  Rocky  as  we  rounded  to  the  West  and  South  no  sounding  with 
15  fm  line  and  the  wind  hauling  more  to  the  E  prevented  now  we  are 
getting  into  the  East  Corner. 

We  at  last  got  sounding  within  a  mile  of  the  shore  in  the  W 
Corner  a  low  point  at  29  fm  Rocky  hauled  out  to  beat  up  I  set  out 
with  a  boat  to  Sound  the  bay  found  good  bottom  at  the  E  point  5 
or  6  miles  from  the  shore  21  fm  sand  two  points  of  the  Bay  NE  & 
SW  the  Kicker  Rock  W  N  W  2%  miles  got  on  board  &  tacked  into 
the  bay  with  the  ship  and  came  too  on  the  same  Bearings  —  at  Day 
light  sent  two  boats  away  one  to  the  NE  other  SW  to  search  the 
lee  side  of  the  isle  for  Salt.  The  Jolly  Boat  also  went  a  fishing  under 
the  big  Rock  and  in  a  short  time  caught  great  numbers  of  large 
Cod  which  from  10  to  30  weight  and  also  sea  BREAM 

Lat  00°  54'  S  Long  89°  36'  W 

March  14,  1794 

Fresh  breezes  at  N  W  by  W  &  very  strong  tide  ship  would  not 
lay  at  single  anchor  steadied  her  with  a  Kedge  at  sunset  land  taken 
for  an  isle  bore  W^t  10  S  to  W  10  N  &  another  isle  N  45  W  thro  the 
afternoon  many  Devil  fish  seen  and  sevi  seals  at  8  PM  Boat  with  the 
whaling  master  retd  from  the  SW  port  of  the  Isle  but  could  find 
no  salt  or  fresh  water  in  a  small  bay  at  the  West  End  found  a  whale 
plank  of  a  large  ship  neither  worm  eaten  or  decayed  —  only  the  iron 
—  he  also  got  thirty  sealskins  &  as  many  green  turtle  as  he  pleased 
with  some  few  seal  and  saw  great  quantity  of  mullett  &  also  a  Devil 
fish  the  Jolly  Boat  was  also  sent  this  afternoon  to  the  Rock  to  fish 
but  having  no  hooks  but  what  were  made  without  a  forge  or  with 
the  Cabin  Bellows  in  a  half  tubb  out  of  iron  hoops  nails  &  sail 
needles  —  the  sharks  at  the  Isle  Socoro  having  taken  all  the  others 
away  had  very  poor  success  —  but  one  singular  circumstance  was  a 
seal  took  hook  and  they  afterwards  got  it  out  thro  the  night  light 
winds  North  &  Wtly  supposed  the  kedge  had  come  home  and  fouled 
the  Bower,  sighted  it  &  came  too  again  &  steadied  as  before  at  Day 
light  the  whaling  master  set  out  to  over  haul  the  Bay  we  lay  in  for 
salt  &c 

Lat  0°  52'  40"  S  Long.  89°  36'  W 

March  15,  1794 

Winds  thro  the  afternoon  as  yesterday  whaling  master  retd 
without  any  salt  &  only  one  seal  in  the  eveng  landed  behind  a  small 
isle  in  the  head  of  the  Bay  which  form  a  small  cove  sheltered  from 
all  winds  with  sevl  sandy  beaches  on  which  a  ship  may  lay  on 
shore  an  Excellent  place  also  to  fix  a  tent  a  great  quantitys  of  mul- 
lett &  green  turtle  to  be  caught  but  unfortunately  we  had  no  seiene 
to  catch  the  fish  if  wanted  but  I  believe  no  one  would  eat  them  that 
could  get  turtle.  The  whaling  master  caught  a  seal  &  17  young 

Through  the  night  wind  N  &  W 

The  second  mate  who  had  been  long  ailing  and  in  addition  to  other 
complaints  a  bad  head   which   he  had   received   by   hurt   the   latter 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  43 

end  of  the  year  growing  worse  with  three  others  who  had  boils  the 
worst  of  them  went  on  shore  for  the  day. 
Lat  0°  22'  28"  Long  89°  36'  W 

March  16,  1794 

Winds  as  before  weather  changeable  with  flying  showers  the 
Chief  Mate  returned  from  the  S  E  part  of  the  isle  without  finding 
any  salt  saw  a  few  seals  and  caught  a  few  land  and  green  turtle 
and  saw  two  very  small  runs  of  water  one  out  of  the  bluff  that 
forms  the  N  E  part  of  the  Bay  we  lay  in  and  the  other  out  of  a  bluff 
at  the  East  end  of  the  isle  neither  of  these  places  had  any  run  when 
we  were  here  before  and  I  conjecture  its  a  Basin  on  the  top  as  on 
the  N.  W.  Coast  of  America  which  contains  water  all  the  year 

Night  and  forenoon  cloudy  Hazy  light  winds  and  calms  alternately 

Lat  [No  position  marked  for  this  date] 

First  part  of  the  afternoon  variable  latter  part  wind  from  Wst 
to  N  W  X  W  Cloudy  most  of  the  crew  on  shore  or  liberty  in  the  even 
they  returned  one  of  them  caught  a  snake  4  ft  long  only  the  size  of 
my  little  finger 

Flying  showers  very  changeable  and  heavy  thro  the  night  at  4  a  m 
began  to  heave  our  anchor  up  by  8  got  it  &  kedge  stowed  it  was  at 
this  time  very  cloudy  over  the  land  and  also  around  the  horizon  with 
light  airs  of  wind  mostly  west'ly  that  we  did  not  by  noon  only  get 
3  miles  S  of  the  Remarkable  Rock  in  the  Bay  the  weather  at  this 
time  began  to  look  as  gloomy  and  heavy  as  ever  I  saw  it  and  the 
least  I  expected  was  a  heavy  tornado  but  it  ended  in  a  torrent  of 
rain  from  noon  till  8  at  night  when  it  ceased. 

March  17,  1794 

Ex  of  the  Isl  at  anchor  N  E  by  E  to  SW  by  S  the  Remarkable 
Rock  SSW  &  mineral  mount  E  by  N 

While  beating  out  between  Mineral  mount  &  the  big  Rock  our 
sounds  was  regular  and  good  Bottom  and  we  neared  each  shoaling 
gradually  from  14  to  30  fm  on  the  Mount  side  &  18  to  30  for  the  Rock. 

No  observation 

March  18,  1794 

Light  &  calm  alternately  Var  wind  &  torrents  of  rain  with  con- 
stant small  rain  and  threatng  Wear.  Short  sail  occasionally  Re- 
markable Rock  SW  SW  by  W  Ex  of  land  from  E  by  N  S  b  W  i/.  W 
Hove  too  Breeze  and  rain  ceased  calm  &  cloudy  strong  current  setting 
us  to  the  SW 

Lat  52'  22"  S  Long  89°  56' 

March  19,  1794 

Light  airs  &  variable  with  frequent  showers  and  heavy  S'ly  swell 
Breakers  said  to  be  see  ahead  and  many  other  isles  to  the  S  &  W  of  us 

At  noon  the  Body  of  the  Western  most  W  10°  N  Body  of  the 
Eastern  most  E  19°  N  Dist  from  the  western  most  11  or  12  miles 
away  many  small  islands  in  sight 

Lat  31'  15"  S  Long  90°  9' 


44  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

March  20,  1794 

Light  winds  and  hazy  with  S'ly  swell.  Shortened  sail  for  the  night 
&  sounded  150f'"  no  bottom  stood  off  and  on  for  daylight  the  isle 
intending  to  land  on  from  N  26  E  to  N  3  E  Dist  9  or  10  mi  Many 
seals  seen 

Made  sail  found  the  current  had  set  us  so  far  to  Leeward  as 
scarce  to  discern  the  Isle  intended  to  land  on  At  noon  the  Isle  off 
last  night  a  large  isle  which  I  take  for  Albemarle  N  15°  W  to  N  10° 
W  &  a  small  flatt  Isl.  Gave  chase  to  windward  with  boats  and  ship 
to  sperm  whale 

Lat  31'  51"  S  Long  90°  9' 

March  21,  1794 

Light  winds  &  very  hazy  weather  neither  boats  nor  ship  could 
come  up  with  the  whale.  Weather  with  heavy  S'ly  swell  many  seals 
seen  Found  the  set  to  the  S  &  W  so  great  &  the  wind  so  light  very 
uncertain  when  we  should  get  up  with  the  isle  we  wished  bore  up  for 
Albemarle  Isl  Many  seals  and  storm  petrels 

Lat  1°  19'  32"  S  Long  91°  6' 

March  22,  1794 

Moderate  Breezes  &  very  hazy  hove  too  &  sounded  150  f""  no  bot- 
tom Dist  3  or  4  miles  from  the  shore  shortened  sail  &  ply'd  to  wind'' 
for  the  night  Sounded  150  f^  no  bottom 

Moderate  breeze  &  heavy  S'ly  swell  innumerable  quantity  of  storm 
petrels  &  a  few  seals  seen  at  noon  within  a  few  miles  of  the  shore 
of  Albemarle  Is,I 

Lat  1°  19'  32"  Long  91°  6' 

i  March  23,  1794 

Moderate  breezes  &  cloudy.  Sounded  150  f™  no  bottom  Boat  went 
away  to  sound  the  Bay  finding  no  bottom  within  a  mile  of  the  shore 
&  saw  nothing  but  an  Iron  Bount  Inhospitable  barren  coast  the  dist' 
part  of  the  Bay  too  far  off  to  reach  before  dark  and  wind  blowing 
right  out  with  an  overfall  that  a  boat  would  scarce  line,  the  ship 
had  by  the  time  the  boat  joined  got  between  two  eddies  of  wind  made 
by  the  south  point  &  cor  of  the  Bay  &  it  was  with  some  difficulty 
we  got  clear  out  by  10  at  night  and  hove  too  at  noon  Ex  of  land  from 
N  12  E  to  E  37  S 

Lat  0°  35'  6"  Long  91°  33' 

March  24,   1794 

Light  breezes  and  showers  at  times  within  a  few  miles  of  Nar- 
borough  Isle  and  doubtful  of  clearing  the  shore  the  current  setting 
so  strong 

Light  and  cloudy  found  the  current  set  as  along  shore  at  noon 
Ex  of  Narl)orough  Isle  from  S  21  E  to  S  52  E  a  high  Bluff  the  N  W 
point  of  Albemarle  Isle  from  E  4  N  to  E  27  N  Rock  Rodondo  N  5  E 
5  or  6  Leag. 

Lat  0°  35'  6"  91°  33' 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  45 

Sent  a  boat  away  to  sound  under  the  N  W  point  of  Albemarle  Isle 
for  anchorage 

March  25,  1794 

Light  airs  and  hazy  with  showers  of  small  rain  laying  too  for  the 
Boat  returned  and  found  the  N  W  part  of  the  isle  as  Inhospitable  and 
barren  as  the  SW  no  anchorage  for  a  ship  caught  a  number  of  ex- 
cellent rock  cod  and  a  Hump  Back  turtle  no  other  seen  but  on  sev- 
eral parts  of  the  shore  a  few  seals 

Light  airs  gave  chase  to  a  sperm  whale  at  noon  Rock  Rodando 
E  25  S  got  alongside  the  sperm  whale 

Lat  0=  37'  13"  Long  91°  28' 

March  26,  1794 

Light  airs  and  hazy  employed  flenching  saw  a  large  body  of 
sperm  whale  Boats  gave  chase  &  killed  3  &  got  them  along  side. 

Light  airs  &  cloudy 

Saw  sperm  whale  in  the  S  at  noon  flenching  and  got  on  board 
all  our  blubber  &  made  sail  Rock  Rodondo  E  7°  S  Ex  of  land  from 
E  14  S  to  S  39°  E 

Lat  0°  21'  34"  N  Long  91°  52' 

March  27,  1794 

Light  airs  and  variable  employed  cutting  and  boiling  saw  spout- 
ing fish  a  long  Dist  to  windd  suppd  to  be  sperm  whale  at  sun  set  saw 
two  dead  whale  at  a  long  dist.  too  late  to  go  after  them. 

Light  airs  inclining  to  calm  saw  another  dead  whale  got  it  along- 
side &  flenched  it  at  noon  land  covered  in  haze  strong  current  set- 
ting to  the  NW 

Lat  0°  18'  22"  N  Long  92°  06' 

March  28,  1794 

Light  airs  very  hazy  with  heavy  S'ly  swell 

Shortened  sail  and  hove  too 

Light  breeze  and  hazy  made  sale  at  noon  Rock  Rodondo  N  56°  E 

Lat  0°  11'  37"  Long  91°  45' 

March  29,  1794 

Light  &  Cloudy  inclining  to  calm 

Fresh  breezes  with  heavy  rain  in  showers  found  another  dead 
whale  but  unfit  for  use 

shortened  sail  for  the  night 
finished  boiling  saw  dead  whale  bursted 
Body  of  Narborough  Isle  SE  by  S 
Lat  0°  10'  35"  N  Long  91°  51' 

March  30,  1794 
Light  airs  and  hazy  weather 

Light  wind  &  Hazy  made  said  saw  sperm  whale  gave  chase  killed 
one  and  got  it  along  side  at  noon  Rock  Rodondo  E  25°  N 
Lat  0°  10'  35"  N  Long  91°  45' 


v\ 


.IB 


46  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papkrs 

March  31,  1794 

Light  airs  &  hazy  &  S  W  swell 

calm 

Light  airs  &  SW  Swell 

N  W  point  of  Albemarle  Isl  E  4°  30'  S   other  land  covered  in  haze 

Lat  0°  8'  48  N  Long  91°  38' 

April  1,   1794 

Light  and  hazy  with  heavy  SW  swell 
Seals  porpoises  Black  fish  Bonetta  Albecore,  etc. 
Caught  large  Albecore  Black  fish  porpoises  &c  as  before  &  sev'l 
Breaches  to  the  E^ard 
Supposed  sperm  whale 
at  noon  Rock  Rodondo  E  14  S 
Body  of  Narborough  Isle  S  E  by  S 
Lat  0°  22'  0"  N  Long  91°  40' 

April  2,  1794 

Light  breezes  &  heavy  SWy  swell 

Porpoises  &  other  fish  and  birds  as  yesterday 

Sent  a  boat  to  Rock  Rodondo  to  fish  gave  chase  to  a  sperm  whale 

Lat  0°   24'  29"    Long  91°   36' 

April  3,  1794 

Light  airs  and  hazy  weather    hazy  weather 

Made  the  boat  signal  at  the  rock  to  join  the  chase 

Boats  ret'd  killed  5  sperm  whale  but  night  coming  on  only  secured 
3  alongside  saw  one  of  our  whales  killed  last  night  and  got  it  along 
side  the  current  having  drove  it  near  to  4  leagues  from  where  it  was 
killed 

Got  all  our  blubber  and  heads  in  made  sail  to  look  for  other  whale 

Lat  0°  16'  38"  Long  91°  54' 

April  4,  1794 

Light  airs  &  hazy  weather  &  S  W  swell 
Porpoises  and  Blackfish  innumerable 

Rock  Rodondo  E  N  E  Heavy  dew  calm  &  hazy  Porpoises  seals  &c 
as  before 

Land  covered  in  haze  Finished  boiling 
Lat  0°  14'  28"  Long  92°  10' 

April  5,  1794 

Light  airs  and  pleasant  weather  but  hazy  saw  whale  spout  and 
Breach  whale  and  porpoises  ennumerable  seen 
no  sight  of  land  at  noon  no  sight  of  land 
The  ship  set  to  the  N 

April  6,  1794 

Light  winds  and  hazy  with  S  W  swell  Few  fish  or  birds  of  any 
kind  scene  &  no  sight  of  land.  All  sail  set  Lightning  in  the  N  W 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  47 

Set  Royals  and  mizzen  top  gallant  sail  no  sight  of  land  ship  set  to 
the  N  and  Wtward 

Lat  0°  55'  19"  Long  90°  20' 

April  7,  1794 

Light  airs  very  heavy  S  W  Swell  caught  a  turtle  no  sight  of  land 
caught  a  Bonnetta  Strong  set  to  the  wnvd  no  sight  of  land  many  por- 
poises saw  sev'l  turtle  no  sight  of  land  a  strong  set  to  the  N  & 
Weward 

Lat  0°  32'  32"  Long  94°  15'  80" 

April  8,  1794 

Light  breezes  and  heavy  haze 

Large  Bodys  of  Hump  Back  and  fin  Back  Whales  seen  also  por- 
poises 

Inclining  to  calm 

Saw  Albemarle  Isle  bear  E  S  E  11  or  12  leagues.  Saw  a  sail  inshore 

Lat  0°  8'  34"  N  Long  91°  45' 

April  9,   1794 

Light  and  hazy  Saw  a  sperm  whale 
Ship  fired  a  heavy  gun  Calm  &  thick  weather 

Fog  cleared  the  ship  making  sail  after  us  &  not  liking  her  ap- 
pearance made  sail  from  her 
Lat  0°  19'  52"  Long  91°  52' 

April  10,  1794 

Moderate  breeze  and  smooth  water  Chase  coming  up  with  us. 
Cut  the  ships  taffrail  down  to  get  our  two  guns  out  over  the  stern 
found  no  chance  of  escaping  the  chase  hove  too  and  prepared  to  make 
the  best  defensive  resistance  we  could  at  5  the  chase  spoke  us  found 
her  to  be  the  Butterworth  of  London  from  the  N.  W.  to  Europe  &  at 
those  isles  in  search  of  water. 

Ship  in  calm  Land  covered  with  haze 

Lat  0°17'  0"  91°  49'  30" 

April  11,  1794 

Light  airs  and  thick  fog  inclining  to  calm  &  SWi  swell 
Albemarle  Isl  S  E  at  intervals  clear  Ship  in  company 
Lat  0°  33'  N  Long  91°  57'  W 

April  12,  1794 

Light  airs  with  S"iy  swell  at  times  foggy  saw  Culpepers  Isle  Light 
winds  very  hazy  at  noon  Culpepers  Isl  N  b  W  &  N  part  of  Albemarle 
Isle  S  E  by  S 

Ship  in  C° 

Lat  0°  49'  40"  Long  92°  3' 

April  13,  1794 

Light  airs  Siy  swell  &  very  hazy  inclining  to  calm  with  a  strong 
set  to  the  N^wara 


48  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

Culpeppers  Isle  N  &  N  part  of  Albeme  Isle  S  35  E 
Lat  0"  53"  Long  92°  03' 

April  15,  1794 

Calm  Killers  &  Porpoises  seen  SE  swell  Albemarle  Isle  SE  by  E 
12  or  15  leagues 

Lat  0  -  41'  20"  Long  92°  39' 

April  16,  1794 

Moderate  breezes  &  Hazy  wear  with  S'ly  swell  and  strong  N  W 
current  Capt.  Sharp  of  the  Butterworth  having  agreed  to  remain  with 
us  to  the  end  of  our  voyage  by  which  the  good  of  each  parties  owners 
was  reciprocally  considered.  When  we  arrived  at  Albanie  Bay  King 
James  Isle  Galapagos  to  refit  and  sail  together  whaling  and  sealing 
he  being  short  of  casks  asked  us  to  supply  him  with  20  tons  of  casks 

&  he us  a  certain  quantity  of  salt  in  exchange  &  in  every  other 

respect  to  assist  each  other  but  not  in  partnership 

Lat  0°  14'  34"  Long  91^  39' 

April   17,  1794 

Strong  breezes  &  Hazy  with  confused  sea.  The  slings  of  the  main 
yard  broke  and  main  yard  came  on  deck  at  the  same  time  starboard 
fore  topsail  sheet  gave  way  by  which  we  drifted  considerably  to  lee- 
ward our  consort  hull  down  to  windward  beating  up  for  Albanie 
Bay  King  James's  Isle 

Fin  Back  whale  and  porpoises  seen 

Lat  0"  27'  37"  Long  91°  24' 

April  18,  1794 

Light  breezes  and  hazy    all  sails  set 

Fin  Back  whale  and  porpoises  seen  Beating  up  for  Albanie  Bay 
King  James's  Isle 

Our  consort  hull  down  to  leeward 
Lat  0°  19'  40"  Long  91°  16'  W 

April  19,  1794 

Light  winds  hazy  wear  Strong  riplines  of  currents  all  sail  set  beat- 
ing up  for  Albanie  Bay  King  James's  Isle  Sent  out  boat  to  speak 
our  consort  Boat  ret'd  not  being  able  to  overtake  our  consort  Albe- 
marle I  S  by  W  thro  the  haze    Our  consort  Hull  down  a  Head 

Lat  0°  46'  53"  Long  90°  28' 

April  20,  1794 

Light  airs  and  hazy  weather  inclining  to  calm 
Saw  our  consort  in  the  N  E  descernable  from  the 
Lost  sight  of  our  consort    Light  airs  &  very  hazy    part  of  Albe- 
marle Isle  seen 

Lat  0°  32'  26"  N  Long  90°  W 

April  21.  1794 

Light  Breezes  &  Hazy  made  all  sail 

Black  fish  and  porpoises  seen  Saw  our  consort  in  the  West  dis- 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  49 

cernable  from  the  Mast  head  Albemarle  Isle  in  sight  In  haze  Abing- 
ton  Isle  E  &  N  to  E  Dist  from  shore  3  or  4  miles  our  consort  cumming 
Lat  0°  38'  57"  Long  89°  46" 

April  22,  1794 

Light  breeze  &  clear  Sent  the  Chief  mate  to  surround  the  isle  in 
search  of  Salt  fresh  water  or  refreshments  for  the  crew  Number  of 
Black  fish  and  porpoises  The  Butterworth  joind  Co  &  was  now  re- 
duced to  one  Butt  of  water  supplied  them  3-30  gallon  casks  Saw 
Fin  back  whale 

Abington  lise  S  20  E  Distant  from  nearest  shore  line  3  or  4  miles 

Lat  0°  50'  16"    Long  90°  57'  30" 

April  23.  1794 

Light  breezes  Boat  having  surrounded  the  Isle  &  found  the  only- 
anchorage  in  a  Bay  at  the  S  point  sandy  bottom  at  2  miles  from  the 
shore  7  ft™  he  also  brought  turpin  green  turtle  &  Rock  Cod  but  saw 
no  salt  or  fresh  water. 

Light  breezes  &  vary  many  Black   fish   Bindloes   Isle  E  1°    30' 
No  Abington  Isle  S  by  E 

Lat  0°  16'  36"  Long  91°  4' 

April   24,   1794 

Moderate  Breezes  and  Hazy  Wet'ir.  Bent  the  cables  and  got  anchor 
over  the  side  at  noon  the  isle  taken  for  James's  Isle  point  E  by  S 
the  nearest  shore  10  or  11  miles  Butterworth  in  Co 

Lat  0°  5'  40"  N  Long  70°  15'  W 

April  25,  1794 

Light  Breezes  Standing  into  a  Bay  in  the  Nt'i  part  of  what  we 
take  for  Albanie  Bay  James's  Isle  at  2  pm  came  to  anchor  in  12  fms 
Sandy  Bottom  and  steadd  with  the  Kedge  N  point  of  Albemarle  Isle 
W  25°  No  S  point  of  the  Bay  at  anchor  S  24°  W  and  on  with  the 
S  part  of  what  we  take  for  Albemarle  Isle  The  N  Point  of  the  Bay 
formed  by  a  small  green  Isle  laying  about  two  miles  from  the  shore 
and  which  I  take  for  Albanie  Isle  N  34  W  —  the  head  of  the  Bay 
E  17  S  a  small  rocky  point  a  mile  from  us  NE  by  E  Butterworth  in 
Co  Sent  the  Chief  mate  around  the  south  part  of  the  Isle  to  look 
for  water 

Lat  0°  10'  00"  S  Long  90°  40' 

April  26,  1794 

Moderate  Breezes  and  hazy  sent  our  boats  on  shore  to  search 
for  water  at  sun  set  ret"!  no  appearance  of  any.  Several  stone  jars 
found  supposed  to  have  been  left  here  by  Buccaneers  Procured  some 
seal  sand  turpin  and  Rock  Cod  I  went  myself  with  Cap"  Sharp  to 
overhaul  the  Bay  supposed  Albanie  Bay  the  surf  was  too  great  to 
land  but  we  saw  no  appearance  of  water  Light  winds  around  the 
compass  all  night  at  Day  light  the  whaling  master  set  out  to  search 
the  Bay  supposed  to  be  Albanie  Bay  for  water  by  8  he  retd  having 
landed  on  some  rocks  and  walked  to  it  found  no  water  but  great 


50  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

numbers  of  jars  supposed  to  have  been  left  there  by  Buccaneers 
Sev'l  parties  thro  the  forenoon  searching  other  places  for  water  but 
none  found 

Lat  00°  10'  00"  S  Long  90°  4'  W 

April  27,  1794 

Light  airs  and  pleasant  for  the  first  part  Employed  refitting  our 
ship  for  homeward  bound  At  dusk  chief  mate  ret'd  who  had  nearly 
surrounded  the  Isle  &  no  way  convinced  of  it  being  James's  Isle  from 
the  description  at  sev'l  places  he  stopped  found  numbers  of  jars 
old  iron  and  a  decayed  dagger  &  several  other  articles  decayed  with 
time  &  which  we  still  conjecture  was  left  here  by  the  Buccaneers 
None  of  our  boats  being  fit  to  leave  the  ship  24  hours  began  to  re- 
pair them 

Lat  0°  10'  0"  S  Long  90°  40'  W 

April  28,  1794 

First  part  moderate  &  cloudy  with  drizzling  rain  latter  strong 
breezes  and  hazy  promised  Captn  Sharp  to  half  our  water  with  him 
provided  he  kept  co  &  all  hands  to  go  on  allowance 

Carpenter  caulking  and  all  employed  preparing  for  doubling  Cape 
Horn  as  this  being  the  Last  port  we  could  touch  at  Supplied  the 
Butterworth  with  water 

Lat  0°    10'   00s   Long  90°    40' 

April   29   1794 

First  part  of  the  24  hours  strong  breezes    Employed  as  yesterday 
Supplied  the  Butterworth  with  water 
Lat  0°  10'  00  S    Long  90°   40' 

April   30,   1794 

Cloudy   Employed    Supplied  the  Butterworth  with  water 
Lat  0°  10'  00"    Long  90°  40' 

May  1,  1794 

Cloudy  with  drizzles 

Capt  Sharp  went  in  his  boat  &  found  water  right  abreast  his  ship 
Strange  conduct  in  a  man  that  had  not  a  gallon  of  water  in  his  ship 
Should  after  the  first  Afternoon  anchr"!  &  next  day  search  not  found 
no  water  to  give  it  up  &  get  his  daily  supply  from  us  till  now 

Lat  00°  10'  00"  S   Long  90°  40' 

May  2,  1794 

Nothing  remarkable  happened  fitting  our  ship  fleeting  rigging 
caulking — -painting  &c 

Lat  00°   10'  00  S    Long  90°  40' 

May  3,  1794 

For  Sea  sent  Capt  Sharp  his  casks  20  ton  but  only  received  8 
in  lieu  of  10  Butts  of  Salt 

Lat  00°  10'  00"  S  Long  90°  40' 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  51 

May  4,  1794 

Gentle  Beezes  &  clear  weathr 

Lat  00°   10'  00"    Long  90°   40' 

May  5,  1794 

Light  Breezes  &  pleasant  Weathr 

Lat  00°  10'  00"     Long  90°  40' 

May   6,   1794 

Moderate  Breezes  &  clear  weathr   Employed  Painting  &  Scraping 
of  ship  —  Breaking  up  the  Hold 
Lat  00°  10'  00"     Long  90°  40' 

May   8,   1794 

Heavy   rains 

Light  &  Pleasant  weathr 

Lat  00°  10'  00"     Long  90°  40' 

May  9,  1794 

Gentle  breezes  and  clear 

Bent   the   sails 

Employed  gathering  wood  and  preparing  sails 

Light  airs  and  hot  sultry  weathr 

Lat  00°  10'  00"     Long  90°  40' 

May  14,  1794 

Moderate  Breeze  &  thick  May  weather 

No  mention  is  made  of  hoisting  anchor  on  May  13  and  the  entry 
for  the  next  day  shows  the  ship  at  sea:  "Left  the  Galapagos  for  the 
Coast  of  Peru." 

Another  visitor  of  note  was  Captain  George  Vancouver  in  His 
Majesty's  sloop-of-war  Discovery.  On  Tuesday,  February  3,  1795, 
Vancouver  passed  l^etween  Culpepper  and  Wenman,  remaining  in 
sight  of  them  for  two  days,  being  harassed  by  light  and  variable 
winds,  Init  making  a  little  progress  toward  the  south  he  came  within 
sight  of  Albemarle,  Narborough,  and  Roca  Redonda.  Proceeding 
southward  along  the  Albemarle  coast,  a  boat  was  put  off  and  a  Mr. 
Whidbey  and  Mr.  Archibald  Menzies,  botanist  of  the  expedition, 
made  a  landing  to  the  southward  of  Cape  Berkeley  to  examine  the 
character  of  the  country.  Finding  the  shores  afforded  neither  fuel 
nor  fresh  water,  the  landing  party  remained  on  shore  only  a  short 
time,  but  noted  the  adjacent  area  was  subject  to  much  volcanic 
activity,  and,  on  February  9,  Vancouver  concluded  his  examination 
of  the  Galapagos  shores  and  headed  southward. 

Amasa  Delano,  an  early  explorer,  made  his  first  stop  at  the 
Galapagos  on  his  voyage  around  the  world  in  1801.    He  made  consid- 


52  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

erable  comment  eoneerning  the  natural  history,  particularly  on  the 
giant  land  tortoises  and  the  iguanas.  He  is  the  first  to  remark  on 
the  small  lizards  (Tropidurus)  known  as  lava  lizards,  probably  being 
struck  by  the  brilliant  red  coloring  of  the  head  and  the  sides  of  the 
neck.  He  gives  an  excellent  description  in  his  journal  of  the  water- 
hole  in  the  vicinity  of  Tagus  Cove,  northern  Albemarle,  from  which 
he  watered  his  ship,  and  which  was  used  by  the  Expedition  of  the 
California  Academy  of  Sciences  to  the  Galapagos  Islands  over  one 
hundred  years  later.  Lord  Byron,  commanding  H.M.S.  Blonde,  found 
this  waterhole  nearly  dry  when  he  visited  it  for  the  purpose  of  wa- 
tering his  ship  on  March  27,  1825,  and,  as  a  consequence,  his  crew 
went  on  short  rations. 

ENDERBY  WHALERS 

Even  before  the  voyage  of  the  Battler,  British  and  American 
whalers  had  entered  the  Pacific  and  were  in  Galapagos  waters.  Sam- 
uel Enderby  &  Sons  were  the  leaders  in  the  British  whaling  industry 
and  were  sending  ships  to  the  South  Pacific  as  early  as  1788.  In  that 
year,  Samuel  Enderby  and  Sons  fitted  out  the  whaler  Emilia  for  a 
cruise  around  Cape  Horn,  and  a  letter  to  George  Chalmers,  Esq., 
dated  Paul's  Wharf,  June  28,  1790,  gives  notice  of  her  return:  "The 
sliip  EmiJid,  James  Shields,  Master,  returned  from  a  whaling  voyage 
on  the  Coast  of  Peru  last  March.  As  she  was  the  fir.st  ship  that  ever 
whaled  in  the  Pacific  Ocean,  we  put  on  extra  quantity  of  all  stores 
to  preserve  the  liealth  of  the  crew  on  so  inhospitable  a  coast." 

A  second  letter  states :  "We  are  the  only  owners  who  have  sent  a 
ship  around  Cajie  Horn.  Some  owners  object  to  the  confinement  of 
the  Latitude,  others  to  the  time  the  act  obliges  them  to  stay  out,  which 
is  18  months." 

Enderby  com])lained  to  the  Crown  about  the  difficulty  of  getting 
.stores  left  over  in  the  King's  warehouse,  petitioning  to  have  them 
left  there  and  take  an  oath  that  the  duty  had  been  paid  on  them. 

From  this  voyage,  the  Emitvi  I'cturned  with  140  tons  of  si)erm  oil 
and  888  seal  skins.  In  1788,  Enderby  and  Sons  had  four  whalers  listed 
as  going  to  llic  \ves1\vai-(l  of  Cai)e  Hoi'ii: 

Emilia  278  tons  James  Shields,  ^Faster 

Friendship  217  tons  Abisha  Delano,  blaster 

Greenwich  256  tons  Jolm  Locke,  Master 

Kent  2fi5  tons  Paul  Pease,  ]\raster 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  53: 

111  addition  to  these,  five  other  vessels  witli  various  owners  are- 
listed  : 

Alderny  Curtis,  Owner  Ilaleron,  Master 

BeUisarius  blather,  (3wner  Anderson,  Master 

Britannia  Wordhill,  Owner  Simpson,  Master 

Forthill  Shodtred,  Ow^ner  Pinkham,  Master 

Muriam  Hill,  Owner  Woodstoncraft,  Master 

The  early  days  oi'  whaling  were  not  without  their  perils,  as  indi- 
cated by  the  letter  of  Samuel  Enderby  to  Lord  Ilawsbury,  dated 
February  4,  1790 : 

We  understand  that  the  treaty  between  our  Court  and  the  Court 
to  Spain,  by  which  our  ships  have  a  right  of  going  into  their  ports 
in  the  South  Seas  in  case  of  distress  or  want  of  water  is  not  in 
print  we  think  with  submission  if  your  Lordship  would  order  a  num- 
ber to  be  printed  at  the  Kings  Printer  for  the  use  of  the  Fisliery, 
one  side  in  Latin,  the  other  in  Englisli,  that  it  might  be  an  induce- 
ment to  many  Captains  to  go  around  the  Cape  as  they  then  would 
know  and  be  able  to  produce  proof  that  they  have  a  right  of  going 
into  Spanish  Ports  in  case  of  necessity.  At  present,  we  have  not 
been  able  to  persuade  more  than  two  of  our  Captains  (both  English- 
men) to  go  round  as  they  are  fearful  if  they  meet  with  any  accident 
or  sickly  crews  and  are  in  want  of  water  or  go  into  any  Spanish 
Port  they  will  be  made  slaves  for  life. 

Samuel  Enderby,  Jr.,  voyaged  to  Boston  to  get  information  con- 
cerning the  w^hale  fishery  and  engage  Nantucket  men  to  come  to  Eng- 
land and  sail  on  the  British  whalers.  One  of  his  rivals  in  whaling, 
Alexander  Champion,  for  whom  an  islet  in  the  Oalapagos  is  named, 
was  desirous  that  the  whaling  in  the  Pacific  should  be  carried  on  from 
Britain,  so  that  there  was  considerable  rivalry  among  the  whale  men. 

Samuel  Enderby,  however,  seems  to  have  been  acknowledged  as  the 
leader  in  the  industry;  a  memorial  to  him,  dated  .lauuary  '21,  1786, 
states : 

Mr.  Samuel  Enderby,  who  lives  at  Pauls  Wharf  was  the  first  ad- 
venturer from  Britain  in  the  Southern  whale  fishery  and  who  perse- 
vered in  it  during  the  war  has  had  the  greatest  experience  and  has 
now  the  largest  concern  in  it,  having  five  ships  equipped  and  is  fitting 
two  more. 

Enderby  realized  a  large  fortune  from  the  whaling  industry  and 
passed  aw^ay  in  1798,  at  liis  home  in  Blackheath,  in  his  seventy-ninth 
vear. 


54  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

The  British  were  not  alone  in  the  whaling  indnstry  in  Galapagos 
waters  as  the  New  England  whalers  were  very  much  alive  to  the 
value  of  the  Galapagos  whaling  grounds,  and  in  1791  six  whale  ships, 
one  listed  as  being  fitted  out  at  Nantucket,  sailed  for  the  Pacific : 

Beaver  Worth,  Master 

Favorite  Folger,  Master 

Hector  Brock,  Master 

Rebecca  ]\Ieader,  Master 

Warren  Barnard,  Master 

Washington  Bunker,  Master 

The  late  1860's  saw  the  end  of  the  whaling  industry  on  a  large 
scale,  the  sinking  of  the  "Stone  Fleet"  and  the  ravages  of  the  Con- 
federate cruiser  Shenandoah  in  the  northern  Pacific  raising  such  havoc 
that  it  was  never  restored. 

VISITING  MEN-OF-WAR  AND  SEALERS 

From  1800  on,  whalers,  sealers,  and  the  warships  of  various  nations 
were  frequent  visitors.  In  1825,  H.M.S.  Blonde,  the  Right  Honorable 
Lord  Byron  commanding,  anchored  at  Tagus  Cove,  Albemarle,  while 
en  route  to  the  Hawaiian  Islands  with  the  bodies  of  King  Kameha- 
meha  II  and  his  consort,  both  of  whom  died  in  London  while  guests 
of  the  British  Government.  Although  Lord  Byron  remarked  about 
the  tameness  of  the  birds  and  beasts  (no  doubt  the  sea  iguanas), 
strange  to  say  he  made  no  specific  mention  of  the  giant  land  tortoises 
which  must  have  been  abundant  at  the  time  of  his  visit,  especially 
on  Albemarle. 

In  1822,  Captain  Basil  Hall,  while  in  command  of  H.]VI.S.  Conway, 
made  a  stop  at  tlio  southern  point  of  Abingdon  Island,  where  he  set 
up  his  instruments  to  determine  the  compression  of  the  earth  at  the 
equator.  Though  he  was  only  about  half  a  degree  north  of  the  line, 
lie  I'ci^orted  tliat  his  results  were  not  as  satisfactory  as  those  made 
in  liis  own  country.  During  the  stay  of  the  Conway,  Captain  Ilall 
experienced  a  phenomenal  temperature  for  the  Galapagos,  the  ther- 
mometer rising  to  93°.  His  schedule  did  not  permit  a  longer  stay, 
so  the  shij)  was  stocked  with  tortoises,  numerous  on  Abingdon  in 
tho.se  days,  and  sailed  from  the  Galapagos. 

Tlioimh  the  voyage  of  H.M.S.  Beagle  to  the  Galapagos  in  1835, 
with  Charles  Darwin  as  naturalist,  was  of  short  duration,  the  visit 
being  only  of  five  weeks,  in  which  (Miathanui,  Charles,  James,  and 
Albemarle  islands  were  visited  (Sei)tember  15-October  20),  it  is  by 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:    THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  55 

far,  and  always  will  be,  the  most  famous,  for  his  theories  propounded 
from  his  studies  made  on  the  voyage  ui)set  the  scientific  world  of  that 
day  and  his  writings  pertaining  to  the  voyage  are  still  held  as  classics 
by  the  world's  naturalists. 

The  islands  further  claimed  the  attention  of  the  Royal  Navy 
when,  on  April  6,  1838,  H.M.S.  Sulphur,  Captain  Sir  Edward  Belcher 
commanding,  set  sail  from  Cocos  Island  for  the  riala])agos  and  made 
Abingdon  Island  on  April  18,  passing  within  two  miles  of  the  west 
shore.  After  three  days  of  experimenting  with  currents  and  tem- 
peratures, the  Sulphur  w^as  caught  in  a  calm  and  finally  made  Callao 
Roads  some  twenty  days  later. 

The  visit,  in  1846,  of  II.M.S.  Herald,  Captain  Henry  Kellett  com- 
manding, and  accompanied  by  II.M.S.  Pandora,  is  interesting  in  that 
its  naturalist,  Berthold  Seeman,  states  that  no  tortoises  were  found 
and  that  there  were  numbers  of  wild  dogs  on  Charles  Island.  Be- 
sides numerous  goats  and  pigs,  the  settlement  claimed  about  two 
thousand  head  of  cattle.  The  descendants  of  these  animals  still  run 
wild  on  the  island  and  are  responsible  for  considerable  destruction. 
The  elevation  of  the  settlement  was  given  as  461  feet,  and  the  posi- 
tion approximately  where  the  permanent  springs  are  at  present. 

On  February  4,  1870,  Read  Admiral  Sir  Arthur  Farquar,  on 
his  flag.ship  II.M.S.  Zealous,  visited  Charles  Island  and  an  account  of 
the  cruise  was  compiled  by  the  officers  of  the  ship.  Ten  years  later 
(1880),  Rear  Admiral  Frederick  Henry  Sterling  was  a  visitor  on  his 
flagship,  H.M.S.  Triumph,  but  made  no  special  comments.  In  those 
daj's,  it  was  customary  to  be  on  the  lookout  for  ships  in  distress  or 
for  shipwrecked  sailors. 

H.M.S.  Hyacmth,  in  1895,  while  returning  to  England  from  sta- 
tion at  Esquimault,  anchored  at  Black  Beach  Roads,  Charles  Island, 
and  two  of  her  lieutenants,  Wintour  and  Chadwick,  gave  a  thrilling 
account  of  being  attacked  by  "huge  Spanish  mastiffs"  as  they  headed 
up  the  trail  for  the  springs. 

British  ships  of  war  continued  to  call  intermittently  to  as  late 
as  1913. 

As  far  as  the  Royal  Navy  was  concerned,  the  year  1905  saAV  the 
beginning  of  the  end  of  the  Esquimault  Naval  Station,  when  the  num- 
ber of  ships  was  reduced  from  seven  to  one,  leaving  the  lone  gunboat 
'Shearwater  to  make  the  annual  patrols  to  the  north  in  the  summer 
and  to  the  south  in  winter,  when  it  visited  the  Galapagos  in  search  of 
stranded  sailors  or  shipwrecks. 


56  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

The  Italian  corvette  Vettor  Pisani,  G.  Pahimbo  commanding,  vis- 
ited the  Galapagos  in  1884-1885,  where  it  surveyed  Wreck  Bay  and 
visited  Duncan  Island.  Here  it  was  reported  as  taking  some  tortoises 
and  making  botanical  collections  on  Charles  and  Chatham  islands. 

Captain  Francisco  Vidal  Gormaz,  of  the  Chilean  Navy,  visited  the 
islands  on  the  Cluicahuco  in  1837  and  wrote  of  his  experiences  in  Del 
Anuario  Ilidrografico,  volume  15,  1890. 

An  American  frigate,  the  Potomac,  Commodore  John  Downes  com- 
manding, arrived  at  Charles  Island  on  September  30,  1833.  He  was 
formerly  First  Lieutenant  of  the  Essex  on  Porter's  famous  cruise. 
Downes  found  the  colony  established  by  Villamil,  a  Frenchman,  who, 
after  the  Louisiana  Purchase,  had  left  that  territory  and  obtained  a 
concession  from  the  Government  of  Ecuador  to  establish  a  colony  on 
Charles  Island,  Ecuador  having  annexed  the  Galapagos.  At  the  time 
of  the  visit  of  the  Potomac,  VillamiPs  colony  was  doing  a  flourishing 
trade  with  the  whaling  ships,  selling  them  such  produce  as  vegetables 
and  fruits.  Downes  reported  that  during  a  single  year  thirty-one 
whalers  had  stopped  at  Charles  Island  to  replenish  their  supplies  and 
to  take  on  water.  Some  tortoises,  close  to  the  last  of  the  native  ones, 
were  brought  to  Boston.  By  1846  the  tortoises  native  to  the  land 
were  practically  extinct  owing  to  the  steady  demands  of  the  whalers. 

Although  United  States  men-of-war  were  not  as  frecpient  visitors 
as  those  of  Great  Britain  on  account  of  the  Esquimault  Naval  Base, 
the  flag  was  shown  there  from  time  to  time.  In  the  early  1900's  the 
U.S.S.  Rochester,  formerly  the  Neiv  York  of  Spanish  American  AYar 
fame,  called  at  Stephens  Bay,  Chatham  Island,  to  be  followed  in  1909 
by  the  first  squadron  of  the  U.S.  Pacific  Fleet,  commanded  by  Kear 
Admiral  William  T.  Swinburne  on  his  flagship  West  Virginia. 

The  French  frigate  La  Venus,  Admiral  Abel  du  Petit  Thouar 
commanding,  spent  from  June  21  to  July  15,  1838,  in  Galapagos 
waters.  There  are  no  records  of  her  adding  anything  to  our  knowl- 
edge of  the  tortoises,  but  during  her  stay  some  birds  were  taken  and 
botanical  collections  were  made  on  Cliarles  Island.  These  are  now 
housed  in  the  herbarium  of  llic  Museum  d'TIistoire  Naturelle.  Paris. 

The  Swedish  frigate  Eugenie,  Rear  Admiral  C.  A.  Virgin  com- 
manding, wilh  Dr.  Kinberg  as  zoologist  and  Professor  N.  J.  Anders- 
son  as  botanist,  was  a  visitor  in  1852,  calling  at  Albemarle,  Charles, 
Chatham,  Indefatigable,  and  -lames,  whore  general  collecting  was 
undertaken. 

According  to  the  1  radii  ions  of  the  sea,  the  fi'igate  ])icked  up  a 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  57 

stranded  iiuiii  while  at  Charles  Island  and  the  following  is  a  transla- 
tion of  an  entry  which  was  made  in  the  log: 

Charles  Island,  16  May  1852 

On  the  island  met  a  North  American  seaman  with  the  name  An- 
derson—  and  after  finding  out  that  he  was  the  only  one  left  on  the 
island,  the  chief  insisted  on  taking  the  man  on  board  to  sail  on 
the  frigate. 

The  Eugenie's  arrival  in  Ilonolnlu  was  given  considerable  notice, 
including  the  following  in  the  Marine  Journal,  Port  of  Honolulu : 

Arrived 

June  22,  1852  His  Swedish  Majesty's  Frigate  Eugenie,  Virgin, 
36  guns,  34  days  from  Galapagos  Islands. 

The  Friend  noted  the  Eugenie's  arrival  as  follows: 

His  Swedish  Majesty's  Frigate  Eugenie. 

This  is  the  first  Swedish  man-o"-war  that  has  ever  visited  the 
Islands.  She  is  now  nine  months  from  Sweden,  upon  a  cruise,  i)artly 
commercial,  and  partly  scientific.  On  the  passage,  she  touched  at 
Portsmouth,  England,  Island  of  Madeira,  Rio,  Monte  Video,  Pata- 
gonia, Valparaiso,  Callao,  Guayaquil,  Panama,  and  Galapagos  Islands. 
She  will  proceed  on  leaving  Honolulu  to  San  Francisco,  and  from 
thence  to  the  Society  Islands,  Sydney,  China,  Singapore,  Cape  of  Good 
Hope,  and  homeward. 

Captain  C.  A.  Virgin 

Scientific  Mr.  Johnson 

Botanist  Mr.  Anderson 

Among  the  many  vessels  engaged  in  the  fur  trade  in  the  Pacific 
during  the  middle  1800 's  were  the  ships  AtaJa,  O'Cain,  Avon,  and  the 
schooner  Traveler,  all  of  which  were  in  Galapagos  waters  in  1816- 
1817.  The  brig  Tamaahnumh  was  there  in  1825.  No  doubt  these  ves- 
sels were  attracted  by  the  Galapagos  fur  seal,  which,  on  account  of 
persistent  hunting,  has  now  become  an  extremely  rare  animal,  being- 
confined  to  Tower  Island.  And,  of  course,  the  whalers  did  not  hesi- 
tate to  "knock  off  whaling  for  a  spell"  if  they  saw  the  opportunity  to 
gather  a  sizable  cargo  of  seal  skins. 

Sealers  and  whalers  were  particularly  active  in  those  days  and  as 
communications  were  not  as  they  are  at  present,  it  was  customary 
to  speak  to  each  other  at  sea  and  then  to  report  on  arrival  at  their  des- 
tinations in  order  that  the  news  might  be  published  and  shi]i  owners 


58  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

be  advised  as  to  the  whereabouts  of  their  vessels,  and  whether  the 
eateh  was  good  or  bad.  The  shipping  news  was  eagerly  scanned  by 
mariners  in  general,  and  the  following  items  from  the  early  maritime 
news  published  in  Honolulu,  an  important  port  of  call  for  whalers, 
shows  how  valuable  it  was  and  how  favored  Galapagos  waters  were 
as  a  whaling  ground. 

SPOKEN     1849 

March  12,  off  Galapagos  Islands,  spoke  ship  Massachvseti.s,  Chase, 
of  and  from  New  Bedford  7  months.  150  bibs,  sperm,  bound  for  coast 
of  Japan. 

Gallipagos   Islands  1858 

May  20  (northward)  Am.  Wh.  Sch.  E.  A.  Luce       50  sperms. 

May  20  Bk.  Chile,  90  sperms.  140  blackfish. 

MEMORANDA     July  1872 

Report  of  the  Whaling  Bark  Active,  Campbell,  Master — ^  Sailed 
from  New  Bedford  11th  of  November  last  —  touched  at  Juan  Fer- 
nandez and  transferred  oil  to  a  homeward  bound  vessel:  touched  at 
Talcahuano  March  20th  and  remained  two  days,  thence  proceeded  to 
Gallipagos  and  cruised  along  slowly  until  north  of  the  line,  and  was 
some  time  in  company  with  bark  Northern  Light,  Smith,  which  re- 
ported 116  barrels  of  sperm  since  leaving  New  Bedford  in  October 
last,  and  was  bound  direct  to  the  Arctic.  Took  four  sperm  whales  in 
vicinity  of  Galapagos  and  crossed  equator  May  20th  thence  to  port. 
Had  moderate  weather  and  arrived  the  evening  of  7th  inst  with  175 
barrels  of  sperm  all  told. 

Report  of  the  Schooner  Kaviaile.  I.  B.  Peterson  Master.  ^ — -Left 
Honolulu  April  12,  1873,  for  a  whaling  cruise.  Cruised  around  south 
of  Hawaii  for  three  weeks  —  Arrived  at  Galapagos  on  the  1st.  Janu- 
ary 1874.  Cruised  about  two  weeks  without  seeing  whales.  Cruised 
along  in  Lat.  1°  S  to  Long.  110  W;  saw  whales  three  times  and  took 
two  —  arrived  in  Honolulu  Feb.  27  with  60  bbls.  sperm  oil. 

THE  UNITED  STATES  FRIGATE  ESSEX 

On  April  17,  1813,  the  United  States  frigate  Essex,  David  Por- 
ter, captain  commanding,  arrived  in  Galapagos  waters  and,  next  to 
H.M.S.  Beagle,  is  the  most  famous  ship  connected  with  the  history  of 
the  islands.  This  little  vessel  of  860  tons  and  32  guns  practically  de- 
stroyed the  British  whaling  fleet  in  Galapagos  waters  and  was  a  con- 
tinual source  of  worry  to  the  British  until  her  capture  at  Valparaiso, 
Chile,  March  4,  1814. 

Despite  the  heavy  burden  upon  his  shoulders.  Captain  Porter 
made  many  interesting  observations  on  the  fauna  of  the  Galapagos 
while  on  liis  cruise,  and  was  the  first  to  remark  on  the  differences  in 


No.  25] 


SLEViN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


59 


Fig.  14.  The  U.S.  frigate  Essex.  Captain  David  Porter  commanding,  made 
history  in  Galapagos  waters  during  the  War  of  1812  and  vies  with  H.M.S. 
Beagle  as  being  the  most  famous  ship  connected  with  their  liistory. 


the  tortoises  of  the  various  islands,  being  struck  primarily  liy  the  shape 
of  the  shell,  the  dome,  and  saddle  back  varieties.  Also,  he  made 
remarks  on  the  lava  lizards  (Tropidurus),  probably  being  struck  like 
Captain  Delano  1)y  the  bright  red  colors  of  the  head  and  throat  on 
some  species. 

()w  August  4,  1813,  the  Essex  arrived  in  James  Bay.  Porter  states 
that  he  dropped  anchor  in  six  fathoms  of  water,  within  a  quarter 
of  a  mile  of  the  middle  of  the  beach  over  a  soft  and  sandy  bottom. 
He  moored  with  the  bower  anchor  to  the  southward  and  the  stream 
to  the  northward,  the  SW  part  of  Albany  Island  bearing  NW  X  N, 
Cape  Marshall,  Albemarle,  NW  and  the  west  point  of  the  bay  SW  X  S. 

AVhile  liere.  Porter  landed  four  goats  and  some  sheep  from  the 
Essex,  and,  as  he  states,  they  being  so  tame,  left  them  without  a  keeper, 
carrying  water  ashore  for  them  each  morning.  One  morning,  however, 
they  disappeared  and  a  searching  party  failed  to  locate  them,  so  he 
concluded  they  had  found  some  fresh  water  and  would  remain  inland.*^ 


"  These  animals  were  afterward  seen  by  the  crew  of  H  M.S.  Tagus  on  July  30,  1814. 


60  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

Porter,  as  did  other  early  visitors,  made  a  chart  of  the  Galapagos, 
which  is  now  in  the  files  of  the  Admiralty.  Many  valuable  papers, 
however,  must  have  been  lost,  especially  those  of  the  chaplain,  David 
Adams,  who,  being  a  surveyor,  was  sent  by  his  captain  to  explore 
the  islands  in  detail.  On  capturing  the  Essex,  Sir  James  Hillyer,  com- 
manding H.M.S.  Phoehe,  stated,  "There  has  not  been  found  a  ships 
book  or  paper  of  any  description  (charts  excepted)  on  board  the 
Essex." 

One  of  the  tragedies  on  Porter's  cruise  was  the  death  of  acting 
Lieutenant  John  S.  Cowan,  who  was  killed  in  a  duel  with  Lieutenant 
of  Marines,  John  M.  Gamble.  A  misunderstanding  between  the  two 
officers  resulted  in  a  duel  being  fought  on  the  beach  at  James  Bay, 
and  Cowan,  victim  of  the  code  of  dueling,  forfeited  his  life.  His  re- 
mains were  buried  with  the  honors  of  war  on  August  10,  1813,  Porter 
renaming  the  bay  Cowan  Bay  in  honor  of  the  deceased  officer. 

NiJes  Weekly  Register  (1814-1815)  gives  the  following  account 
of  this  affair  which  so  saddened  Captain  Porter  and  deprived  him  of 
a  valuable  officer: 

On  James  Island,  in  the  South  Pacific  Ocean,  on  the  10th  of  Au- 
gust, 1813,  Midshipman  Jolin  S.  Cowan,  late  of  the  United  States 
Navy.  At  the  time  of  his  decease  he  was  acting  lieutenant  on  board 
the  United  States  frigate  Essex,  to  which  post  he  had  been  tempo- 
rarily appointed  by  his  gallant  commander,  in  consideration  of  his 
high  professional  merit  and  his  enthusiastic  devotion  to  the  service 
of  his  country.  He  possessed  in  an  eminent  degree  the  esteem  and 
confidence  of  his  commander,  and  of  his  brother  oflScers  generally, 
and  gave  the  strongest  indication  of  future  greatness,  in  his  profes- 
sion promising  at  once  to  become  an  honor  to  his  country  and  his 
family.  But  alas!  His  destiny  was  otherwise  ordered.  An  unhappy 
dispute  with  a  brother  officer,  (Lieut.  Gambel,  of  the  marines)  led 
on  to  a  duel,  in  which  fell  the  subject  of  this  article.  The  intelligence 
of  this  distressing  event  occasioned  the  deepest  regret  in  Captain 
Porter.  No  previous  information  of  any  misunderstanding  between 
the  parties  had  been  received  by  him.  or  he  could  have  at  once  pre- 
vented the  catastrophe  that  ensued.  All  that  remained  for  him  was 
to  lament  what  it  was  now  too  late  to  remedy,  and  to  pay  every 
mark  of  respect  to  his  remains,  which  were  entombed  with  the  hon- 
ors of  war,  on  the  island  before  mentioned.  In  a  strange  and  remote 
part  of  the  world  he  fell, —  far,  far  from  his  kindred  and  his  native 
soil,  hut  his  grave  was  hallowed  by  the  tears  of  his  countrymen 
and  his  brave  associates  in  arms.  A  neat  simple  structure  was  raised, 
to  point  out  to  the  stranger  who  might  visit  the  island,  the  spot  of 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  61 

earth  where  he  remains   rested,   and   on   it   were   inscribed,   by  his 
friend  Lieutenant  M'Knight.  the  following  monumental  lines: 

"Sacred    to    the    Memory    of 
Lieutenant  John  S.  Cowan, 
of   the   U.S.    Frigate    ESSEX, 
who  died  here,  Anno.   1813, 
Aged  21  years. 

His  loss  is  ever  to  be  re- 
gretted By  his  Country 
And  mourned  by  his  friends 
And  brother  officers." 

The  only  record  found  of  anyone  visitino-  Cowan's  grave  since  the 
date  of  his  burial  is  that  of  Lieutenant  John  Shillibeer,  Royal  Marines, 
who  makes  the  following  remarks  concerning  the  stop  of  II.^I.S.  Briton 
to  James  Bay  on  July  17,  1814: 

At  James  Island  we  found  a  good  anchorage,  a  considerable  quan- 
tity of  wood,  and  at  the  foot  of  an  exceedingly  high  and  remarkable 
mountain,  a  small  stream  of  water,  near  which  is  the  remains  of  a 
hut  of  an  unfortunate  Spaniard,  who  was  left  there  by  his  com- 
panions, and  where  he  remained  nearly  two  years. 

Among  some  green  bushes  near  the  beach  is  the  tomb  of  Lieut. 
Cowan,  of  the  United  States  Frigate  Essex,  who  fell  in  a  duel  with 
Mr.  Gamble  of  that  ship.  That  this  unfortunate  young  man  was 
much  esteemed  by  his  brother  officers,  is  evident  by  the  great  respect 
they  paid  to  his  memory. 

Before  leaving  the  anchorage,  Porter  buried  a  bottle  near  the  head 
of  Cowan's  grave  with  a  letter  to  his  First  Lieutenant  John  Downes. 
As  the  latter  never  returned  to  James  Bay,  this  bottle  must  still  be 
intact. 

In  recent  years,  efforts  have  been  made  to  locate  the  grave  of  Lieu- 
tenant Cowan  without  success.  On  the  Third  Presidential  Cruise  of 
the  U.S.S.  Houston,  Captain  G.  N.  Barker,  U.S.N. ,  commanding, 
a  stop  is  recorded  at  James  Bay  where  a  futile  effort  was  made  to 
locate  the  last  resting  place  of  Cowan. 

A  serious  attempt  was  made  by  the  late  Captain  Sherwood  Pick- 
ing, U.S.N.,  when  on  board  the  U.S.S.  Mallurd  in  1911.  He  visited 
James  Bay  and  his  search  also  proved  unsuccessful,  leaving  the  rest- 
ing place  of  Lieutenant  Cowan  still  a  mystery. 

This  unfortunate  affair  in  no  way  aff'ected  the  career  of  Lieutenant 
Gamble.     He   was   given   command   of   one   of   Porter's   prizes,    the 


62  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

Greenwich,  and  after  many  harrowing  experiences  survived  the 
war  of  1812.  He  passed  away  on  September  11,  1836,  as  Brevet  Lieu- 
tenant-Colonel in  command  of  the  marine  garrison  at  New  York. 

With  him,  while  in  command  of  the  Greenwich,  was  Midshipman 
William  W.  Feltus,  a  youngster  of  fifteen,  who  was  killed  by  the  na- 
tives while  landing  at  Nukuhiva  in  the  Marquesas,  where  Porter  had 
gone  to  repair  the  Essex  and  throw  the  British  frigates  in  search  of 
him  off  the  track.  Gamble,  no  doubt,  saved  the  boy's  journal  and 
brought  it  back  to  the  United  States  where  it  is  now  preserved  in  the 
archives  of  the  Historical  Society  of  Pennsylvania.  His  own,  in  pos- 
session of  his  grandson,  was  destroyed  by  the  great  San  Francisco 
Fire  of  1906.  The  journal  of  Midshipman  Feltus  is  a  most  interest- 
ing account  of  the  daily  life  aboard  a  Yankee  man-of-war  and  gives 
many  items  of  interest  to  the  Galapagos  student.  The  part  given  per- 
tains only  to  his  experiences  in  those  islands: 

Journal  of  Midshipman  Feltus 

April  10th  off  Lobes  de  Tieri'o  at  3  in  the  afternoon  discovered  a 
sail  ahead  made  all  sail  in  chase  at  4  the  Isle  of  Lobos  de  Tierra 
bore  E  12  miles  distant  at  7  shortened  sail  at  8  fired  a  shot  at  the 
chase  spoke  her  a  Spanish  Brig  the  Barclay  to  windward  at  8  a.  m. 
point  Aguja  in  sight  which  is  on  the  main  a  great  number  of  seal 
playing  in  the  water  at  meridian  clear.  Ajuga  bore  E.  dist  7  miles 
Just  discovered  Point  Payta  which  is  in  Lat.  5°  3'  S  and  Long. 
81°  2'  West  according  to  Bowditch 

South  jAguja  Lat.  5°  59'  S  Lat.  Obs  5°  49'  South 

Point    I     "        Long.  81°  4'  W  Long.  W  81°  11 

11th  1813 
Commences  Pleasant  at  sun  down  Hauled  off  the  land  at  8  stood 
for  Payta  saw  2  sails  at  11  spoke  1  and  the  other  passed  on  the  above 
sails  were  two  Catamerans  or  a  parcel  of  logs  lashed  together  having 
1  mast  and  1  sail  at  meridian  spoke  the  Barclay  and  hauled  off  Point 
Payta  bearing  E  X  N  Dist.  9    Lat  5°  4'  s   Long  81°  11'  W 

W.  W.  Feltus 
12th,  1813 
Commences  Pleasant  land  in  sight  at  sundown  shortened  sail  at  7 
made  sail  and  Hauled  off  at  meridian  Pleasant 

Lat  Obsd  4°  7'  South 
Long  83°  5'  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 
April  13  1813 
Commences  Pleasant  the  Barclay  in  sight  ends  Pleasant  course 
N  W  by  W  14  VV  Dist  65 

Lat  Obs  3°  19'  South 
Long  84°  2'  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:    THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  63 

14th 

Commences  pleasant  at  8  P  M  the  American  Capt  went  on  board 
the  Barclay  at  8  A.  M.  got  the  powder  out  of  the  magazine  ends 
Pleasant 

Lat  obs  2°  22"  South 
Long  85°  00"  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 

15th 

Commences  Pleasant  standing  to  the  N<i  and  W(i  under  easy  sail 
Ends  ditto 

Lat  Obs.  1°  57'  South 
Long  86°   3'  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 

16th 
Commences  Pleasant  at  5  P  M  got  the  lower  steering  sail  out  and 
the  men  went  over  board  to  swim  Ends  Pleasant 

Lat  Obs  1°  44'  South 
Long  86°  30'  West 

17th 
Commences  Pleasant  at  S  A.   M.  discovered   the   isle  of  Chatam 
[Chatham]  one  of  the  Galipos  [Galapagos]  Islands  there  has  been  a 
strong  current  setting  to  the  nd  W^    Ends  very  hot  Chatams  [Chat- 
ham] isle  on  the  weather  bow 

Lat.  Obs  1°   28' 
Long.  89°  9' 

W.  W.  Feltus 

April  18th  off  the  Galipos  [Galapagos]  islands  at  sundown  hove 
to  off  Hood  island  and  sent  a  boat  into  the  bay  to  see  [if]  there  were 
any  vessels  there  this  isle  has  the  appearance  of  being  fruitful  the 
land  is  very  low  at  7  spoke  the  Barclay  at  11  the  boat  returned  with 
news  there  [were]  no  vessels  there  Hauled  the  wind  and  stood  to  the 
Nti  at  daylight  bore  away  for  Charles  Island  there  being  many  isles 
in  sight  at  9  there  being  a  great  number  of  men  of  war  birds  about 
the  ship  the  man  on  the  royal  yard  caught  one  of  them  at  Meridian 
hove  to  off  Charles  Island  sent  the  boat  into  the  bay  to  see  if  there 
were  any  vessels  there  this  isle  is  not  very  high  there  are  some  trees 
thinly  scattered  over  it. 

Lat  1°  30'  South 
Long  90°  30'  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 

April  19th  off  Charles  Isle  Wind  light  and  from  the  WJ  it  has 
been  from  the  S^  since  we  left  Mocha  until  a  few  days  ago  at  4  P.  M. 
the  boat  returned  and  brought  some  letters  that  were  left  there  by 
some  whalers  also  some  birds  with  long  bills  and  a  bag  under  their 
bills  that  would  hold  2  gallons  of  water,  also  a  large  hair  seal  filled 
away  and  stood  for  Albemarle  at  12  P  M  calm  Albemarle  in  sight  at  9 


64  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

A  M  light  airs  Capt  Porter  went  on  shore  in  his  gig  with  the  purser  at 
Meridian  Albemarle  bore  N.  Dist  6  miles  and  the  Barclay  South 

Lat  57'  South 
Long  91°  25'  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 

April  20th 

Albemarle  is  high  land  also  green  a  ship  may  approach  within 
%  mile  of  the  shore  as  we  advanced  to  the  S  W  Point  the  land  looked 
very  black  I  learned  from  those  that  were  on  shore  that  the  isle  was 
a  solid  rock  in  some  places  it  was  covered  with  a  thin  lair  of  dirt 
and  covered  with  bushes  from  this  it  appears  that  this  isle  has  been 
formed  by  a  volcano  there  is  no  water  on  this  isle  although  the 
clouds  rest  continuously  over  it  in  fact  none  of  the  Galapagos  Islands 
have  water  except  one  viz  Charles  Island  at  4  P  M  the  gig  came 
off  and  brought  the  following  articles  viz.  5  or  6  shags  or  large  black- 
birds and  a  Penguin  they  brought  a  number  of  other  birds  also  as 
many  laguanas  as  they  could  carry  this  animal  has  a  rough  or  rather 
scaly  skin  and  has  a  head  like  that  of  a  frog  only  much  larger  it 
has  four  flippers  and  a  long  tail  this  animal  runs  very  slow  it  meas- 
ures about  3  feet  in  length  its  flesh  is  delicious  they  found  a  great 
number  of  turtle  on  shore  also  some  large  seal  the  turtle  were  so 
large  that  they  didn't  bring  any  off  for  fear  of  bilging  the  boat  they 
also  brought  off  a  number  of  seal  skins  standing  around  into  the  Bay 
light  airs  from  the  Ea  at  9  A  M  Lieut  Downs  went  on  shore  at  the 
isle  that  forms  the  Nd  Boundry  of  the  Bay  at  Meridian  in  Elizabeth 
bay 

Lat  Obsd  33'  miles  S 

Long  91"  10'  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 

April   23<i 
Commences  sultry  ran  into  Banks  Bay  at  sundown  the  boat  went 
on  shore  at  2  A  M  she  returned  lying  too  in  the  Bay  at  daylight  the 
Capt  went  in  his  gig  to  look  for  the  watering  place.  Ends  sultry 

Lat  South  00°  11' 
Long  91°  24  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 
This  Bay  is  formed  by  Narborough  Isle  and  Albemarle 

April  24th,  1813     Bank  Bay 

Commences  hot  with  light  breezes  from  the  W^  at  6  P  M  The 
Capt  returned  with  a  number  of  green  turtle  also  some  Iguanas  which 
were  of  a  red  and  yellow  colour  a  great  number  of  fish  seal  skins  et 
cetra  they  had  turned  30  turtle  and  left  them  on  their  back.  Capt 
Porter  ordered  Mr.  Dowell  Master  to  go  on  shore  with  2  boats  and 
bring  them  off  and  when  the  moon  rose  to  turn  as  many  as  possible  and 
to  come  off  at  day  light  accordingly  he  took  Jolly  boat  and  sent  Mr. 
Isaacs  &  myself  in  the  green  Cutter.  We  landed  about  7  o'clock 
to  the  N'l  of  the  place  where  ships  usually  anchor  we  made  a  large 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  65 

fire  on  the  Beach  &  got  (J  turtle  in  the  boat  pulled  out  of  the  Bay 
&  ran  farther  north  where  we  landed  not  without  difficulty  for  there 
was  a  great  many  rocks  near  the  shore  &  also  a  surf  setting  on  the 
shore  it  was  very  dark  we  got  on  the  rocks  several  times,  when  we 
landed  we  found  that  Jolly  Boats  crew  were  here  and  were  building 
a  fire  there  were  only  11  turtle  here  out  of  30  that  had  been  turned 
on  their  backs  the  tide  had  risen  so  much  that  it  had  carried  the 
rest  off.  I  turned  in  on  the  sand  having  my  great  coat  under  my  head 
at  1  A  M  or  at  moon  rise  we  went  in  search  of  turtle  but  found  but 
one  at  8  A  M  went  on  board  made  sail  out  of  the  Bay  in  search  of 
the  Barclay  that  we  had  not  seen  since  we  came  into  the  Bay  soon 
after  she  hove  in  sight  at  10  we  were  taken  aback  with  all  sail  set 
ends  hot 

W.  W.  Feltus 

April  25th,  1813 

Commences  pleasant  Breezes  from  the  W<J  at  1  P  M  4  of  the  boats 
went  a  fishing  at  4  P  M  the  Barclay  ran  down  into  the  Bay  at  sun- 
down the  boats  returned  with  a  great  number  of  fish  also  some  Pen- 
guins in  the  morning  cleaned  up  Capt  RandoU  on  board  ran  to  the 
Nd  with  the  Barclay  at  Y2  past  10  crossed  the  equator  in  Long  91°  45' 
West  at  Meridian  Narborough  Bore  S  by  W  Dist  8  leagues 

Lat  obs'd  0°  9  N 
Long  91°   44'  W 

W.  W.  Feltus 

N.  B.  When  Capt  Porter  was  on  shore  he  found  no  watering  place 
the  sides  of  the  mountains  are  in  some  places  covered  a  foot  deep 
with  ashes  and  the  shore  is  nothing  but  cinders  there  is  also  a  crater 
on  the  North  Head  there  is  a  great  deal  of  wood  on  this  isle. 

W.  W.  Feltus 
there  are  a  great  number  of  sharkes  in  the  Bay 

April  26tli 

In  sight  of  Albemarle  Commences  pleasant  standing  to  the  Nd 
with  the  Barclay  I  suppose  that  there  is  a  current  setting  to  the 
Nd,  at  5  P  M  lost  sight  of  Albemarle  in  the  clouds  or  haze  that  set- 
tled on  it  during  our  stay  at  and  about  this  isle  we  found  it  was 
generally  calm  from  0  P  M  to  10  A  M  at  which  time  a  breeze  sprung 
up  from  the  Wd,  there  is  a  good  anchorage  down  in  Banks  Bay  Ends 
warm  with  breezes  from  the  N^  this  day  obs.  in  Lat  1°  5'  North  Long 
91°  50'  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 

April  27th  1813 
Commences  pleasant  Barclay  astern  at  5  P  M  disc<i  the  land  bear- 
ing S  S  E  at  day  light  no  land  in  sight,   (during  last  night  calm  as 
usual)  I  Believe  we  are  going  to  James  Isle  at  noon  obsd  in  Lat  1°  14' 
North    Long  91°   30'  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 
N  B    I  think  the  land  we  saw  last  evening  was  James  Isle    at  noon 
this  day  it  was  very  hot 


66  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

April  28th 

Commences  hot  at  5  P  M  6  months  ago  we  lost  sight  of  the  Cape 
of  Deleware  at  which  it  was  cold  and  blustery  and  now  it  is  very  hot 
making  the  best  of  our  way  for  James  Island  there  is  a  strong  cur- 
rent to  the  Nd  Wd    Ends  hot  and  clear 

Lat  Obsd  1°  8'  North 
Long  91°  25'  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 

April  29th  1813 

Commences  hot  at  ?  clear  at  day  light  fortune  smiled  on  us  for 
we  discd  a  sail  soon  after  we  disc<i  2  more  close  together  gave  chase 
at  7  came  up  with  and  took  the  British  ship  Montezuma  laden  with 
sperm  oil  soon  after  it  fell  calm  those  other  two  ships  were  hull  down 
manned  all  the  boats  and  rowed  after  them  in  the  following  manner 
Lat  1°  4'  North  gig  1  whale  boat  3  cutter 

Long  90°  20'  W  Pinnace  Jolly  Boat 

1st  cutter  2nd  cutter 

The  boats  ? 

April  30  1813 

Commences  warm  rowing  after  the  ships  (I  was  in  the  cutter) 
at  half  past  1  the  ships  fired  2  guns  apiece  to  windward  and  hoisted 
the  British  flag,  we  pulled  up  under  one  of  their  sterns  she  had  2 
guns  pointed  at  us  we  immediately  hoisted  the  American  Ensign  the 
ship  gave  us  three  cheers  which  we  did  not  return  boarded  here 
she  immediately  struck  to  us  we  manned  her  and  went  to  the  next 
she  had  1  gun  run  out  abaft  and  1  in  each  gangway  and  ready  to 
fire  we  ran  along  side  and  boarded  hauled  down  her  colors  this  last 
ship  the  Policy  threw  overboard  near  100  terrapin  the  first  ship 
was  named  the  Georgiana  made  sail  for  the  Essex  sent  the  provisions 
on  board  and  sent  officers  and  men  on  board  in  the  morning  employed 
sending  for  the  peoples  things    Ends  hot 

Long  91°  16'  W 
Lat  1°  5'  N 

W.  W.  Feltus 

May  1st  1813 

Commences  warm  in  company  with  our  convoy  Wenmans  Island 
in  sight  ends  hot 

Lat  1°  1'  North 
Long  91°  40'  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 

May  2nd  1813 
Commences  pleasant    Land  in  sight  in  company  with  our  prizes 


Ends  warm 


Lat  obsd  1°  3' South 
Long  91°  30'  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  67 

May  3'^  1813 

Commences  warm  sent  some  men  on  board  the  Georgiana  for  to 
mount  her  guns  in  order  to  fit  her  out  for  a  sloop  of  war  at  7  P  M 
I  was  ordered  on  board  the  Barclay  in  the  place  of  Mr.  Cowan  to  at- 
tend to  the  signals  during  the  forenoon  the  Essex's  boats  employed 
in  carrying  the  guns  from  on  board  the  Policy  to  the  Georgiana 
on  board  the  barclay  obs'd 

Lat  South 

Long  West 

W.  W.  Feltus 
May  4th  1813 

Commences    pleasant     Wenmans    Isle    in    sight    not    far    Distant 
the  Essex  to  windward  great  numbers  of  Bonita  &  Albicore  about 
the  ship  Ends  Pleasant  in  company  with  the  Essex  &  her  prizes 
Lat  1°  10'  North    The  Currents  are  so  changable  &  so  strong  that 
it  is  folly  to  attempt  keeping  Dead  Reckoning. 

May  5th  1813 
Commences  Pleasant    in  company  with  the  Essex  and  her  prizes 
Wenman's  Isle  in  sight  standing  to  the  Na  Ed    Ends  pleasant 

W.  W.  Feltus 
Lat  obs'd  1°  46'  N 

May  6th  1813 

Commences  Pleasant  made  and  took  sail  occasionally  in  company 
with  the  Essex  &  prizes  at  11  A  M  rec'd  some  additional  signals  from 
the  ESSEX 

Obs'd  lat  2°  11'  North 

May  7th  1813 

Commences  Pleasant  beating  to  the  S<i  Ends  ditto  in  company 
with  the  Essex  &  prizes 

W.  W.  Feltus 
Lat  2°  5'  North 

May  8th  1813 

Commences  Pleasant  at  I/2  past  9AM  the  Georgianna  rec'd  her 
commission  (as  the  U  S  Sloop  Georgianna)  from  the  Essex  the 
Essex  hoisted  her  colors  &  Motto  and  the  sloop  hoisted  hers  and  fired 
a  salute  of  17  guns  the  above  ship  is  commanded  by  the  1st  Lieut 
of  the  Essex    Mr.  Downs    Ends  Pleasant 

W.  W.  Feltus 
Lat  obs'd  1°  52'  North 

May  9th  1813 

Commences  pleasant  the  Essex  took  the  Montezuma  in  tow  she 
sailing  worse  than  any  in  the  convoy  at  5  P  M  the  wind  fresh 
Capt  Porter  came  on  board  the  Barclay   I  learnt  that  they  had  built 


68  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

bulwarks  on  the  G  Anna  &  that  she  carried  16  guns    Ends  fresh  in 
company  with  the  Prizes  &  Frigate. 

W.  W.  Feltus 
Lat  Obs'd  1°  19'  N 

May  10th  1813 

Commences  &  Ends  pleasant   Beating  to  windward 

W.  W.  Feltus 
Lat     °     '  North 

May  11th  1813 

Commences  pleasant  ends  ditto  the  Galapagos  in  sight 

W.  W.  Feltus 
Lat  22'   South 

May  12th  1813 
Commences  pleasant    land  in  sight    ends  pleasant    running  for 
Charles  Island  which  is  in  sight 

W.  W.  Feltus 
Lat  57'  South 

May  13th  1813 

At  5  P  M  came  to  with  the  Essex  &  prizes  at  Charles  Island  at 
%  past  SAM  the  Barclays  boats  went  on  shore  after  terrapin  I 
went  in  one  of  the  boats  in  going  to  the  black  beaches  we  came  very 
near  running  on  a  rock  we  landed  but  found  no  terrapin  but  there 
were  a  great  number  of  turtle  up  the  beach  we  found  recent  marks 
of  five  and  of  people  having  been  on  the  isle  the  land  is  rocky  and 
is  of  volcanic  productions  it  is  low  near  the  shore  we  found  fresh 
water  about  three  miles  upon  the  isle  also  a  great  number  of  terra- 
pin some  of  which  were  very  large  I  carried  2  down  to  the  landing 
which  completely  fatigued  me 

W.  W.  Feltus 

May  14th  1813 

At  noon  Capt  Porter  came  on  shore  here  but  soon  went  off  again 
at  dark  got  40  terrapin  in  the  boat  we  went  on  board  the  Barclay 
at  i/>  past  5  A  M  a  sail  hove  in  sight  which  proved  to  be  the  sloop 
Georgianna  which  had  separated  from  us  4  days  ago  she  stood  to  the 
jsjti  Wfi  the  Essex's  boats  went  on  shore  this  morning  for  wood  and 
water  at  7  started  the  2nd  time  after  terrapin  we  rowed  around  the 
north  east  part  of  the  isle  where  we  landed  for  water  but  found  none 
soon  after  we  landed  at  a  place  called  Pats  Landing  which  takes  its 
name  after  an  Irishman  that  was  left  here  5  years  ago  and  having  cut  a 
great  many  capers  and  having  a  garden  about  2  miles  from  this 
landing  raised  all  kinds  of  vegetables  and  sold  them  to  the  whale 
ships  that  stopped  here  at  length  having  stolen  a  whale  boat  he 
deserted  after  having  been  2  years  on  this  Barren  Isle  He  left  a 
note  stating  that  he  had  gone  to  the  Marquesas  Islands  but  he 
l)een  since  seen  at  Payta.  I  set  out  with  Mr.  Finch  to  look  for 
Pats   garden    at  length   having  clamered   over   rocks   and   hills   for 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  69- 

about  3  hours  without  water  we  found  it  It  is  situated  about 
SW  from  his  landing  and  is  in  a  crater  which  is  about  3  miles  in 
circumference  at  the  top  at  the  bottom  it  is  about  1%  miles  where 
there  is  a  sandy  but  clear  piece  of  soil  the  frame  of  his  house  is  yet 
to  be  seen  also  some  Pyramids  of  stone  &  his  fences  of  stone  which 
we  viewed  here  we  suffered  a  great  want  for  water  and  with  fatigue 
at  length  we  cut  down  a  prickly  pear  tree  the  wood  of  which  we 
sucked  and  quenched  our  thirst  considerably  we  returned  to  the 
landing  where  they  had  cooked  some  dinner  for  us  but  I  could  not 
eat  for  want  of  water  got  into  the  boats  with  about  10  terrapin  and 
made  sail  for  the  ship  there  being  a  fresh  breeze  at  noon  very  sultry 

W.  W.  Feltus 

May  15,  1813 
Having  landed  several  times  for  water  we  arrived  on  board  worn 
out  with  fatigue  and  burnt  up  with  the  sun  at  4  P  M  Mr.  Adams  of 
the  frigate  and  some  others  set  out  to  survey  an  island  bearing  North, 
that  we  passed  the  other  day  at  daylight  the  frigates  boats  went  on 
shore  as  usual    Ends  sultry 

W.  W.  Feltus 

May  16th  1813 
Commences  sultry  at  sundown  the  frigates  boat  &  men  went  on 
board  at  9  A  M  I  went  on  shore  at  the  watering  place  about  ?  by 
compass  from  the  landing  there  is  a  crater  or  cavern  about  20  ft 
in  circumference  at  the  top  it  ran  down  about  the  same  distance 
perpendicular  and  then  took  a  turn  I  would  have  went  down  but 
I  had  no  rope  and  to  go  without  one  was  dangerous  at  a  short  dis- 
tance off  there  was  another  about  100  ft.  in  circumference  at  the 
top  one  could  see  the  bottom  the  sides  were  quite  black  and  looked 
as  if  they  were  smoked  in  the  bottom  there  appeared  to  be  a  quan- 
tity of  ashes  I  visited  a  place  bearing  about  N  E  by  E  from  the  ship 
which  was  about  ly^  acres  of  lava  thrown  up  in  friglitful  lieaps.  In 
some  places  there  were  caverns  of  considerable  depth  and  insides  of 
which  were  smoked  black  and  a  great  deal  of  ashes  on  bottom  the 
lava  is  like  Blacksmith's  cinders   Ends  hot 

Wm.  W.  Feltus 

May  17th  1813 

After  having  viewed  these  curiosities  we  departed  for  the  ship  at 
9  A  M  I  went  on  shore  again  but  saw  nothing  worth  noticing  Ends 
warm 

W.  W.  Feltus 

May  18th  1813 

At  sundown  returned  in  the  night  we  had  some  rain  during  the 
forenoon  overcast  and  pleasant 

W.  W.  Feltus 

May  19th  1813 

Commences  cloudy  at  8  A  M  the  boats  went  on  shore  for  terrapin 
Ends  cloudy 

W.  W.  Feltus 


70  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

May  20th  1813 
Commences  cloudy  with  a  little  rain  Barclays  men  employed 
painting  the  ship  at  11  A  M  Mr.  Adams  returned  he  said  that  he 
saw  a  ship  this  morning  under  her  three  topsails  the  isle  that  he 
surveyed  he  called  Porters  isle  it  is  quite  a  large  isle  and  is  sur- 
rounded by  reefs  the  south  part  is  covered  with  wood  and  turpin 
one  of  the  latter  measured  12  ft  in  circumference  and  4  ft  in  height 
the  soil  is  good  on  the  North  side  the  land  is  barren  and  rocky  they 
found  no  water  on  this  isle  Porters  isle  is  not  laid  down  on  any 
charts  of  the  Galipagos  that  I  have  yet  seen 

W.  W.  Feltus 
Friday  May  21st  1813 

Commences  hot  at  i/4  Past  7AM  the  Essex  made  a  signal  prepare 
to  weigh  unmoored  and  hove  short  at  10  got  under  way  and  stood 
on  a  wind  to  the  Sd  &  Wd    Ends  hot  and  calm 

W.  W.  Feltus 
Saturday  May  22nd  1813   At  Sea 
Commences  hot  in  company  with  the  Frigate  &  2  prizes  standing 
with  a  fresh  breeze  to  the  Sd  Wd    Land  on  the  Lee  bow  standing 
south  on  a  wind    at  9  A  M  the  Frigate  took  the  Montezuma  in  tow 
made  all  sail    Ends  overcast    Lat  obsd  2°  11'  South 

Lat  of  the  Bay  1°16'  South 
Long  ditto  90°  33'  West 

Sunday  May  23rd  1813 
Commences  overcast  at  4  P  M  tacked  the  ship  to  the  Nd  Ed  under 
a  press  of  sail    Ends  pleasant 

Lat  1°  42'  South 

Tuesday  May  25th,  1813 

Commences  pleasant  at  4  P  M  tacked  from  the  land  wind 
light  at  dusk  cloudy  I  now  expect  that  we  are  going  to  the  main 
the  Georgianna  I  suppose  to  be  gone  to  Banks  Bay  at  midnight  we 
were  so  close  to  shore  that  we  could  hear  the  surf  at  day  light 
Charles  Isle  in  sight  stood  for  it.  Ends  hot  Porters  Charles  and 
some  other  isles  in  sight 

W.  W.  Feltus 
Wednesday  26th 

Commences  hot  standing  for  Charles  Isle  at  3  P  M  the  Frigate 
boat  went  on  shore  made  sail  for  the  S  Head  at  5  P  M  Mr.  Shaw 
came  on  board  and  informed  us  that  Dr.  Miller  Surgeon  of  the  Essex 
departed  this  life  yesterday  morning  he  had  lain  sick  for  some  time 
at  Meridian  South  Head  in  sight  standing  to  the  Nd  Sd 

Thursday  May  27th  1813 
Commences  warm  at  Sundown  standing  after  the  Frigate  under 
a  press  of  sail  at  8  A  M  the  boat  went  board  the  Frigate  I  heard 
that  Benj  Gears  was  taken  ill  last  night  about  8  o'clock  &  at  9  he 
expired  Meridian  standing  past  Narborough  for  Bank  Bay  South  & 
North  heads  in  sight    Pleasant 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  71 

Friday  May  28tli  1813  7  months  out  of  the  U.  S. 
Commences  pleasant  in  company  with  the  Frigate  at  4  P  M  Disc'd 
a  sail  Frigate  made  all  sail  in  chase  at  12  P  M  the  Frigate  hove 
too  spoke  the  Barclay  and  told  us  that  she  had  lost  sight  of  the 
chase  and  that  we  must  stand  for  the  land  so  as  to  see  her  at  day 
light  if  she  be  there  the  Montezuma  stood  off  and  the  Frigate  laid 
too  at  9  A  M  the  Montezuma  made  a  signal  for  a  sail  the  Frigate 
made  all  sail  in  chase  at  Meridian  light  airs  Frigate  sweeping  after 
the  chase  sail  in  sight  from  the  Barclay 

Saturday  May  29th  1813 

At  5  P  M  the  frigate  came  up  with  the  chase  having  English 
colors  flying  the  boats  passed  several  times  Frigate  dist  14  miles  the 

3  ships  soon  after  made  all  sail  off  shore  at  6  disc'd  another  sail  at 
8  dark  the  Essex  fired  a  gun    at  10  the  Barclay  came  up  with  the 

4  ships  hoisted  a  light  at  6  A  M  we  learnt  that  the  Essex  had  cap- 
tured the  2  ships  which  were  named  the  Atlantic  and  Greenwich 
both  English  whalers  made  sail  to  the  Ed  &  the  Montezuma  to  the 
Nd  Policy  to  the  S'  the  Frigate  laying  too  with  the  2  last  prizes  N 
Head  of  Albemarle  in  sight    cloudy  during  the  forenoon 

Sunday  May  30th  1813 

Nothing  remarkable  at  7  A  M  the  ESSEX  sent  some  we  were 
taken  in  tow  by  the  Greenwich  the  Policy  by  the  Atlantic  and  Monte- 
zuma by  the  ESSEX  the  two  last  prizes  mounted  12  guns  each 

Monday  May  31st  1813 
Nothing  remarkable 

Tuesday  June  1st  1813 
Nothing  remarkable    calm  during  these  24  hours  strong  current 
setting  to  the  Sd 

Wednesday  June  2,  1813 

Commences  calm  in  the  afternoon  a  breeze  sprung  up  heading  to 
the  Sd  on  a  wind  N  Head  and  Narborough  in  sight   Ends  ditto 

Lat  obs  00°  09'  N 

Thursday  June  3rd  1813 
Nothing  remarkable    standing  to  the  Sd  on  a  wind  in  company 
with  the  other  ships 

Lat  obsd  00°  20'  South 

Friday  June  4th  1813 

Commences  pleasant  breezes  at  9  A  M  kept  away  to  go  round  the 
N  Head  finding  it  impossible  to  beat  around  the  S  Head  we  have  now 
a  strong  current  setting  to  the  Nd 

Lat  Obsd  8  miles  South 

Saturday  June  5th  1813 

Commences  and  ends  pleasant    N  Head  in  sight 

Lat.  23'  North 


72  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

Sunday  June  6th  1813 

Commences  pleasant  Land  in  sight  current  setting  to  the  N^  at 
1  calm  caught  a  large  loggerhead  turtle  precisely  at  20  minutes 
after  3PM  Narborough  being  in  sight  a  volcano  broke  out  on  the 
South  part  of  that  island  the  smoke  (which  was  white  as  the  driven 
snow)  ascended  to  the  clouds  this  smoke  resembles  snow  through  a 
spy  glass  at  7  P  M  the  light  showed  very  plain  but  we  could  not  see 
the  flame  because  we  were  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  isle  to  it  the  had 
been  a  volcano  in  this  isle  7  years  ago  the  light  shown  plain  all  night 
and  the  air  was  infected  with  a  sulphurous  smell  standing  to  the  Nd  E 
at  9  A  M  N  E  part  of  Albemarle  and  Abington  isle  in  sight  Ends 
fresh  breezes    smoke  of  the  volcano  in  sight 

Monday  June  7th  1813 
Commences  fresh  breezes  and  clear  standing  to  the  N^  Ed  at  sun- 
down lost  sight  of  the  volcano  and  the  land    Ends  fresh  and  clear  in 
company  with  the  frigate  and  her  convoy 

Lat  obs'd  1°   27'  N 

Tuesday  June  8th  1813 

Commences  fresh  and  clear  Ends  ditto  standing  to  the  E  by  N 
Ends  ditto 

Lat  obsd  1°  42'  N 

Wednesday  June  9th  1813 
Commences  fresh  breezes   Ends  ditto   standing  for  the  main 

Lat  obsd  1°  32'  N 

Thursday  June  10th  1813 

Commences  fresh  winds  standing  for  the  main  at  7  A  M  the 
weather  changed  I  suppose  we  are  now  in  the  Longitude  of  85° 
from  Greenwich 

Lat  obs  1°  26'  N 

Friday  June  11th  1813 

Commences  pleasant  Breezes  and  cloudy  standing  to  the  E  S  E 
Ends  ditto 

Lat  00°  53'  N 

Saturday  June  12th  at  sea  1813 
Commences  pleasant    Breezes  and  cloudy    in  company  with  the 
Frigate  and  Her  prizes    Ends  ditto    no  obs. 

Sunday  June  13th  1813 

Commences  fresh  breezes  and  overcast   in  company  with  the  frig- 
ate and  prizes    at  9  A  M  disc'd  the  land  ahead  and  on  the  weather 
bow   Ends  cloudy   got  no  obs  but  we  are  in  South  Latitude 
NB    the  point  in  sight  is  not  St.  Helena    I  mistook  the  landi 


^  Probably  meant  for  Santa  Elena. 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  73 

Monday  June  14,  1S13 

Main  in  sight  at  2  P  M  tacked  and  stood  to  W<J  in  company  with 
the  other  ships  and  Frigate  at  sun  down  tacked  to  the  E<i  at  8  A  M 
the  Frigate  made  a  signal  to  prepare  to  anchor  ran  into  leeward  the 
point  and  found  nothing  like  any  town  stood  out  again  Ends  warm 
&  clear  good  obs.   00°  47'  South 

Tuesday  June  15,  1813 

Commences  pleasant  this  cape  which  I  took  for  Cape  St  Helena 
is  by  our  latitude  Cape  St.  Lorenzo  which  is  in  1°  4'  South  Lat.  beat- 
ing to  wind  disc'd  the  isle  of  Plata  at  sun  down  tacked  off  at  4  stood 
again    at  daylight  no  land  in  sight.    Ends  cloudy    no  obs. 

Wednesday  June  16,  1813 
Standing  after  the  Frigate  at  10  P  M  hove  too  near  the  isle  of 
Plata    Frigates  boats  went  on  shore  at  day  light  disc'd  a  sail    she 
proved  to  be  a  Spanish  Brig   Ends  warm  beating  to  windward 

Thursday  June  17  1813 
Nothing  remarkable   these   24   hours. 

BRITISH  FRIGATES  BRITON  AND  TAGU8 

Following  the  Essex  by  a  year,  two  of  His  Majesty's  frigates,  the 
Tagus,  Sir  Thomas  Staines  commanding,  and  the  Briton  under  com- 
mand of  Captain  P.  Pipon,  visited  the  Galapagos.  The  items  from 
the  captains'  logs  are  most  interesting;  in  addition  to  mentioning  the 
goats  put  ashore  by  Captain  David  Porter  of  the  Essex,  they  com- 
ment on  the  number  of  tortoises  taken  and  tlie  allowance  rationed  to 
the  crews,  and,  as  always,  the  search  for  water: 

H.M.S.  TAGUS 

July  20.   1814  AM 

Standing  in  for  the  anchorage  at  James  Island  at  11  shortened  sail 
and  came  to  the  B  Bi  in  6  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  down  Royal  and 
T  g  yards  Albany  Island  NN  W  1/2  W  the  south  extreme  pt  of  the  Bay 
S  S  W  %  W  the  center  of  a  mount  which  I  shall  call  Turpin  Mount 
from  the  great  number  of  turpins  near  the  foot  of  it.  There  is  also  a 
spring  of  fresh  water  S  14  W  a  fine  Sandy  beach  from  E  by  S  W  to 
N  E  %  N   By  comp.  water  on  board  87%  tons. 

PM 
Sent  the  boats  ashore  in  search  of  fresh  water  and  turpin  Saw 
four  goats  on  the  island  which  had  been  left  by  the  ESSEX  late 
American  frigate,  found  a  small  spring  of  fresh  water  near  the  foot 
of  a  mount  S  %  W  of  the  ship  and  near  it  many  turpin  37  of  which 
were  brought  on  board  in  the  boats  at  8  moderate  &  fine  clear  w  at 
12  do  with  Briton  in  company. 


^  Best  bower. 


74  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papkrs 

July  25,  1S14 

Boats  and  parties  on  shore  caught  a  few  turtle,  found  a  little  fresh 
water  but  not  a  sufficient  quantity  for  present  use 

July  27  PM 

Off  Chatham  Island 
At  4  a  boat  returned  which  had  been  sent  ashore  in  the  forenoon 
laden  with  turtle. 

July  31,   1814  AM 

At  Daylight  sent  2  officers  with  2  boats  on  shore  in  co  with  the 
Britons  officers  2  boats 

PM 

At  3  the  boats  returned  with  37  tortoises  sent  20  of  them  to  the 
Briton. 

(Albemarle  Cove) 

H.M.S.  BRITON 

July  25th,  1814  AM 

Vessel  3  or  4  mi  off  Charles  out  boats  and  sent  them  on  shore  to 
catch  turtles  and  a  party  to  haul  seine    Tagus  in  co. 

PM 

Cutter  returned  with  24  large  turtle  having  been  sent  at  8  A  M 
to  examine  the  coast  from  the  west  point  towards  the  anchorage 
weight  of  turtle  from  394  to 

H.M.S.  Briton  July  26/14  AM 

Killed  6  turtle  and  issued  to  ships  co  303  lbs  of  meat 

Stephens  Bay 

July  27/14  AM 

Killed  4  turtle  &  issued  317  lbs  of  meat 
Boats  on  shore  to  catch  turtle 

PM 
Haul  seine  etc. 
Caught  13  turtle 
Killed  7  turtle  and  issued  to  ships  co  350  lbs  of  meat 

July  28, 1814  AM 

At  anchor  Stephens  Bay 

Sent  boats  ashore  for  turtle 

Rec'd  28  turtle  —  several  weighing  upwards  of  3  cwt. 

Killed  7  turtle  and  issued  321  lbs  of  meat  to  ships  co. 

July  29,  1814  AM 

Under  Way 

Center  of  Barrington  S  by  W  Vj  W  —  Chatham  SE  X  E 

Duncan's  I.  SW  X  W  %  W 

Killed  6  turtle  and  issued  295  lbs  to  ship's  co. 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


75 


July  30, 1814 
James  Isle 

Killed  5  turtle  and  issued  200  lbs  of  meat  to  ships  co. 

Af  2  boats  returned  received  40  tortoises 

Killed  9  turpin  and  issued  267  lbs  of  meat  to  ship's  co. 


AM 


PM 


Aug  4, 1814 


AM 


Banks'  Cove 
Rec'd  14  turtle 


HIS  BRITANNIC  MAJESTY'S  SHIP  BEAGLE,  THE 

MOST  FAMOUS  SHIP  CONNECTED  WITH  THE 

HISTORY  OF   THE    GALAPAGOS 

Since  the  founding'  of  the  British  Navy,  its  ships  and  their  his- 
tories have  been  an  inspiration  to  those  who  were  to  follow  in  the 
footsteps  of  their  great  admirals,  the  mere  mention  of  such  a  ship 
as  the  Victory  filling  the  heart  of  every  Englishman  with  pride.  How- 
ever, Darwin's  ship,  the  Beagle,  was  too  insignificant  to  command 
any  attention,  and  it  was  not  until  after  the  return  of  Charles  Dar- 
win, the  naturalist  on  board,  and  the  publication  of  the  results  of 
his  voyage,  Jounial  of  Researches  into  the  Geology  and  Natural  His- 
tory of  the  Various  Countries  Visited  by  H.M.S.  Beagle,  that  it  be- 
came one  of  the  famous  ships  of  His  Majesty's  Navy. 


Fig.  15.    His  Majesty's  Ship  Beagle  hove  to  in  the  Strait  of  Magellan, 


76  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

It  is  truly  amazing  that  the  modern  cliart  of  the  Galapagos  made 
in  1942  by  the  U.S.S.  Bowditch,  a  vessel  380  feet  in  length  and  6,000 
tons  displacement,  equipped  with  every  modern  device  for  marine 
surveying,  should  so  closely  approximate  the  survey  made  by  Cap- 
tain Fitz-Koy  over  a  hundred  years  ago.  His  little  vessel  was  at  the 
mercy  of  strong  and  uncertain  currents  together  with  deadly  calms 
so  prevalent  in  those  regions.  Certainly  no  greater  tribute  could  be 
jjaid  to  the  Beagle's  commander. 

In  this  day  and  age  when  radar,  wireless,  sonic  depth  finders,  and 
various  other  aids  to  navigation  are  commonplace  aboard  ships,  those 
who  have  read  Darwin's  journals  might  be  interested,  and  many  are, 
to  know  what  sort  of  vessel  it  was  in  which  Darwin  made  his  famous 
voyage  and  accomplished  so  much  on  that  famous  five-year  cruise. 
The  Beagle  left  England  on  June  27,  1831,  and  was  paid  off  at  Wool- 
wich November  17,  1836. 

Designed  by  Sir  Henry  Peake,  Surveyor  of  the  Navy,  she  was 
launched  at  the  Woolwich  Yards,  London,  England,  May  11,  1820. 
The  Beagle  was  classed  as  a  sloop,  rigged  as  a  brig,  and  had  a  dis- 
placement of  235  tons.  The  length  of  the  gun  deck  was  90  feet;  the 
length  of  keel  for  tonnage  was  73  feet,  7%  inches;  the  extreme  breadth 
was  24  feet,  6  inches;  the  depth  in  the  hold  was  11  feet;  light  draught 
of  water,  forward  it  was  7  feet,  7  inches,  and  abaft  it  was  9  feet,  5 
inches;  the  armament  on  the  gun  deck  was  26-pounder  guns  and  8 
18-pounder  carronades.    She  carried  a  complement  of  75  men. 

In  1808,  some  thirty  small  brigs  were  built  for  the  Iloyal  Navy, 
and  a  few  more  in  1813.  The  same  design  was  used  from  1818  onward, 
the  last  being  the  Termagant  of  1837,  so  the  Beagle  came  under  this 
master  plan  of  1818. 

Like  vessels  of  her  day,  she  was  stoutly  built,  her  deck  beams  be- 
ing approximately  a  foot  in  width  and  had  what  is  known  as  a  well- 
deck  with  t'gallant  fo'c'sle  and  i)oop  deck,  the  compartment  below 
being  fitted  as  a  chart  room.  Although  vessels  of  this  size  were  some- 
times steered  with  a  tiller,  the  Beagle  was  fitted  with  a  wheel.  Cap- 
tain Fitz-Roy  made  several  suggestions  regarding  alterations  while 
I  he  \essel  was  being  overhauled,  and  for  the  comfort  of  the  crew  the 
spar  deck  was  raised  twelve  inches  forward  and  eight  inches  aft. 
She  had  none  of  the  modern  inventions,  such  as  turnbuckles  for  set- 
ting taut  the  standing  rigging,  this  being  done  with  lanyards  and  dead 
eyes  willi  block  and  tackle  as  power.  For  bracing  the  yards,  there  were 
no  pendants  with  luff  tackles  or  double  purchases,  the  braces  being 


No.  25J 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS 


\vliii)s  and  ])()\vor  ^aiiiocl  by  more  men  tagminii-  on  tlie  hauling-  i)art, 
and  to  board  the  main  tack  in  a  stiff  breeze,  even  on  a  vessel  tlie  size  oi' 
the  Beagle,  meant  plenty  of  man  power. 


1  Mtlmuth  Compact 


I.  Afr.  Darwin's  Stat  in  Ca/tain's  Ca^i'n  3.  J/r.  Panvin't  Seat  in  Poop  Cabin  tvtth  Cci  slung  bthimt  hint 

3.  Mr,  Danvin's  Ckest  0/ Drawert  4.   Bookcase  5-  Captain  i  Skylight 

H.M.S.  BEAGLE 
eau 


taissBSssr'' 


7.  Hmmmtck  Nttlimgt 


>.  Peep  LmJdtrs  j.  A/ter  Comfanion  5.  Bratt  Htiu  ficvmttrt,  Ca^lAtn't ^rijalt  frafitrtj 

9.  Sit»ml  Flmt  Leektra  4.  Oantuuxjft  6-  Six /emadert 

Fig.  16.    Detailed  plans  of  H.M.S.  Beagle. 

The  main  deck  was  given  over  to  living  quarters,  the  captain  s 
room  aft  taking  up  the  entire  width  of  the  stern.  Forward  of  this 
were  the  officers'  rooms  along  the  sides  and  the  midshipmen's  quar- 
ters, and  forward  of  these  were  the  warrant  officers'  rooms  and 
store  rooms.  A  small  locker,  or  bin,  as  it  was  called,  took  up  the  mid- 
ship section,  with  the  galley  just  abaft  the  foremast.  The  seamen 
s\\T.ing  their  hammocks  from  the  main  hatch  forward. 

The  lower  hold  was  given  over  to  supplies,  ammunition,  coal,  vari- 
ous stores,  and  that  all  important  item,  water.  Even  with  the  crew 
reduced  to  fifty-eight,  when  one  stops  to  consider  the  vessel  was  only 
ninety  feet  in  length,  it  can  readily  be  seen  that  accommodations  were 
anything  but  de  luxe. 

The  sail  plan  is  not  available  and  the  drawing  of  the  vessel  made 
while  in  the  Strait  of  Magellan  does  not  show  her  with  the  royal 
.yards  in  place,  though  it  does  show  that  she  carried  single  topsails. 
Ten-gun  brigs  of  the  Royal  Navy  did  carry  royals,  but  in  stress  of 
weather  or  for  various  reasons,  the  t'gallant  and  royal  yards  were 
sent  down  and  stowed  in  the  shrouds.  This  was  probably  the  case  with 
the  roval  vards  when  the  sketch  was  made. 


78  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

The  records  show  she  remained  at  Woolwich  until  1825  when  she 
was  allocated  to  surveying  service  by  admiralty  order  of  September 
17,  1825.  Her  armament  was  reduced  from  8  to  4  carronades  and  her 
complement  from  75  to  58,  while  so  employed. 

On  September  27,  1825,  the  vessel  was  docked  at  Woolwich  to  be 
fitted  for  surveying  IVIagellan  Strait,  copper  taken  off,  sheathed  with 
wood  and  re-coppered.  Her  rig  was  changed  to  that  of  a  bark  in 
order  to  facilitate  her  maneuvering,  and  on  September  7,  1825,  Com- 
mander Pringle  Stokes  became  her  first  commanding  officer.  On  his 
death  he  was  succeeded  by  Commander  William  George  Skyring  as 
acting  commander  until  Commander  Robert  Fitz-Roy  took  over  until 
the  end  of  her  first  commission,  October,  1830,  when  she  was  paid 
off  at  AVoolwich. 

During  the  second  commission  of  the  Beagle,  June  27,  1831,  to 
November  17,  1836,  he  took  command  once  more  and  although  he  was 
promoted  to  captain  during  the  cruise,  and  was  eligible  to  command 
a  ship  of  the  first  rate,  he  still  continued  his  duties  as  surveyor  in 
command  of  the  Beagle. 

On  fitting  out  the  vessel  for  its  cruise  into  the  Pacific,  Commander 
Fitz-Roy  made  many  requests  in  order  to  make  the  vessel  as  comfort- 
able as  possible  for  the  crew  and  to  facilitate  his  work.  That  the  ad- 
miralty had  great  confidence  in  him  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  his 
many  requests  were  granted  even  to  the  minutest  details.  The  fol- 
lowing correspondence  with  the  Naval  Board  in  regard  to  the  out- 
fitting of  his  command  shows  with  what  care  he  prepared  for  the 
voyage  which  ended  so  successfully : 

[P.  Rt.  Adm.  106/1346  F.  Off  Capt  Fitz-Roy   (Lihon's  Rudder) ]t 

H.M.S.  Sui'veying  Vessel  Beagle 

Hamoaze.  July  4,  1831. 
Gentlemen: 

Th(>  peculiai'  nature  of  the  Service  for  which  the  Beagle  is  des- 
tined, —  that  of  exploring  coasts,  little  known,  —  in  doing  which  she 
is,  of  course,  very  liable  to  accident  of  all  kinds;  — makes  me  feel 
more  confident  in  asking  you  to  order  Lihon's  Rudder  to  be  fitted  to 
her;  —  than   would   be    the    case   under   ordinary   circumstances. 

I  am  aware  she  is  too  small  a  vessel  to  be  thought  worthy  of  the 
extra  expense  and  trouble. 

Should  you  think  pioper  to  favor  the  Beagle,  upon  this  ground 


"[Many  of  these  letters  bear  file  designations  and  comments  as  well  as  endorsements  by  offi- 
cials, with  or  without  their  initials.  All  of  these  are  enclosed  in  brackets  so  that  they  will  be 
distinct  from  the  original  text.  In  a  few  cases  the  parenthetical  material  may  be  that  of  the 
author. — Editor.] 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  79 

and  thus  add  to  the  advantages  she  already  possesses  —  I  shall  be 
deeply  gratified. 

[(Endorsed)  The  Commander  at  Plymouth  will  cause  the  rudder 
to  be  fitted.] 

[F.  Off.  C4] 

H.M.S.  Surveying  Vessel  Beagle 
Hamoaze,  July  14,  1831 

The  Beagle  being  ordered  to  be  fitted  out  for continuing 

the  survey  of  South  America  Capt.  Fitz-Roy  requests  some  small 
changes  in  the  interior  fittings  suggested  by  my  former  voyage  in 

the  same  vessel The  manner  in  which  the  Chanticleer 

was  fitted,  having  answered  so  extremely  well  leads  me  to  hope  that 
you  will  allow  the  Beagle  to  be  fitted  in  some  respects,  similarly. 
[(Referred  to  Surveyor)] 

[P.R.O.  Adm.  106/1346  F.  Off.  70  Capt.  Fitz-Roy  (Lightning  Con- 
ductor)] 

H.M.S.  Surveying  Vessel  Beagle 
Hamoaze,  July  9,  1831 

I  have  the  honor  of  requesting  that  you  will  consider  of  the  pro- 
priety of  allowing  the  Beagle's  Masts  to  be  fitted  with  Harris's 
Lightning  conductors. 

In  my  humble  opinion  they  are  likely  to  be  very  serviceable  &  I 
earnestly  hope  that  my  request  for  them  may  meet  with  approval. 
[(Endorsed)  Acquaint  the  Admiralty  with  this  application  &  that 
the  Board  think  it  may  be  adviseable  to  comply  with.  W.] 

[F.  Off.  69] 

H.M.'s  Surveying  Vessel  Beagle 
Hamoaze,  July  9th,   1831 

[(requesting  that  the  Beagle's  upper  decks  may  be  "raised  eight 
inches")] 

In  examining  this  Vessel,  the  Ofl^cers  of  the  Dock  Yard  have 
found  that  nearly  the  whole  of  the  Upper  Decks,  —  a  great  part  of 
the  Spirketting,  — ■  and  the  greater  part  of  the  Water  Ways  require 
to  be  replaced,  being  very  defective. 

While  repairing  these  defects  I  am  assured  by  The  Officers  of 
the  Shipwright's  department  in  this  Dock  Yard  that  the  beams, 
and  the  whole  of  the  Deck  may  be  raised  and  refastened  at  an 
expense  which  will  not  exceed  one  hundred  pounds  —  and  without 
more  than  one  week's  additional  time  being  required  for  the  repair 
of  this  Vessel. 

[P.R.O.    Adm.  106/1346    F.  Off.  72    Capt.  Fitz-Roy    (Boats)] 

H.M.'s  Surveying  Vessel  Beagle 

Hamoaze,  July  9,  1831 

I  have  to  request  that  you  will  allow  four  Boats  be  built  at  this 

Dock  Yard  for  the  use  of Beagle,  of  the  undermentioned 


so  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

descriptions,  being  the  best  calculated  for  convenient  storage  on  the 
Vessel,  and  for  the  Surveying  Service  — 

No.  1  Yawl  —  26  feet  in  length 

No.  2  Cutter  —  23     ' 

No.  3  Whale  Boat  —  25     "      " 

No.  4  Whale  Boat  —  25     "      " 

I  have  also  to  request  that  the  Yawl  and  Cutter  may  be  built 
on  Mr.  John's  principle  of  diagonal  planking;  and  that  the  Yawl 
may  be  fitted  with  the  windlass  invented  by  Captain  the  Hon&/e 
George  Elliot. 

(Endorsed)  "It  has  been  usual  to  all  Surveying  Vessels  such  boats 
as  are  best  calculated  for  the  Service  in  which  they  may  be  em- 
ployed — 

The  Beagle  as  a  10-gun  brig  is  allowed 

Yawl  of  26  or  Cutter  25  feet 

Jolly  boat  of  16  or  14  feet 

Gig  —  22  feet  by  the  establishment  but  the  Committee 

of  Naval  Officers  recommended  Mr.  John's  principle  of  building 
Boats,  to  be  confined  to  Launches. 

[(Endorsed  beneath  by  another  hand)  Give  orders  as  requested  by 
the  Captain.] 

[(Next  ref.  F.  Off.  70)] 

[P.R.O.  Adm.  106/1346  F.  Ofl^cers  69  (cont)  Capt.  Fitz-Roy  (En- 
closure in  F.  Off  69)]  Report  — ] 

Plymouth  Dock  Yard 
14  July,  1831 

In  obedience  to  Minute  of  13  instant,  on  the  enclosed  letter  from 
Commander  Fitz-Roy  of  the  Beagle,  we  beg  leave  to  acquaint  you 
that  as  the  greater  part  of  the  flat  of  the  Upper  deck,  water-ways  and 
Skirketting  are  more  or  less  defective,  and  will  require  to  be  re- 
placed with  new  materials,  we  are  of  the  opinion  that  the  alteration 
of  raising  the  deck  eight  inches  may  be  performed  at  an  expense  of 
£  120,  and  as  the  space  between  Decks  is  only  five  feet,  the  stor- 
age as  well  as  the  comfort  of  the  crew  will  be  increased  by  making 
the  alteration. 

[F.  Off.  66] 

H.M's  Surveying  Vessel  Beagle 
Hamoaze,  July  4,  1831 

request  to  have  the  Beagle  to  be  fitted  with  a  Patent  Windlass  in 
addition  to  her  Capstan,  similarly  to  H.  M.  S.  Chanticleer. 

I  have  also  to  beg  that  if  you  approve  of  the  stove  which  was 
fitted  on  board  the  Chanticleer,  and  since  transferred  to  the  Phito 
you  will  permit  a  similar  stove  to  be  fitted  on  board  the  Beagle 
—  —  - —  it  saves  much  room  &  much  fuel. 

[(Endorsed)    Ask  Mr.  Fraser  at  that  rate  he  won't  supply  a  stove 
for  the  Beagle.'\ 
ISurveyors  as  to  Windlass  —  Desire   the  Woolwich   Officers   to   for- 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:    THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  81 

ward  to  Plymouth •  ■ —  the  patent  windlass  now  on  hand  the 

Chanticleer  to  be  fitted.] 

[P.R.O.  Adm.  106/1346  F.  Off.  69  cont.  Capt.  Fitz-Roy  (Raising  Deck)] 
[F.  Off.  69  cont.] 

Commissioner  Ross  and  the  Master  Shipwright  authorize  me  to 
say  that  they  approve  of  my  proposal, — and  consider  that  as  so 
much  of  the  deck  requires  replacing  very  little  additional  labour 
would  be  necessary  to  raise  it  entirely.  If,  however,  the  additional 
expense  should  be  deemed  more  than  proper:  —  I  respectfully  beg 
that  permission  may  be  granted  for  raising  the  deck:—  and  that  I 
may  be  allowed  to   defray  the  expence   myself. 

The  Beagle  is  ordered  to  carry  only  two  six-pound  guns  —  there- 
fore raising  the  deck  will  not  be  of  consequence  as  respects  the 
guns  and  their  ports.  By  making  this  alteration  the  storage  &  com- 
fort of  the  Vessel  will  be  greatly  increased  —  She  will  be  much  dryer 
upon  deck:  — Her  waist  will  be  less  deep, — -  and  as  she  carries  only 
two  guns  —  the  stability  of  the  vessel  will  not  be  affected,  as  might 
be  the  case  if  the  guns  were  raised  with  the  Deck. 

[  ( Endorsed )   Surveyor] 

[(Navy  Office  11  July  1831)  The  Board  refers  this  letter  to  the  Com- 
mand, at  Plymouth he  will  cause  a  Report  to  be  made  without 

loss  of  time.   G.  Smith] 

[Plymouth   Yard    13   July   1831     For    the    immediate   report   of   the 
Officers] 

[14  July    The  Board  are  referred  to  the  annexed  report  of  the  Offi- 
cers.   George  Smith.  Secretary — Plymouth.] 

[(Endorsed)  July  18     will  comply  with  this  request -in  con- 
sequence of  the  service  upon  which  she  will  be  engaged.] 

[P.R.O.  Adm.  106/1346  F.  Off.  85  Capt.  Fitz-Roy  (Awnings  &  Tents) 
[F.  Off.  85] 

H.M's  Surveying  Sloop  Beagle 
Plymouth  Dock  Yard,  July  28th,  1831 
request  for  the  undermentioned  articles  in  addition  to  the  regular 
establishment  for  vessels  of  her  class. 

A  strong  canvas  awning  for  the  main  &  quarter  Decks,  to  be  used 
only  in  sunny  weather. 

Two  small  "Bell  Tents" 

Two  small  Boat  Tents  made  according  to  the  enclosed  plan. 

A  strong  awning  for  one  Boat  (Yawl  of  26  feet)  made  according 
to  the  enclosed  plan. 

During  the  late  survey  we  made  these  things  on  board,  finding 
them  so  much  wanted. 

My  reason  for  asking  for  strong  Main  and  Quarter  Deck  Awnings 
in  addition  to  those  usually  supplied  is  that  an  awning  used  to  keep 
off  the  sun  soon  becomes  too  thin  to  keep  out  rain,  and  as  much  of 
the  Beagle's  must  be  passed  at  anchor  in  very  rainy  as  well  as  in 
hot  latitudes  —  the  health  &  comfort  of  all  on  board  would  be  im- 


82  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 


proved,  and  work  carrying  on  in  board  materially  forwarded  by  hav- 
ing a  drj'  &  sheltered  Deck. 

[(Endorsed)  Approve  of  these  things  being  supplied  as  this  ship  is 
going  in  a  peculiar  service.] 

[P.R.O.  Adm.  106/1346  F.  Off.  99  Capt.  Fitz  Roy  (Cables  Anchors)] 
[F.  Off.  99] 

H.M's   Surveying   Sloop   Beagle 

Hamoaze  18th  August,  1831 
Gentlemen: 

Having  attentively  examined  some  anchors,  made  upon  Lieuten- 
ant Rodger's  principles,  &  having  heard  the  opinion  of  many  persons 
qualified  to  judge  of  their  merit: —  I  beg  to  request  that  you 
will  allow  the  Beagle  to  be  furnished  with  two  Bower  Anchors  of 
13  cwt.  each:  —  (stock  not  included)  made  according  to  Lieutenant 
Rodger's  method;  in  lieu  of  I.  Bower  Anchors  of  the  usual  construc- 
tion. 

[F.  Off.  98.  (Another  letter  regarding  Anchors  &  Cables  which  are 
necessary  for  so  long  a  voyage.)] 

South  America  —  and  in  the  Pacific;  including  a  return  to  England 
by  the  way  of  New  Holland,  and  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  —  which 
service  will  probably  occupy  nearly  4  years — the  Enclosed  list  which 
are  greatly  similar  in  number  and  size  to  those  which  the  Beagle  was 
furnished  on  her  former  surveying  voyage  &  can  be  stowed  with  ease. 

Being  obliged  to  anchor  in  —  &  work  into, —  or  out  of  rocky  un- 
known places,  spare  anchors  &  cables  are  absolutely  necessary  — 
while  their  purchase  in  foreign  ports  is  both  difficult  and  expensive. 

I  have  asked  for  chain  cables  of  one  hundred  fathoms  in  length, 
because  the  water  round  about  Tierra  del  Fuego  and  the  West  Coast 
of  South  America  is  generally  deep  • — •  and  I  never  found  it  prudent 
to  bring  the  vessel  up  —  or  lye  at  anchor  with  less  than  60  or  70 
fathoms  —  where  the  water  was  deep  and  the  bottom  rocky  —  when 
it  blew  hard  of  course  a  much  longer  scope  with  required  —  to  avoid 
break  the  anchor  or  parting  the  cable. 

Having  parted  from  sixty  fathoms  of  chain  cable  (which  was 
afterwards  crept  up  and  recovered)  during  a  severe  frost  —  in  the 
Straits  of  Le  Maire, —  and  having  seen  .several  chain  cables  snapped 
at  different  times  by  bringing  ships  up  with  too  short  a  scope  —  I 
am  induced  to  beg  you  to  grant  this  request. 

We  had  on  l)oard  the  same  quantity  on  our  last  voyage — -  (Ap- 
pended) List  of  Anchors  and  Cables  requested  for  the  use  of  H.  M's 
Surveying  Sloop  Beagle. 

Anchors 

14  Cwt.  (two  being  Rodger's  if  allowed) Five    in  No. 

7  Cwt Two     "     " 

3  Cwt Four    "     " 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  83 

Cables 

Chain  (established  size) 400  fathoms 

Hempen  do  250 

Splicing  Tails  for    do    4  sets 

Hempen  Stream       do     200  fathoms 

Also,  in  addition  to  the  Hawsers  allowed  the  Vessels  of  the  Beagle's 

Class  — 

Cables  6  inch 100  fathoms 

4      "    100  fathoms 

3      "    100  fathoms 

[(Endorsed)     Give  orders  according  to  the  Commanders  request  & 
acquaint  him] 

[P.R.O.    Adm.  106/1346    F.  Off.  97    Capt.  Ritz-Roy   (Hammock  Cloth 
Tarpaulin)] 

H.  M's  Surveying  Sloop  Beagle 
Hamoaze,  18th  August,  1831 
[Asking  for  a  fresh  supply  of  Hammock  Cloths] 

I  am  desirous  of  carrying  out  a  spare  set  in  addition  to  what  is 
usually  allowed.  It  would  add  very  much  to  the  cleanliness  of  the 
Lower  Deck  and  Hold,  as  well  as  to  the  dry  and  healthy  state  of  the 
vessel  —  if  two  Tarpaulins  were  allowed;  for  laying  on  the  Lower 
Deck  during  rainy  weather  to  prevent  wet  and  dirt  from  being  ab- 
sorbed by  the  planks  and  working  between  the  Hatches,  injuring 
the  cables  &  hawsers,  and  accumulating  dirt  in  the  Hold. 

These  Deck  Cloths  would  be  used  only  during  wet  weather,  and 
would  be  carried  on  deck  to  be  cleaned  3  times  a  day 

The  Clianticleer  and  the  Beagle  always  used  Tarpaulins  for  this 
purpose   during  their  last  voyages  when   they   could   be   procured. 
[(Endorsed)    Let  the  Sloop  have  an  add'l  set  of  Hammock  Cloths; 
but  acquaint  the  Captain  he  cannot  be  allowed  painted  canvas  for 
the  Lower  Decks.] 


[P.R.O.    Ad.  106/1346    F.  Off.  103    Capt.  Fitz-Roy    (Sails  &  Spares)] 

H.  M's  Surveying  Sloop  Beagle 
Hamoaze,  18  August,  1831 
Gentlemen: 

I  have  the  honor  of  requesting  that  you  will  allow  H.  M.'s  Survey- 
ing Sloop,  under  my  command  to  be  furnished  with  spars  &  Sails 
according  to  the  accompanying  list  in  addition  to  the  present  estab- 
lishment for  Vessels  of  her  class.  It  is  probable  that  the  Beagle  will 
be  absent  from  England  four  years  —  and  will  be  employed  in  all  cli- 
mates, without  the  means  of  obtaining  supplies  of  stores;  she  can 
stow  them  with  ease,  an  equal  number  were  on  board  during  her 
last  voyage. 

I  have  also  to  reqviest  that  two  small  cooking  stoves  may  be 
allowed  for  the  use  of  Boats: — -  with  Tarpaulins  as  allowed  to  ships 


84  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

employed  on  the  Coast  of  Africa,  &  to  the  Beagle  during  her  last 
voyage  — 

[(Endorsed)  When  this  vessel  fitted  out  for  the  Surveying  Service 
in  1825,  she  was  allowed  to  take  such  stores  as  might  be  generally 
useful  &  such  proportions  as  could  be  conveniently  stowed,  p.  Adm. 
Order  17  Feb.  1825)] 

[List  —  Editor] 
Spare  —  Additional 
Top  mast  one  in  No.    (either  fore  or  Main) 

Topsail  Yard  one  in  No. 

Top  Gallant  Yard  "     "     " 

Top  Mast  studding  Sail 

Booms  Two  in  no. 

Lower  studding  Sail  Boom         One  in  no. 

[P.R.O.   Ad.  106/1346    F.Off.104    Capt.  R.  Fitz-Roy] 

H.  M's  Surveying  Sloop  Beagle 

Hamoaze,  24  Aug.  1831 

I  beg  to  inform  you  that  the  patent  Galley  Stove  —  made  by  Mr. 

Eraser  of  Shadwell  for  the  use  of  the  Beagle, — is  furnished  with  an 

additional  Bread  oven  —  which  I  find  increases  the  expense  £  17. 

As  this  oven  will  be  of  the  greatest  use  in  baking  bread  for  the 
Ship's  Company,  I  hope  it  will  be  allowed  by  the  Navy  Board  without 
my  paying  for  it  myself  — 

[(Endorsed)  Under  the  peculiar  circumstances  of  the  employment  of 
this  Vessel,  the  Board  will  pay  this  additional  expense.] 

[P.R.O.  Adm.  — Navy  Board  Ad.  106/1346  F.  Off.  121] 

H.  M's  Surveying  Sloop  Beagle 
Hamoaze  Sept.  20,  1831 
I  beg  to  be  allowed  the  honor  of  mentioning  to  you  that  the  ingenu- 
ous Compass, —  lately  invented  by  Lieut.  Col.  Graydon  of  the  Royal 
Engineers,  has  not  yet  been  tried  in  a  small  vessel, —  &  that  if  you 
approve  of  the  instrument: —  I  should  be  very  desirous  of  trying  it's 
Merits. 

My  own  humble  opinion is  that,  if  »"e/7  made,  it  cannot  fail 

to  be  of  great  Service  in  Foggy  or  hazy  weather,  or  when,  from  any 
cause,  the  Horizon  is  obscured,  though  the  sun  is  visible. 

[F.  Off.  119] 

H.  M's  Surveying  Sloop  Beagle 

Hamoaze,  Sept.  17,  1831 

request  for  "His  Majesty's  Surv.  Sloop  B.,  under  my  command  to  be 

supplied    with   the    under-mentioned    "Metal    Blocks",   on    Mr.    Both- 

ways  construction  in  lieu  of  wooden  Blocks. 

Cat  Blocks  —  double  —      two 

treble—        one 
Signal  Halyard  Blocks —      Single —       eight 
One  of  the   Cat   Blocks   is   more   than   is   allowed   by   the   establish- 
ment;—  I)ut  it  will  be  so  useful  as  a  Purchase  Block;   that  I  beg  it 
may  be  allowed  instead  of  a  similar  Block  of  Wood; — which  would  be 
much  larger  &  liable  to  split  &  decay. 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS 


8& 


[P.R.O.  —  N  B  1831     /1346   (R.Fltz-Roy— N.B.)] 

His  Majesty's  Surveying  Sloop 
Beagle 
Hamoaze  Sept.  25,  1831 
Gentlemen : 

With  respect  to  the 
Ropemaker's  warrant  applied  for  in  my  letter  of  the  21st  inst., —  I 
beg  to  mention  that  the  Beagle  has  an  Establishment  differing  from 
that  of  Sloops;  but  Suited  to  the  particular  Service  on  which  she  will 
be  employed,  and  as  the  Lord  Commissioners  of  the  Admiralty  have 
authorized  her  to  hire  a  Ropemaker,  —  I  have  to  request  you   will 
grant  a  Warrant  to  the  man  named  below 
(John  Borsworthick  from  H.  M.  S.  DuUin)  — 
[  (Warrant  Granted  —  )  ] 


F.  Off. 

122 

H.  M.  's  Surveying  Ship  Beagle 

Hamoaze  — 

Sept.  1831 

Petty  Officers  underm 

lentioned  —  Warrants  requii 

•ed. 

Date  of 

Last 

Passing 

Where 

Na  m  es 

Quality 

Entry 

8hi2) 

Cert. 

Passed 

Wm.  Wills 

Armourer 

7  July/31 

Adventure 

Not 

Gun  Wharf, 

9  Nov  1830 

known 

Plymouth 

Jno.  Bos- 

worthick 

Ropemaker 

10/July  31 

Dublin 
Late 

twenties 

Lost  in 
Thetis 

«       (< 

Jas.  Lester 

Cooper 

16  Sept. 

Maidstone 

21  June 

Victy  Yard 

1831 

1817 

Portsmouth 

[P.R.O.    Adm.  —  Navy  Board     /1346    (Robt  Fitz-Roy  to  N.B.)] 

His  Majesty's  Surveying  Sloop 
Beagle 
Hamoaze,  Oct.  15,  1831 
Gentlemen : 

With  reference  to  your  letter  of  the  13th  respecting  the  Compass 
invented  by  Lieut.  Col.  Graydon: —  I  beg  to  mention  that  it  is  proba- 
ble the  Beagle  will  not  sail  from  England  before  the  10th  of  Novem- 
ber:—  therefore  I  have  hopes  of  being  enabled  to  make  trial  of  his 
Compass. 


[F.  Off.  129] 

His  Majesty's  Surveying  Sloop 
Beagle 
Hamoaze,  8th  Oct.  1831 

I  have  the  honor  of  requesting  that  you  will  allow  the  Patent  Cap- 
stan of  H.  M.'s  Surveying  Sloop  under  my  command  to  be  returned 
into  Store. 


86  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

The  excellent  Patent  windlass  with  which  you  ordered  the  Beagle 
to  be  supplied  renders  the  Capstan  unnecessary;  and  I  find  from 
repeated  careful  trials  that  it  causes  the  Compass  card  in  the  Bin- 
nacles to  deviate  10  degrees  from  their  proper  position; —  owing 
to  its  iron  spindle  &  mass  of  iron  work. 

H.  M.'s  Surveying  Vessels  Adventure  and  Chanticleer  had  Pat- 
ent Windlasses  and  never  used  a  Capstan. 

The  Windlass  which  is  now  on  board  the  Beagle  was  in  the 
Chanticleer  during  her  last  voyage  (S.  America,  Cape  Horn)  and 
answered  every  purpose  exceedingly  well. 

[The  following  notations  are  also  a  matter  of  the   Naval   Board's 

record. — Editor.] 

Anchors    Est.  of  for  Ships 

Commr.  of  the  Beagle  applies  for  5  anchors  of  14  cwt.  2  of  7  cwt. 

&  4  of  3  cwt.  Aug.  18,  1831 

Architecture,  Naval  — •  Improvements 

Commander  Fitz-Roy  requests  that  Lihon's  Rudder  may  be  fitted  to 

the  Beagle  Surveying  Vessel. 

Orders  to  Plymouth  to  do  so  July  4,  1831 

(Arrangements    for    fitting    etc.    Wm.    Sharp    Shipwright    sent    to 

Plymouth) 

To  be  provided  for  the  Beagle  also  Pintles 

&  Braces     (Prices)  Aug.  1831 

Boats  —  Establishment  of  —  for  Ships 

Commr.  of  the  Beagle  requests  that  a  yawl,  a  cutter  and  2  whale  boats 

may  be  built  for  that  vessel  — 

Orders  to  Plymouth  July  9,  1831 

Boats  —  Awnings,  Curtains  &  c 

Commander  of  the  Beagle  requests  she  may  be  supplied  with  2  small 

boat  Tents,  &  with  a  strong  awning  for  a  yawl  of  26  feet,  according 

to  plans  sent 

Orders  to  Plymouth  July  28 

Boats  —  Improvements  d  Alterations 

Commr.  of  the  Beagle  requests  make  yawl  of  26  ft.  &  a  cutter  &  2 

whale  boats  may  be  built  for  that  Vessel  — 

Orders  to  Plymouth  July  9 

Cables  —  Cordage    Made  of  Iron 

Commr.  of  the  Beagle  applies  for  400   (tons?)  of  chain  cable 

Orders  to  Plymouth  Aug.  18,  1831 

Capstans  d-  Windlasses 

Commander  of  the  Beagle  requests  that  she  may  be  fitted  with  a  pat- 
ent Windlass,  in  addition  to  her  capstan,  similarly  to  the  Chanticleer. 
Woolwich  Officers  to  send  to  Plymouth  the  Patent  Windlass  now  on 
the  Chanticleer  — 
Plymouth  to  fit  it  in  the  Beagle  July  4,  1831 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  87 

Compasses,  Binnacles,  &c 

Commdr  at  Plymouth  to  issue  to  the  Beagle  1  large  and  1  small  Pris- 
matic, Surveying  &  Azimuth  Compass  invented  by  Mr.  Schmalcalder. 
Command''  to  report  his  opinion 

Aug.  24 

Commdr  of  the  Beagle  applies  for  one  to  be  sent  him 

Sept.  20 

Lt.  Col.  Graydon  has  ordered  the  Compass  required  for  the  Beagle 

to  be  put  in  head,  l)ut  it  is  doubtful  if  it  can  be  completed  in  time — 

Acquaint  Command''  of  the  Beagle 

Commander  states  that  he  does  not  expect  to  leave  England  before 

10th  of  Nov.  &  hopes  it  can  be  made  in  time 

Acquaint  Col.  Graydon  Oct.  15 

Fireheaters,  'boilers,  cooking  machines,  stoves,  &c 
Commr.  of  the  Beagle  requests  to  be  supplied  with  a  stove  similar  to 
that  ■which  was  in  the  Chanticleer  —  now  in  the  Pluto.    Mr.  Fraser 
to  state  price 

July  4,  1831 

Mr.  Fraser  will  supply  the  Beagle  with  a  firehearth  similar  to  the 
Chanticleer's  for  £  46.10s.    Desires  to  send  it  to  Deptford 
Plymouth  to  issue  it  • — •  Commandr  acquainted 

Mr.  Fraser  to  report  when  it  will  be  delivered;  it  should  be  delivered 
by  the  7th  as  there  will  be  an  opportunity  of  forwarding  it  on  that 
day  July  19 

Capt.  requests  two  may  be  supplied.    Portsmouth  supplied. 

Aug.  19 

Commandr  of  the  Beagle  reports  that  the  Galley  Stove  made  by  Mr. 
Fraser  is  furnished  by  his  desire  with  an  additional   Bread  Oven 
which  adds  £  17  to  the  expense  which  he  hopes  may  be  allowed  — 
Accepted  —  That  under  the  peculiar  circumstances  of  the  employ- 
ment of  the  Beagle  the  Board  will  pay  the  additional  expense 

Aug.  24 

(Mr.  Fraser  had  assigned  his  interests  in  firehearths  to  Beeston  & 
Co.,  but  had  himself  furnished  the  one  for  the  Beagle  —  the  Navy 
Board  "have  nothing  to  do"  with  a  private  arrangement  Dec.  9 

From  1660-1685  men-of-war  other  than  first  rates,  used  the 
crowned  lion  as  a  figurehead,  and  it  was  not  until  1689-1702  that 
the  privilege  of  individual  figureheads  was  extended  to  second  rates. 
In  1727  the  Admiralty  authorized  the  use  of  appropriate  figureheads 
in  smaller  ships,  so  taking  advantage  of  this  privilege  the  head  of  a 
beagle  was  fitted  to  Darwin's  ship,  the  vessel  that  was  to  be  his  future 
home  for  so  many  months.  "When  Danvin  saw  the  Beagle,  he  remarked : 


88  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papkrs 

She  looks  most  beautiful,  even  a  landsman  must  admire  her.  We  all 
think  her  the  most  perfect  vessel  ever  turned  out  of  a  dockyard.  One 
thing  is  certain,  no  vessel  has  been  fitted  out  so  extensively,  and 
with  more  care.  Everything  that  can  be  made  so  is  of  mahogany, 
and  nothing  can  exceed  the  neatness  and  beauty  of  all  the  accom- 
modations. 

Fitz-Koy's  official  inventory  informs  us  that  there  were  lightning- 
conductors  on  all  masts,  the  bowsprit,  and  the  flying  jib-boom.  Upon 
each  quarter  hung  a  whale  boat  twenty-five  feet  long.  In  addition, 
a  stout  dinghy  was  carried  astern.  Seven  bra.ss  guns  were  mounted 
on  deck;  one  on  tlie  fore-castle,  two  before  the  chestree,  and  four 
abaft  the  mainmast;  five  of  these  were  six  pounders,  and  two  were 
nine  pounders. 

When  the  Beagle  completed  her  second  commission,  under  Cap- 
tain Fitz-Koy,  she  was  paid  off  at  Woolwich  on  November  17,  1836. 
Remaining  idle  but  a  short  time,  she  was  commissioned  for  her  third 
cruise  on  February  16,  1837  for  a  survey  of  the  coast  of  Australia 
and  Bass's  Strait  under  the  command  of  John  Clements  Wickham, 
who  was  invalided  home  and  succeeded  by  John  Lort  Stokes.  On 
completion  of  this  cruise,  she  was  again  paid  off  at  Woolwich  on 
October  14,  1843.  She  was  then  transferred  to  the  Commissioner  of 
Customs,  by  Admiralty  Order  of  April  1845,  for  service  as  a  Watch 
Vessel  at  Southend  and  was  employed  subsequently  at  Paglesham. 
She  received  distinguishing  number  "7."  On  May  13,  1870,  the  Beagle 
was  sold  at  public  auction  to  the  ship})reakers  Murray  and  Trainer 
for  the  sum  of  525  pounds.  Thus  ended  the  career  of  one  of  the  Royal 
Navy's  famous  ships. 

The  Beagle's  commander,  Robert  Fitz-Roy,  had  a  brilliant  career 
in  the  Royal  Navy.  Born  at  Ampton  Hall,  Suffolk,  he  entered  the 
Royal  Naval  College  at  Portsmouth  in  February,  1818.  On  October 
19,  1819,  he  was  appointed  to  the  Owen  Glendower  cruising  on  the 
South  American  coast,  and  in  1821  he  joined  the  Hind  and  served  two 
years  in  the  ^lediterranean.  In  1825  he  served  on  the  Thetis,  and  in 
1828  he  was  made  commander  of  the  Beagle.  Though  on  December  3, 
1834,  he  was  promoted  to  the  rank  of  captain  and  was  eligi])le  for  com- 
mand of  a  larger  vessel,  he  remained  in  command  of  the  Beagle  on 
surveying  duty. 

He  was  promoted  to  Rear  Admiral  in  1857  and  Vice  Admiral  in 
1863.  In  later  years,  he  became  Governor  of  New  Zealand  and  Chief 
of  the  Meteorological  Department  of  the  Board  of  Trade. 

Finally  overwork  caused  his  collapse  and  prompted  him  to  end 
his  life  at  his  residence  at  Norwood,  Surrcv.  in  .lune,  1865. 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  89 

VOYAGE  OP'  LE  GENIE 

The  remarks  on  tlie  climate  and  the  comments  on  the  work  of  Cap- 
tain Kol)ert  Fitz-Hoy,  K.X.,  together  Avitii  the  reports  which  it  con- 
tains concerning  the  sounding  of  the  crater  lake  at  Tagiis  Cove  and 
the  experience  of  watering  his  ship  at  Freshwater  Bay,  make  most 
interesting  the  following  rather  literal  translation  of  the  account  of  the 
visit  of  Henri  Louns,  Compte  de  Gueydon,  who,  while  in  command  of 
the  French  brig-of-war  Le  Genie,  made  a  visit  to  the  Galapagos  Islands 
which  lasted  from  August  7  to  September  17,  1846. 


Exploration  Made  in  August  and  September,  1946,  by 

Capt.  de  Gueydon  Commander  of  the  Brig 

Le  Genie 
Admiral : 

On  August  6th  last,  you  gave  me  the  order  to  set  sail  the  next  day 
and  steer  course  directly  toward  the  Galapagos  Island  Archipelago 
for  the  purpose  of  exploring  those  islands  and  then  to  be  able  to  give 
you  all  information  requested  by  the  Minister  in  his  message  of 
September  17,  1845,  of  which  you  sent  me  a  copy  together  with  a  letter 
from  the  Consul  for  France  at  Guayaquil  to  the  Minister  of  Foreign 
Affairs,  a  translation  of  a  note  published  in  the  Gazette  of  Ecuador  and 
the  summary  of  information  furnished  by  Admiral  Dupetit-Thouars 
following  the  circumnavigation  trip  of  the  frigate  La  Venus. 

Convinced  by  the  reading  of  all  those  documents  of  the  importance 
of  the  work  you  have  intrusted  me  with,  I  set  myself  to  study  the 
place,  to  gather  all  the  trustworthy  information  of  which  I  am  capable. 

I  have  seen  many  things  myself.  I  have  taken  great  pains,  but  I 
do  not  regret  it  if  the  result  of  my  investigation  and  my  observations 
which  I  shall  have  the  honor  of  presenting  to  you.  may  help  you  to 
clearly  inform  the  Government  of  the  King  on  the  question  he  has 
asked  you. 

Before  going  any  further  and  before  starting  my  narrative,  I  think 
it  is  useful  to  mention  the  different  names  under  which  several  of  the 
Galapagos  Islands  are  known,  because  this  multiplicity  of  names 
may  bring  errors  or  at  least  throw  some  incertitude  on  the  informa- 
tion and  descriptions  given  by  different  travelers  who  have  visited  the 
islands  and  who  finding  them  uninhabited  they  all  thought  they  had 
the  right  to  baptize  them.  .  .  . 

Called  the  Enchanted  Islands  by  those  who  discovered  them,  the 
Galapagos  Islands  have  since  then  received  their  present  name  which 
is  more  appropriate  because  it  owes  its  derivation  to  the  immense 
population  of  turtles  found  there. 

The  island  of  Santa  Maria  de  la  Aguada  is  indicated  on  Capt. 
Fitz-Roy's  map  under  the  name  of  Charles  and  since  then  has  re- 
ceived from  Mr.  Villamil  that  of  Mercedes,  the  name  of  General 
Flores'  wife. 


90  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

The  next  island  has  five  names:  James,  Norfolk,  Porter  (name 
of  the  American  Commodore  who  visited  it),  Indefatigable  (on  the 
English  maps),  and  at  last  baptized  by  Mr.  Villamil,  Bolivia,  in  honor 
of  General  Bolivar  under  whom  he  served. 

James  Island  on  the  English  map.  formerly  called  Santiago,  which 
was  simply  the  translation  of  the  English  name,  has  received  from 
Mr.  "Villamil  the  name  of  Olmedo. 

All  the  other  islands,  less  visited,  have  kept  up  to  now  the  names 
as  given  on  the  English  map.  I  shall  preferably  use  the  names  given 
by  Mr.  Villamil,  for  it  seems  natural  and  fair  to  me  that  one  should 
let  everyone  baptize  his  or  her  own  land. 

Navigation  — ■  Hydrography 

On  August  7  last  after  losing  sight  of  your  flag,  I  followed  La- 
BriUante  for  24  hours  during  which  Le  Genie  constantly  had  a  de- 
cided advantage  of  speed;  then,  realizing  that  the  route  of  La  Bril- 
lante  was  taking  me  too  far  away  from  my  own  route,  I  signaled 
free  course  and  I  proceeded  directly  toward  the  Galapagos  in  sight 
of  which,  pushed  forward  by  a  gentle  breeze  varying  from  S.  to  S.E., 
I  arrived  on  the  14th  at  dawn. 

During  this  short  voyage  the  sky  was  always  cloudy  or  at  least 
stormy;  but  nevertheless  the  weather  looked  to  me  so  steady  that  I 
did  not  order  the  top  gallant  and  royals  down  from  the  masts. 

Notwithstanding  that  on  the  14th,  being  near  land  and  having 
seen  Hood  Island  since  dawn,  I  could  not  start  before  nine  o'clock 
in  the  morning,  at  which  time  the  very  thick  fog  that  covered  the 
island  disappeared,  thus  enabling  us  to  distinguish  the  coast.  Then 
I  made  for  Mercedes  Island  in  order  to  start  my  exploration  by  veri- 
fying as  especially  requested  by  the  Minister,  the  assertion  published 
in  the  Ecuadorian  Gazette  that  there  was  a  closed  bay  in  that  island 
which  was  accessible  to  vessels  of  any  size. 

After  cruising  very  near  the  coast  from  point  S.  down  to  point  W., 
in  other  words,  that  portion  facing  S.S.W..  and  thus  ascertaining 
myself  that  there  was  no  port  on  that  coast,  I  weathered  the  point 
W.  and  almost  immediately  I  saw  two  vessels  anchored.  One,  an  Amer- 
ican whaler,  was  very  close  to  shore;  the  other,  a  small  schooner 
flying  the  Ecuadorian  flag,  was  anchored  way  back  in  a  small  cove, 
facing  three  or  four  huts  one  of  which  was  also  flying  the  Euca- 
dorian  flag. 

The  shape  and  the  position  of  the  cove  and  the  existence  of  break- 
ers between  the  schooner  and  my  ship  answered  quite  well  the  de- 
scription given  by  Mr.  Villamil,  consequently  I  assumed  that  that 
anchorage,  notwithstanding  its  poor  appearance,  must  be  the  Porto 
Cabello  so  much  boasted  about,  and  so  I  maneuvered  toward  anchoring. 

However,  in  oi'der  to  be  more  certain,  I  sent  a  boat  to  gather  in- 
formation while  by  means  of  another  boat  I  ordered  some  soundings 
at  the  entrance. 

Shortly  after,  when  I  was  in  the  channel,  my  first  boat  returned 
from    shore   bringing   a    certain    Guillermo    Guerney,    English    born 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  91 

established  at  the  island  for  several  years.  He  cleared  all  doubts 
and  offered  to  serve  as  a  pilot.   I  accepted. 

After  a  few  rounds  so  short  that  several  times  I  was  compelled  to 
tack  about,  even  before  being  able  to  trim  sails,  IjC  Genie  anchored 
at  the  center  of  the  cove,  twelve  meters  deep,  white  sand  bottom. 

Porto  Cabello  is  that  small  cove  very  plainly  indicated  at  the  point 
W.  of  the  island  on  Capt.  Pitz-Roy's  map.  It  has  been  known  for  quite 
some  time  under  the  name  of  Bahia  de  los  Servida,  in  English  Wreck 
Bay;  on  the  map  of  La  Venus  it  is  even  indicated  under  the  name 
Baie  du  Nanfrage,  but  it  is  poorly  placed. 

During  the  first  two  days  of  my  stay  at  Porto  Cabello,  the  fresh 
winds  were  blowing,  and  although  they  came  from  inland,  the  sea 
rounding  the  point  would  come  rolling  with  force  on  the  banks  and 
then  enter  the  bay  as  a  well  rounded  surf  breaking  with  force  on  the 
shore.  There  was,  however,  no  danger  for  the  vessel  as  the  bottom  was 
good  and  the  surf  was  on  the  edge.  But  communications  were  difficult, 
even  on  the  fine  sand  beach  at  the  back  of  the  bay.  The  rest  of  the 
time,  the  sea  has  been  calm  and  it  seems  that  it  is  always  more  or 
less  the  same. 

One  way  or  the  other,  Porto  Cabello  is  not  a  port  and  the  name 
Wreck  Bay  fits  better  this  cove  which,  in  reality  is  just  good  for  small 
coasting  vessels.  The  haven,  when  one  is  able  to  anchor,  is  hardly 
three  cables  wide  by  four  cables  long  and  in  order  to  arrive  there, 
one  has  to  sail  with  the  wind  into  a  passage  one  third  of  a  mile  wide, 
the  only  one  known,  or  against  the  wind  between  the  banks  full  of 
sharp  edges  in  a  channel  one  cable  length  wide  which  we  have  dis- 
covered. The  Minister's  special  recommendation  has  made  me  decide 
to  sacrifice  one  week  in  order  to  draw  a  good  map  of  Porto  Cabello, 
which  better  than  any  description  will  show  you  what  in  reality  that 
anchorage  is. 

The  nearness  of  the  watering  place,  an  advantage  indicated  by 
M.  Villamil  in  favor  of  Wreck  Bay,  is  almost  illusory,  for  although 
it  is  some  ten  miles  distant  it  is  often  quite  difficult  to  reach  it  on 
account  of  the  winds  and  currents  which  almost  at  all  times  are 
against  you;  my  launch  which  had  started  one  morning  at  four 
o'clock  returned  at  sunset  without  having  been  able  to  round  a  first 
point  only  two  or  three  miles  distant.  A  second  time,  the  launch 
started  at  three  o'clock  in  the  morning  with  a  native  as  a  pilot;  it 
arrived  at  the  watering  place  at  five  o'clock  in  the  afternoon.  Being 
that  late  and  because  of  the  condition  of  the  sea,  the  launch  had  to 
return  without  water. 

Quite  worried  about  the  water  question,  I  ordered  the  digging  of 
a  well  at  some  sixty  meters  from  the  seashore  at  a  low  spot.  I 
promptly  found  some  water,  but  it  was  so  terribly  salty  that  it  was 
practically  like  seawater.  A  little  further  away  from  the  seashore 
it  might  have  been  fresh,  but  it  would  have  been  necessary  to  dig  a 
much  deeper  hole  and  it  could  not  be  done  and  I  preferred  to  go  my- 
self with  the  brig  to  get  the  element  at  the  watering  place  of  Fresh- 
Water. 


92  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Pap;:rs 

If  this  island  were  inhabited,  it  would  be  easy  to  bring  water 
to  the  seashore  because  there  is  plenty  of  it  in  the  upper  region  and 
not  very  far  away,  at  only  a  few  miles  distance,  but  if  one  would 
undertake  that  work,  it  would  be  much  better  to  bring  the  water 
to  Stephens  Bay,  which  is  a  good  and  spacious  anchorage,  than  to 
bring  it  to  Wreck  Bay. 

August  22,  at  dawn,  the  map  being  finished,  I  set  sail  and  before 
going  to  visit  the  other  islands  I  made  for  the  watering  place  cove 
in  order  to  survey  it  and  complete  my  water  provision.  With  only 
ten  miles  to  go,  I  figured  to  drop  anchor  at  8  or  9  o'clock  in  the 
morning,  load  water  during  the  day.  and  leave  in  the  evening,  but 
it  was  not  so;  and  although  the  breeze  was  good.  I  came  to  back  about 
the  reef  that  I  had  left  in  the  morning;  the  whaler  which  I  mentioned 
above  and  which  had  left  the  day  before  appeared  a  little  afterwards 
at  a  good  distance  under  the  wind.  There  was  an  adverse  current  of 
from  2  to  3  knots. 

Then  I  tried  to  tack  very  close  to  land  and  it  was  all  right,  but. 
during  the  night  prudence  not  allowing  me  to  remain  at  such  short 
distance,  I  got  away  and  the  next  day  I  anchored  at  the  point  that 
is  half  way.  although  the  bottom  at  that  spot  facing  squarely  the 
coast  is  quite  bad,  but  I  had  to  do  it  in  order  to  avoid  being  swept 
away  as  the  wind  had  slacked  considerably. 

Very  near  the  watering  place,  I  sent  my  launch  which,  this  time, 
brought  me  a  good  load  of  water  returning  to  get  some  more;  but 
during  that  time  I  had  made  an  important  discovery.  All  along  the 
coast  the  current  changes  with  the  tide.  The  next  day.  the  24th,  early 
in  the  morning  I  took  advantage  of  a  favorable  current  and  reached 
the  anchorage  at  the  watering  place. 

This  bay  of  the  watering  place  or  Fresh  Water  is  entirely  open  to 
the  predominant  winds;  the  bottom  is  large  and  deep  near  the 
coast.   I  think  it  is  a  safe  anchorage  for  the  greatest  part  of  the  year. 

That  part  of  the  coast  that  forms  this  bay  is  much  greener  than 
the  one  under  the  wind;  each  little  ravine  has  its  more  or  less  abun- 
dant stream,  the  one  which  is  easier  to  reach  and  where  one  gets  the 
water  cannot  be  seen  from  the  sea;  the  ravine  is  very  deep.  A  long 
while  l)efore  reaching  the  shore,  the  water  runs  horizontally  and  even 
forms  a  sort  of  small  pond  which  is  separated  from  the  sea  by  a  bar  of 
rocks  through  which  the  excess  of  water  flows.  There  is  a  little  bridge 
for  the  boats  which  is  very  clearly  indicated  on  the  English  Map  and 
which  could  be  made  safe  and  serviceable  with  little  work. 

Further  to  the  East  there  is  a  waterfall;  it  is  a  stream  that 
reaches  the  coast  at  a  point  where  tlie  cliff  allows  it  to  drop  some 
ten  or  twelve  meters  in  two  gushes  each  representing  four  or  five 
inches  of  water. 

Here,  as  at  my  preceding  anchorage,  the  currents  changed  with  the 
tide  and  thereafter  I  had  the  occasion  to  make  the  same  observation 
everywhere. 

August  25th,  with  our  tanks  full,  I  set  sail  at  8  o'clock  in  the  morn- 
ing heading  for  Flori:ina.  On  our  way  I  had  the  Mac  Gowen  reef  sur- 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  93 

veyed  near  which  we  were  at  noon,  time  for  the  observation  of  the 
latitude. 

I  have  clearly  seen  and  recognized  the  two  heads  of  i-ock  that  are 
marked  on  the  English  Map:  we  passed  them  at  about  two  cable 
lengths  at  the  very  most.  Their  latitude  is  correct  as  well  as  the 
survey  and  bearings  taken  from  this  point  on  Harrington  Island.  These 
rocks  are  almost  level  with  the  surface  of  the  watei',  the  one  to  the 
west  is,  however,  less  submerged  than  the  other.  They  are  not  danger- 
ous during  the  day,  for  they  are  clearly  evident,  but  at  night  they  are, 
as  the  currents  are  neither  adequately  known  nor  sufficiently  regular 
to  l)e  accurately  predicted. 

Leaving  l)ehind  me  the  Mac  Gowen  reef,  I  soon  arrived  in  the  midst 
of  the  islets  which  encircle  Floriana,  and  after  having  passed,  as  close 
as  possi))le,  Watson  Islet  (or  Enderby),  which  is  shaped  like  a  sugar 
loaf  completely  perpendicular,  then  in  the  very  narrow  channel 
formed  at  the  point  North  of  Floriana  Island  by  this  same  point  and  a 
little  islet.  I  came,  rounding  the  inner  bank,  to  anchor  in  the  bight  of 
Saline  Bay  (way  inside  of  the  bay)  near  the  West  coast,  ten  fathoms, 
white  sand  bottom. 

Post  or  Saline  Bay  is  a  good  anchorage;  there,  one  is  well  sheltered 
from  the  reigning  winds  but  the  bay  has  no  watering  place  and  not- 
withstanding what  the  inhabitants  say,  I  do  not  think  it  is  possible  to 
bring  water  to  the  place,  for  there  is  not  adequate  water  in  the  in- 
terior of  the  island  where  one  will  only  find  springs  that  do  not  even 
give  birth  to  the  slightest  brooklet. 

Floriana  Island  being  the  only  island  that  has  really  been  ex- 
plored by  Admiral  Dupetit-Thouars,  while  on  board  La  Venus,  I 
would  not  have  to  study  if  it  had  not  been  because  I  noticed  consider- 
able discrepancies  in  the  shape  and  especially  in  the  orientation  given 
this  island  by  Capt.  Fitz-Roy  on  one  side  and  M.  de  Tessan  on  the 
other. 

After  having  ordered  many  surveys  regarding  points  and  islets 
and  also  some  azimuths  in  Saline  Bay,  I  realized  that  the  map  made 
in  1838  by  M.  de  Tessan  was  better  oriented  and  that  on  the  Eng- 
lish map  the  position  of  the  island  was  affected  by  an  error  almost 
equal  to  variation.  It  seems  that  it  was  observed  by  compass  and 
that  they  forgot  to  correct  the  variation,  for,  turning  the  island 
around  on  itself  nine  degrees  toward  the  East,  Saline  Bay  is  well 
oriented  and  all  point  positions  come  close  to  those  given  in  M.  de 
Tessan's  map. 

As  to  the  drawing  and  various  details  regarding  the  coast,  the 
English  map  is  far  superior  to  M.  de  Tessan's  plan.  One  can  tell  that 
Capt.  Fitz-Roy  saw  everything,  and  quite  closely,  while  M.  de  Tessan 
just  went  by. 

The  opinion  I  have  just  given  is  the  result  of  an  exploration  by 
launch  by  my  assistant  M.  Forget,  from  Saline  Bay  to  Gardner  Islet 
from  the  south,  and  by  me  from  the  same  Bay  to  the  east  point  where 
there  is  a  small  cove  at  the  entrance  of  the  ravine  formed  by  the  Las 
Cuevas  Mountains,  whei-e,  according  to  the  natives,  some  buccaneers 


94  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

had  established  themselves  in  natural  grottos  that  one  still  sees  but 
that  to  me  look  too  small  for  the  purpose  mentioned  above. 

On  August  30th,  having  nothing  else  to  do  at  Floriana.  I  left  at 
six  o'clock  in  the  evening  and  I  ordered  the  course  to  be  set  so  that 
next  morning,  at  dawn,  we  would  be  facing  the  south  coast  of  All)e- 
marle.  I  had  not  yet  decided  which  side  I  would  visit  first.  I  was  in- 
clined to  start  with  the  eastern  portion  which  would  allow  me  to  take 
some  bearings  regarding  Bolivia  and  Olmedo  islands  and  then  to  round 
the  north  point  of  Albemarle  in  order  to  return  under  the  wind.  This 
last  part  seemed  to  be  rather  difficult  to  perform  in  that  narrow  chan- 
nel separating  Narborough  from  Albemarle  where  the  English  map 
indicates  a  reverse  and  steady  current  of  one  and  a  half  miles  per 
hour.  Undecided,  I  left  it  to  fate  to  choose  and  on  the  31st,  at  dawn, 
the  winds  being  a  little  more  east  than  usual,  and  the  current  having 
dragged  me  a  little  more  west  of  Cape  Rose,  I  cast  off  to  round  the 
island  by  the  West. 

After  passing  Essex  Point,  I  entered  the  Bay  of  Diguanal  which  is 
a  detestable  anchorage.  The  coast,  at  this  point,  is  very  high,  but  arriv- 
ing at,  and  after  passing  that  point,  the  coast  is  very  low. 

Once  arrived  at  Christopher  Point,  an  immense  plain  covered 
with  small  volcanic  cones  and  lava  unfolded  to  my  eyes.  It  was  so 
odd  that  I  decided  to  stop  in  order  to  have  it  surveyed.  While  my 
launch  was  at  the  shore,  I  continued  along  the  coast,  always  at  a 
few  cable  lengths  so  as  to  see  every  detail.  This  navigation,  more- 
over, did  not  offer  any  danger,  all  winds  coming  from  shore,  but  the 
coast,  although  very  low,  falls  away  so  abruptly  that  one  cannot  an- 
chor even  only  a  cable  length  from  shore.  Night  drawing  near,  I 
stopped  to  wait  for  my  launch.  I  had  at  that  time  reached  the  last 
point  preceding  Elizabeth  Bay. 

Next  day  at  dawn,  to  my  great  astonishment,  winds  became  north- 
ern and  remained  so  until  eleven  o'clock  at  which  time,  changing  to 
south,  they  allowed  me  to  head  toward  Tagus  Cove  where  I  wanted 
to  anchor.  As  I  arrived  at  the  entrance  of  the  channel,  I  had  again 
'  some  north  winds  and  behind  me  I  could  see  the  demarcation  line 
of  the  south  wind.  Consequently  I  had  to  maneuver,  and  as  the  breeze 
was  weak,  I  kept  close  to  the  coast  of  Albemarle,  fearing  being  car- 
ried away  beyond  my  anchorage  by  currents  that  I  judged  strong. 
This  precaution  was  completely  useless,  for  it  was  not  long  before  the 
current  changed,  and  from  that  time  on,  having  sea  and  wind  against 
me,  I  did  not  gain  any  and  tacked  until  midnight  without  being  able 
to  reach  the  Tagus  anchorage  to  which  I  had  sent  a  launch  with  a  lan- 
tern in  order  to  be  able  to  locate  the  entrance  which  was  difficult  to 
find  because  of  the  obscurity  of  the  bight  and  the  confusing  highlands 
which  form  this  little  haven. 

After  midnight,  the  breeze  ceased  completely.  I  had  my  launches 
pull  me  and  thus  I  was  able  to  come  quite  close  to  the  coast,  a  little 
south  of  the  port  so  as  to  anchor  about  a  cable  length  from  shore. 


I  Iguana  Cove. 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  9S 

As  soon  as  I  anchored,  the  current  reversed  again,  but  as  we  all 
needed  rest,  we  all  went  to  bed  and  the  next  morning;,  wind  and  sea 
l>eing  favorable,  I  entered  easily  and  dropped  anchor  in  the  middle  of 
Tagus  haven. 

The  map  of  Tagus  given  by  Capt.  Fitz-Roy  is  remarkably  exact 
even  in  its  smallest  details.  In  this  haven,  the  sea  is  perfectly  calm; 
one  could  careen  there  and  it  is,  properly  speaking,  the  only  port 
that  exists  in  the  island.  But  it  is  very  small,  inlaid  between  moun- 
tains so  high  and  so  steep  that  one  cannot  land  except  at  the  mouth  of 
a  stream  which  is  exactly  at  the  end  of  it  and  to  the  right. 

The  small  salty  lake  indicated  on  the  map  is  extremely  I'emark- 
able.  It  has  a  circular  shape  and  is  the  bottom  of  an  immense  crater, 
the  edges  being  so  steep  that  it  is  very  difficult  to  reach  the  water. 
However,  by  means  of  ropes  I  let  a  bore  go  down  to  sound  it.  One 
found  four  fathoms  at  a  short  distance  from  the  edges  and  five  and 
a  half  in  the  center.  Its  largest  diameter  is  380  m.  and  the  smallest 
350  m.  If  one  could  cut  the  ridge  that  separates  it  from  the  port,  it 
would  make  a  very  beautiful  dock,  but  the  job  would  be  consid- 
erable, because  this  portion,  although  narrow  and  the  lowest  one,  is 
still  some  fifty  or  sixty  meters  high. 

Tagus  is  like  the  anchorages  at  Floriana  and  Mercedes;  it  has 
absolutely  no  water.  There  are,  however,  at  the  Eastern  point  of  the 
entrance,  toward  the  South,  two  places  where  a  few  drops  of  water 
ooze  through  the  rock,  but  one  would  have  great  pain  trying  to  col- 
lect a  few  liters  per  day  and,  still,  this  water  is  not  so  fresh  not- 
withstanding it  comes  from  a  point  higher  than  the  sea  level. 

The  North  Coast  south  of  the  heights  in  the  middle  of  which  Tagus 
is  wedged,  is  very  low  and  offers  the  same  aspect  as  the  Point  Christo- 
pher region:  small  craters  of  lava  scattered  in  all  directions.  The  Coast 
of  Narborough  forming  the  other  side  of  the  channel  is  possibly  still 
lower  and,  remarkably,  one  cannot  touch  bottom  near  the  lower  por- 
tions while  one  can  anchor  on  both  sides  of  the  entrance  of  Tagus  all 
along  the  high  and  steep  ones.  The  same  applies  to  the  anchorage  at 
Iguana  at  the  point  West  of  Albemarle  and  to  other  regions  of  these 
islands. 

During  my  stay  at  Tagus  Cove  the  north  and  south  winds  would 
alternate:  in  the  morning  the  south  wind  would  blow  and  the  north 
wind  in  the  evening.    Currents  would  also  follow  the  tide. 

These  observations  have  led  me  to  realize  that  it  is  equally  easy 
to  head  toward  either  Cape  Berkeley  or  Point  Christopher  and,  re- 
gretting that  I  did  not  start  from  the  east,  I  was  forced  to  come  back 
in  order  to  explore  the  S.  E.  Coast  of  Albemarle  which  had  been 
described  to  me  as  the  only  one  having  any  importance  because  of 
its  fertility,  but  at  the  same  time  as  a  dangerous  and  almost  inac- 
cessible coast. 

As  I  came  to  that  decision  I  set  sail  on  Sept.  3  at  4  o'clock  in  the 
afternoon,  and  with  the  aid  of  a  little  breeze  N.  N.  W.  I  left  the  chan- 
nel shortly  after  the  wind  changed  to  W.  S.  W.  and  continued  to 
change ;  but  the  currents  being  less  felt  in  the  gulf  formed  by  the  Albe- 
marle and  Narborough  islands,  I  arrived  very  easily  at  Christopher 


96  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papkrs 

Point  where  I  found  with  the  regular  winds  all  the  difficulties  that  I 
had  encountered  when  I  went  up  the  bay  to  the  watering  place  at  Mer- 
cedes: the  winds  increased  during  the  day,  and  keeping  very  close  to 
the  coast  I  hung  out  with  difficulty  during  the  night,  and  there  re- 
mained belore  me  two  days  of  painful  tacking  to  round  Cape  Rose, 
that  is  to  say  to  make  ten  miles  in  the  face  of  the  wind. 

After  rounding  Cape  Rose  without  bothering  about  the  reputation 
of  the  windy  coast  of  Albemarle  as  depicted  to  me.  and  fully  trusting 
Capt.  Fitz-Roy's  map.  I  followed  the  entire  E.S.E.  coast  of  this  island  at 
a  distance  of  one  mile  and  often  less,  going  into  every  bight  and  sur- 
veying every  rock  and  at  night  I  came  out  between  the  Crossman 
Islands  near  which  I  stayed  until  next  day. 

The  rocks  marked  in  the  E.  \i  N.  E.  of  Cape  Rose  and  north  of 
Bi'attle  Island  are  steep  and  above  water.  Brattle  Island  and  Cross- 
man  Islands  seem  to  be  old  craters;  they  are  steep  also.  The  coast 
of  Albemarle  is  low  and  good,  although  the  sea  breaks  in  with  force. 
Only  the  points  might  be  dangerous,  especially  at  night,  for  they  are 
so  low  that  quite  often  one  will  see  the  breakers  before  seeing  land. 
For  this  reason  one  might  conclude  that  the  reefs  are  quite  distant 
from  shore  if,  following  his  first  impression  he  would  get  away  too 
soon.  Summing  up  I  may  affirm  that  over  the  entire  distance  I  have 
travelled  there  is  nothing  that  resembles  a  port. 

On  the  7th  of  September  at  dawn  I  left  the  coast  of  Albemarle 
coming  over  to  the  coast  of  Bolivia.  I  passed  very  near  Nameless 
Islet  which  is  quite  high  and  steep. 

Heading  then  toward  the  coast  in  order  to  navigate  closely  along 
it,  I  saw  two  or  three  huts  at  the  foot  of  a  knoll  marked  on  the  map 
in  the  middle  of  the  western  portion  of  the  island  facing  Duncan  Is- 
land, and  a  three-masted  American  whaler  that  was  anchored  very 
near  the  coast  in  front  of  the  huts.  When  I  came  near  the  whaler,  I 
sent  a  launch  to  gather  information  and  thus  I  learnt  that  at  that 
place  only  there  was  a  path  leading  to  the  interior  of  the  island.  I 
dropped  anchor  near  the  whaler,  ten  fathoms  depth  and  about  }-j  mile 
from  shore. 

At  that  spot,  which  is  not  sufficiently  far  out  leeward  from  the 
island,  the  sea  is  agitated  without  being  rough,  but  from  that  point 
on  one  can  anchor  most  anywhere.  Conway  Bay  is  three  miles  distant 
in  the  N.  N.  E.  This  bay  is  not  the  best  anchorage.  One  is  beyond 
there. 

There  is  no  water  near  the  coast  and  the  few  individuals  who 
live  at  the  seashore  are  compelled  to  go  ten  or  twelve  miles  in  the 
interior  to  fetch  some  from  where  it  is  very  abundant.  If  the  island 
should  become  important,  one  should  bring  water  to  the  main  anchor- 
age which  is  also  the  one  nearest  to  the  spring  and  the  fertile  portion 
of  the  island :  but  this  was  unknown  to  the  first  settlers  who  today  still 
remain  at  that  place  because  of  their  huts  and  the  path  which  they 
use  for  the  exploration  of  the  interior. 

General  Mena,  who  came  from  Mercedes  to  Bolivia  for  the  ex- 
ploitation of  turtle  oil.  had  indicated  to  me  a  certain  spot  near  the  sea 
where  he  though  that  by  digging  deep  enough  I  would  certainly  obtain 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS 

some  water.  I  decided  to  try  the  experiment,  but  after  having  drilled  a 
layer  of  vegetal  soil,  rather  clayish,  of  some  60  cm.  thickness  we  found 
such  a  hard  rock  that  because  of  lack  of  tools  and  time  we  were  com- 
pelled to  give  up  our  attempt. 

At  last,  on  September  11th,  l^ack  from  my  exploration  in  the  in- 
terior, I  set  sail  leaving  for  the  bay  indicated  on  the  map,  within 
Cape  Barrington  of  Albemarle  Island  and  in  which  Capt.  P"'itz-Roy 
does  not  seem  to  have  entered,  for  he  does  not  give  any  soundings 
besides  those  marked  at  the  point  of  the  entrance. 

After  rounding  Cape  Barrington  at  a  good  distance  in  order  to 
avoid  the  reef  and  the  white  shoals  around  it,  I  retui'ned  toward  the 
south,  but  the  bottom  having  promptly  jumped  from  15  to  10  fathoms, 
I  anchored  in  order  to  take  soundings  by  means  of  launches  before 
proceeding  any  further. 

At  four  o'clock  in  the  afternoon  my  launches  returned  reporting 
that  they  had  found  ten  fathoms  everywhere  even  to  the  water  edge. 
The  sea  was  perfectly  smooth  and  I  was  surrounded  by  land  on  all 
sides.  Everything  was  telling  me  that  at  this  spot  we  had  the  best  and 
even  the  only  road  in  the  islands  and  I  was  therefore  unable  to  under- 
stand why  Capt.  Fitz-Roy  had  ignored  it.  I  decided  to  stop  to,  at  least, 
make  a  good  sketch  of  it  and  in  order  to  make  the  job  easier,  I  dropped 
anchor  at  -^  mile  from  the  coast  way  inside  Cape  Barrington. 

M.  E.  Cellos,  aided  by  Messrs.  Jamin  and  Meynard,  made  the 
map  that  I  enclose  together  with  this  report,  it  is  as  accurate  as  the 
little  time  that  was  possible  to  give  to  the  work  has  permitted. 

Hydrographical  work  has  confirmed  my  first  impression.  The  bay 
I  have  been  speaking  about  is  a  quite  beautiful  road  sheltered  from 
all  the  winds  that  blow  with  a  certain  force.  Its  entrance  at  the  point 
where  I  am  anchored  was  only  75  degrees  and  in  the  middle  of  it  01- 
medo  Island  is  situated.  The  bottom,  however,  is  not  very  good,  for 
although  the  sounding  lead  often  indicates  presence  of  sand,  I  am  in- 
clined to  believe  that  the  real  bottom  is  lava  covered  by  a  thin  layer 
of  sand,  because,  when  my  anchor  came  up  without  the  stock,  I  saw 
on  the  flukes  some  striped  marks  indicating  the  presence  of  a  hard 
bottom. 

The  coastline  is  covered  with  mangroves  and  very  high  trees  un- 
known to  me.  This  gives  the  coast  a  very  romantic  aspect,  but  as  soon 
as  one  sets  foot  on  shore  the  illusion  is  of  short  duration.  Beyond  the 
rather  thin  border  one  finds  an  immense  plain  of  lava  and  scoria. 

All  along  the  coast,  one  finds  small  ponds  covered  with  teal,  and 
in  the  interior  one  finds  everywhere  traces  of  water;  in  the  crevices 
one  finds  the  kind  of  plant  that  grows  in  the  bottom  of  wells,  all  of 
which  proves  a  great  humidity  and  the  presence  during  a  large  part 
of  the  year  of  reservoirs  of  fresh  water. 

The  water  of  the  salty  ponds  near  the  sea  becomes  briny  and  then 
almost  fresh  at  a  short  distance  from  shore,  beyond  where  there  is 
no  more  water  to  be  found.  This,  added  to  what  I  said  before,  makes 
one  believe  that  digging  further,  away  from  the  sea,  one  would  find 
fresh  water  and  in  abundance. 


98  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

The  less  briny  water  that  we  found,  cooks  vegetables  well  and  is 
drinkable.  But  it  is  not  agreeable  and  in  reality  it  is  not  fresh  enough 
to  be  considered  for  drinking  purposes. 

When  I  left,  I  went  around  the  road  on  the  side  of  the  isthmus  and 
I  found  the  bottom  very  even.  It  is  a  little  larger  here  than  at  the 
point  where  I  anchored. 

So  after  navigating  for  some  time  and  for  the  last  time  a  portion 
of  the  coast  of  Albemarle,  I  turned  to  starboard  and  headed  toward 
Cape  Nepeau  of  Olmedo  Island  which  I  sounded  very  closely  as  far  as 
James  Bay  where  I  dropped  anchor  by  8  fathoms  deep,  white  sand 
bottom  fringing  a  sand  beach  and  lagoons  indicated  on  the  map. 

After  dropping  anchor,  I  went  to  visit  the  watering  place  indi- 
cated on  Capt.  Fitz-Roy's  map  and  I  found  it  as  described.  Nothing 
escaped  the  perspicacity  of  this  conscientious  observer:  the  smallest 
holes,  the  smallest  details  are  all  indicated  with  really  astonishing 
precision  and  following  his  drawing  one  can  visualize  in  the  most 
accurate  manner  the  shape  of  the  coast.  Coming  after  him.  there  is 
not  even  an  opportunity  to  glean;  consequently  as  to  hydrography 
I  am  not  reporting  anything  new  besides  the  map  of  the  road  of 
the  isthmus,  but  I  hope  to  be  able  to  inspire  such  confidence  in  the 
work  of  that  hydrographer  that  one  shall  be  convinced,  as  I  am  my- 
self, inspecting  his  map,  that  there  does  not  exist  anywhere  in  the 
Galapagos  Archipelago  a  port  that  really  deserves  that  name.  I 
assert  this  as  far  as  the  portion  that  I  have  visited  is  concerned,  com- 
prising more  than  one  third  of  the  total  length.  One  might  find  a  few 
holes  like  Wreck  Bay  between  Cape  Woodford  and  Cape  Barrington 
or  little  further  north,  or  maybe  also  on  the  south  coast  of  Bolivia; 
but  one  will  not  find  a  port  in  the  real  acceptation  of  the  word,  at  least 
I  think  so. 

The  watering  place  at  James  Bay  is  a  quite  beautiful  spring  of 
delicious  water  which  comes  from  a  sandstone  mountain,  just  close 
to  the  seashore.  Digging  a  reservoir  of  a  certain  capacity  large 
enough  to  receive  the  whole  amount  from  the  spring,  thei-e  would  be 
enough  water  to  supply  all  whalers  that  might  call  at  that  port,  even 
at  this  season  which  is  the  driest  of  the  year. 

Today  the  greater  pai't  of  the  water  is  lost  in  the  sea  and  one  can- 
not obtain  it  but  at  two  small  holes  dug  by  man's  hand.  One  of  these 
holes  contains  65  litres  and  the  other  7;  they  furnish  at  this  time 
of  the  year  1.200  litres  of  water  per  day.  Higher  up  in  the  ravine 
that  separates  the  two  sandstone  mountains  and  that  serves  as  bed 
to  a  stream  during  the  wet  season;  I  have  seen  another  small  spring 
at  over  sixty  meters  above  sea  level. 

Everywhere  in  the  mountain  which  is  very  steep  on  the  side  look- 
ing toward  the  sea  one  sees  traces  of  dried  up  springs  and  even 
some  wet  spots.  Everything  indicates  that  one  could  get  there  a  good 
watering  place.  The  only  thing  needed  would  be  a  little  work  with 
no  difficulties   to  surmount. 

Unable  now  to  prolong  my  stay  in  the  islands  without  going 
beyond  the  time  allowed  me  for  the  exploration,  and  besides  having 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:    THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  99 

visited  all  the  islands  that  because  of  their  size  or  fertility  had  any 
importance — the  others  being  mere  sterile  reefs,  I  left  James  Bay  on 
September  17  at  eight  o'clock  in  the  morning;  but  I  left  the  archi- 
pelago definitely  the  next  day  as  on  the  17th  I  was  engaged  surveying 
the  east  portions  of  Olmedo  and  Bolivia  islands. 

Now  that  I  have  reported  on  my  navigation  and  have  given  my 
opinion  on  the  degree  of  confidence  that  one  may  give  these  observa- 
tions, I  only  have  to  report  further  on  the  purely  nautical  part  of  my 
mission,  to  sum  up  what  I  said  regarding  hydrography  and  present  a 
few  general  considerations  on  seasons,  wind,  and  current. 

All  the  Galapagos  Islands  are  elevated  at  their  centers  and  may  be 
sighted  from  far  away  when  their  summits  are  not  engulfed  in  clouds 
as  they  are  most  of  the  time;  the  land  slopes  down  gently  toward  the 
seashore  where  it  forms  exceedingly  low  points  sometimes  almost  sub- 
merged. There  are,  however,  some  places  where  the  coast  is  high  and 
steep  and  usually  it  is  at  the  foot  of  these  elevated  portions  that  one 
finds  a  good  bottom  for  anchoring. 

The  seashore  is  not  treacherous  as  a  rule  and  one  can  run  very 
close  to  it  with  security  even  when  the  wind  is  blowing  and  the  sea 
is  breaking  with  force. 

Practically  all  the  hazards  are  evident;  the  huge  rocks  which  pro- 
ject to  various  elevations,  fall  away  abruptly  to  great  depths. 

There  is  no  closed  port  in  the  whole  archipelago,  but  under  the 
winds  from  the  islands  there  are  many  good  anchorages.  The  most 
beautiful  road  is  the  one  at  the  isthmus ;  there  one  finds  coves  where 
one  can  careen  very  well.  The  fear  inspired  by  the  windy  coast  of 
Albemarle  and  by  the  sand  bar  at  Cape  Barrington  has,  undoubtedly 
until  now,  kept  away  all  vessels,  for  we  have  not  found  there  on  land 
any  trace  indicating  the  passage  of  men,  while  everywhere  else  we 
have  seen  here  the  grave  of  an  American  captain,  there  some  cut 
trees,  someplace  else  ashes,  in  other  words  we  are  convinced  that 
others  before  us  have  visited  the  same  places. 

Finally,  Capt.  Fitz-Roy's  map  makes  the  navigation  of  the  archi- 
pelago easy  and  not  very  dangerous.  That  map  is.  as  a  matter  of  fact, 
remarkable  in  its  accuracy  of  the  relative  and  absolute  positions  of  the 
islands  and  perhaps  much  more  by  the  truthfulness  of  all  the  details 
that  have  not  escaped  his  minute  investigations,  and  if  one  notices 
here  and  there,  and  especially  at  Floriana,  some  slight  errors  re- 
garding the  situation  of  the  points,  it  is  undoubtedly  because  the 
details  were  made  by  compass.  Be  as  it  may  and  notwithstanding 
those  imperfections,  that  work  is  above  most  all  the  others  we  have 
in  our  possession,  and  comes  immediately  after  the  beautiful  maps 
of  M.  Beautemps-Beaupre. 

At  the  time  La  Yenus  called,  the  islands  had  been  inhabited  only 
for  a  little  time,  consequently  the  seasons  were  not  well  known  and 
undoubtedly  that  is  the  reason  for  the  error  into  which  Admiral  Du- 
petit  Thouars  fell.  The  Admiral  had  only  theoretical  considerations 
for  a  guide. 

Although  the  sun  passes  twice  at  the  zenith  at  intervals  almost 
equal,  there  are  not  however  two  summers  and  two  winters.  There 


100  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papkrs 

are  really  but  two  seasons  as  in  the  Antilles,  i.e.,  the  dry  season  of 
general  winds  and  the  rainy  season  with  stormy  and  quiet  periods. 

The  season  of  general  winds,  the  beautiful  season,  the  one  called 
summer,  begins  in  May  and  ends  in  December.  During  those  eight 
months,  winds  blow  steadily  from  S.  to  S.E.,  a  fine  wind.  "When  this 
meets  the  land  winds,  a  lot  of  clouds  are  produced,  and  the  summits  of 
the  islands  are  shrouded  in  clouds  and  vapors  that  produce  great 
humidity.  It  rains  there  during  a  great  part  of  the  day,  without  a 
single  drop  of  water  coming  to  refresh  the  dried  up  lands  of  the  sea- 
shore; only  during  the  months  of  July  and  August,  dew  is  more  abun- 
dant and  a  damp  fog  covers  the  land  until  ten  or  eleven  o'clock  in  the 
morning,  a  circumstance  very  annoying  to  navigators,  one  that  has 
inconvenienced  me  often.  The  month  of  October  is  the  driest  of  all ;  it 
is  then  that  the  lowest  small  ponds  dry  up  compelling  the  inhabitants 
to  go  a  few  more  miles  to  fetch  the  necessary  water  for  their  con- 
sumption. 

Winter,  that  is  the  hot  and  calm  season  with  variable  winds,  rains 
and  storms,  begins  in  December  extending  to  May  which  perfectly  cor- 
responds to  the  period  of  the  year  during  which  the  line  of  equatorial 
calm  advances  more  toward  the  south.  During  that  season,  winds 
blow  often  from  the  west  and  sometimes  from  the  north,  but  never  too 
strong  nor  for  a  long  time,  making  the  different  anchorages  of  which 
I  have  spoken  dangerous.  The  road  on  the  isthmus  is  also  at  that  time 
the  best;  abundant  rains  inundate  the  low  regions  of  the  islands, 
while  through  some  sort  of  compensation  the  summits  are  usually 
cleared  and  receive  in  total  less  water  than  in  the  other  season.  As  for 
the  plateaus,  winter  is  the  dry  season. 

I  have  given  all  the  imaginable  care  to  verify  those  facts.  I  did  not 
go  by  the  opinion  of  the  more  learned;  I  have  consulted  laborers  and 
other  men  of  the  people.  All  agreed  entirely  and  some  of  them  have 
lived  in  that  country  for  the  past  twelve  or  sixteen  years. 

Experience,  furthermore,  has  confirmed  my  assertions,  for  as  La 
Genie  was  at  the  islands  at  the  end  of  August  and  beginning  of  Sep- 
tember, we  should  have  experienced  calm  weather,  great  heat,  rains, 
in  one  word  the  beginning  of  one  of  the  two  winters.  But  such  was 
not  the  case.  To  the  contrary:  it  was  constantly  rather  cool  instead 
of  warm,  the  thermometer  did  not  go  above  22^  centigrade  and  the 
average  temperature  was  20.8°.  It  did  not  rain.  There  was  no  storm 
and  there  was  not  one  calm  day;  no  other  wind  blowing  from  a  dif- 
ferent direction  but  the  trade  winds. 

During  the  summer  the  currents  are  almost  steady  and  west- 
wardly  of  about  one  mile  per  hour.  During  the  other  season  they  are 
very  variable  and  even  eastwardly  at  times  and  very  violent.  Here 
is  an  example  that  endangered  the  life  of  the  most  important  inhabi- 
tant of  these  islands: 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  101 

General  Mena  who  liad  loft  Floriana  to  come  to  Mercedes  with 
several  laborers  and  a  woman  was  overtaken  by  night  in  mid  chan- 
nel. Counting  on  the  usual  direction  of  the  current  he  did  not  worry 
and  went  to  bed.  Next  morning  when  he  woke  up,  land  had  disap- 
peared and  they  had  for  food  only  cowhides  and  sky  water. 

Twenty-three  days  latei-,  their  frail  whale  boat,  half  sunk,  was 
picked  up  by  an  American  fisherman  200  miles  east  of  the  island.  They 
were  almost  dead.  I  would  think  it  difficult  to  understand  how  they 
were  able  to  exist  during  those  long  days.  The  incident  has  been  re- 
ported to  me  by  several  of  those  who  were  there. 

Wind  and  cui'rent  deviate  from  their  natural  directions  through 
the  islands  that  are  on  their  course,  to  produce  some  effects  that  I 
shall  Indicate  for  the  sake  of  navigation. 

Under  the  wind  of  the  large  islands,  one  finds  variable  winds  and 
even  north  breezes.  Within  the  angle  formed  by  the  two  portions  of 
Albemarle,  the  effect  is  quite  evident  and  considerably  aids  navi- 
gation. Currents  are  weak  and  variable  leeward  of  the  islands, 
where  they  acquire  a  velocity  of  two  and  three  miles  along  the 
coast  E.  S.  E.  and  W.  N.  W.  There,  with  the  regular  free  winds,  it 
is  very  diflScult  to  sail  to  the  wind  and  round  the  points  that  for- 
tunately are  not  long. 

Very  near  shore  currents  change  together  with  the  tide,  which  also 
makes  its  influence  felt  out  at  sea. 

During  part  of  the  summer  the  only  watering  place  where  one  can 
get  a  considerable  supply  of  water  is  at  Fresh  Water,  Mercedes 
Island.  With  little  work,  the  watering  place  at  Olmedo,  without  any 
particularly  abundant  volume,  could  supply  all  whalers  and  war  ves- 
sels of  medium  size. 

During  winter  one  finds  water  everywhere  and  I  am  convinced 
that,  several  months  after  that  season,  the  watering  place  at  Olmedo 
must  still  give  plenty  of  water. 

Finally:  One  finds  everywhere  with  extreme  easiness,  a  good 
supply  of  fire  wood  and  sand. 

VOYAGE  OF  THE  CORVETTE  DECREE 

On  the  eruise  of  the  French  corvette  Decres  to  the  Oalapagos 
Islands,  two  anchorages  were  plotted  by  Passed  Midshipman  Estienne. 
These  were  Wreck  Bay,  Chatham  Island,  and  Black  Beach  Roads, 
Charles  Island.  The  following-  rather  literal  translation  of  a  description 
of  Charles  Island  as  it  was  at  the  time  of  the  Decres'  visit  and  as  given 
by  the  commanding  officer  is  of  great  interest  to  later  visitors : 


102 


CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES 


[Oc.  Papers 


Fig.  17.  The  French  Navy  is  represented  in  the  Galapagos  surveys  by  the 
chart  of  Black  Beach  Roads,  Charles  Island,  made  in  1887  by  Passed  Midship- 
man M.  Estienne  of  the  corvette  Decres. 


Ts\^VY  DEPARTMENT 


Carton  81  -  No.  248 


Pacific  Ocean  Division:  1887 

EXTRACTS  FROM  A  REPORT  OF  THE  SEA 
by  the  Commander  of  the  DECRES 

From  Panama  to  Galapagos  ...... 

*  *  :i:  *  ^  * 

Saturday,  May  14th,  at  6  o'clock  in  the  morning  we  siglited 
Chatham. 

I  maneuvered  in  such  a  manner  as  to  be  able  to  pass  along  the  full 
length  of  its  coast  from  east  to  west.  I  have  not  been  able  to  discover 
any  trace  of  construction  of  a  lighthouse  at  the  N.  E.  point. 

The  Governor  of  the  island  told  me,  moveover,  that  none  would 
be  built  for  a  long  time.  Coming  near  Wreck  Point  I  got  near  shore, 
at  some  300  meters,  in  order  to  have  a  good  view  of  the  cove  where, 
according  to  instructions,  small  ships  enter.  I  anchored  facing  the 
beach,  when  the  men  taking  soundings,  and  who  up  to  that  time  did 
not  find  the  40  meters  bottom,  called  out  28  meters  bottom  (sand  and 
gravel ) . 

The  little  adjoining  sketch,  rapidly  made  by  Passed  Midshipman 
ESTIENNE,  will  show  you  the  place  of  anchorage  of  the  DECRES, 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  103 

the  shape  of  the  cove  (Puerto  Chico),  which,  besides,  is  very  well 
drawn  on  the  English  Map  No.  1375.  and  the  position  of  the  small 
lighthouse,  visible  at  5  miles,  which  has  been  erected  on  the  beach. 


Sunday  May  15,  at  11  o'clock  in  the  evening,  I  set  sail  for  Floriana 
Island.  This  island  was  more  interesting  to  visit,  because  a  portion  of 
its  territory  was  l)onght  quite  some  time  ago  by  a  Frenchman.  M.  Leon 
de  ITUBURU,  and  information  that  I  had  gathered  about  it  at  Guaya- 
quil had  made  me  suppose  that  the  island  was  in  full  exploitation. 
It  is  not  so. 

I  anchored  at  Black  Beach  May  16  at  11  o'clock  in  the  morning 
and  I  penetrated  toward  the  interior  of  the  island  up  to  a  point  where 
the  French  maps  show  a  village.  It  has  been  impossible  for  me  and 
for  the  officers  who,  on  their  own  accord,  have  travelled  through  the 
island,  to  discover  any  trace  of  habitation  in  the  area  previously  dedi- 
cated to  agriculture.  If  there  is  any  trace  left,  the  tall  grass  that  has 
invaded  the  plain  makes  it  impossible  for  us  to  see  it,  and  even  from 
the  highest  peaks  we  could  not  see  a  thing. 

The  north  side  of  Floriana  is  less  arid  than  that  of  Chatham,  and 
the  central  portion  looks  to  me  richer  and  more  fertile.  But  none  of  us 
has  found  cane  plantations  or  manioc  stalks.  To  make  up  for  it,  orange 
and  lemon  trees  grow  everywhere  on  the  plain  and  on  the  hills.  In  the 
S.  E.  portion  a  magnificent  hedge  of  lemon  trees  marks  the  boundary 
of  a  piece  of  land  some  500  meters  on  one  side,  where  only  one  certain 
plant  grows  (from  the  family  of  the  composite  flowers,  I  believe),  dis- 
regarded by  the  animals  that  now  live  in  the  island  in  the  wild  state. 
We  have  seen  a  large  number  of  donkeys  grazing  on  the  hill-slopes 
and  on  the  highest  summits;  often  they  would  come  in  small  groups 
of  six  or  eight  to  within  a  short  distance  of  us;  the  oxen,  on  the  other 
hand,  more  suspicious  and  timid,  would  run  away  at  full  speed;  also 
a  herd  of  pigs  was  sighted  near  a  pond  close  to  the  only  spring  we 
have  found  in  our  recent  excursions. 

That  spring  had  on  May  17th  a  flow  of  about  300  liters  per  hour. 
Will  it  have  the  same  quantity  all  the  year  'round?  The  aspect  and 
configuration  of  the  ground  makes  one  think  that  there  must  be  some 
others  on  the  island  and  that  it  is  not  the  lack  of  water  that  must 
have  brought  about  the  giving  up  of  a  many  year's  old  enterprise  still 
in  full  activity  in  1875  (see  instructions). 

Has  not  M.  VALDIZAN,  who  was  in  charge  of  the  concern  at  that 
date,  and  who  died  in  .July,  1878,  had  a  successor?  Is  the  ownership  of 
the  island  so  in  doubt,  or  has  its  exploitation  become  so  precarious, 
that  it  has  been  decided  to  discontinue  the  supervision — after  all  not 
essential — where  animals,  perfectly  free,  find  their  food  so  easily? 

Be  that  as  it  may,  the  island  of  Floriana  today  has  no  inhabitants; 
of  the  house  on  the  shore  there  is  nothing  left  but  two  beams  and  the 
top  girder,  but  at  200  meters  elevation  on  the  road  that  leads  to  the 
interior,  one  can  see  at  a  distance  the  house  that  undoubtedly  was 
used  during  the  last  years  of  Senor  VALDIZAN. 


104  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY   OP   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

It  is  a  log  hut  covered  with  sheet-iron,  the  sides  are  made  of  a 
double  layer  of  bamboo,  the  floor,  a  little  above  the  ground,  is  still 
in  good  condition;  there  is  a  beautiful  vine  on  the  east  side,  outside 
the  veranda,  of  which  one  still  sees  the  posts  and  the  baluster.  Fifty 
feet  away  the  grave  of  the  last  master  of  the  island  is  located.  It  is  sur- 
mounted by  a  black  cross,  and  on  one  of  the  sides  of  the  wooden  rail- 
ing that  encircles  it,  a  little  frame  is  hanging.  On  it  the  following 
funeral  inscription  is  engraved: 


Aqui         ^       Yacen 

los  venerables  restos  del 

Seiior  Jose  VALDIZAN 

G.8  P.  D. 

Fallecioel  23  de  Julio  1878 


[English.  Here — lie  the  venerable  remains  of  Mr.  Jose  Valdizan — 
May  he  rest  in  peace — He  died  July  23,  1878.] 

Near  this  tomb  there  is  another,  surmounted  by  a  cross,  on  which 
one  reads  these  words  only:    "P.  Posa." 

In  conclusion  I  think  I  should  add,  that  at  Chatham,  as  well  as  at 
Floriana,  there  are  no  dangerous  animals.  Moreover,  the  fauna  is  very 
poorly  represented.  One  sees  a  few  lizards  and  some  very  scarce 
centipedes,  two  or  three  kinds  of  birds  of  the  sparrow  family,  some 
red  ants,  and  very  few  mosquitoes. 


Information  given  me  at  Chatham  regarding  the  James  and  Inde- 
fatigable islands,  was  very  precise  and  I  had  to  visit  them.  They  are 
habitable  but  not  inhabited.  One  finds  water  there  and  land  turtles, 
Gahipagos  (of  which,  I,  myself,  have  not  been  able  to  see  a  single 
specimen).  The  nautical  instructions  confirmed,  however,  M.  COBOS' 
statements,  but  it  was  not  the  same  in  the  case  of  the  island  of  Albe- 
marle, which  I  circled  in  order  to  assure  myself  of  its  configuration 
and  its  structure,  and  also  in  order  to  see  the  Tagus  Cove,  indicated  as 
being  able  to  shelter  six  frigates.  (See  instruction  No.  528.) 

Point  "S,"  that  I  distinguished  at  dawn,  looks  to  me  quite  green 
and  not  very  much  wooded,  but  the  western  side  is  literally  deso- 
late. Everything  is  lava,  from  summit  to  seashore;  here  and  there 
there  are  small  sand  l)eaches  between  black  rocks  which  are  sur- 
mounted bv  a  few  stunted  trees. 


"["G":  This  might  have  been  an  error  of  the  typist  writing  the  French  copy,  or  of  the 
Commander  of  the  Decres.  It  should  be  an  "E"  (E.  P.  D.).  In  Spanish,  it  .stands  for  "En  Paz 
Descanes,"'  which  niean.s  "Rest  in  peace."] 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  105 

Narborough  presents  a  similar  aspect,  but  one  sees  better  than  on 
the  large  island,  its  neighbor,  traces  of  recent  eruptions.  The  N.  E. 
side  of  the  large  plateau  is,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  covered  with  torn 
craters,  some  open  on  the  side  toward  the  sea,  and  there  is  no  vege- 
tation to  be  seen  in  their  interior. 

Tagus  Cove  offers  an  excellent  anchorage  of  fine  black  sand.  It 
is  an  old  crater,  once  partially  submerged  under  the  sea  and  then 
raised  at  a  comparatively  recent  period,  judging  by  the  parallel 
marks  left  by  the  sea  on  its  edges.  A  salt  water  lagoon  of  great  depth 
is  located  at  a  certain  distance  from  the  back  of  the  bay,  but  I  have 
not  seen  any  sign  of  creek  or  brook.  The  soil  has  an  ashy  appearance 
and  does  not  seem  to  be  fertile,  and  an  establishment  near  Tagus  Cove 
would  be  in  great  need  of  (supplies)  brought  in  from  the  American 
continent,  or  from  either  Chatham  or  Floriana  islands. 


The  Captain  commanding  the  Decres 

Signed,  LA  GUERRE 

On  board  the  Duquesne,  Papeete,  July  1887, 

By  the  Rear-Admiral,  Commanding  in  Chief 

and  by  his  order. 

INHABITANTS 

Though  visitors  to  the  Galapagos  were  no  novelty,  for  many  years 
these  islands  were  without  permanent  inhabitants.  The  first  was  Pat- 
rick Watkins,  a  member  of  the  crew  of  a  British  ship  who  either 
requested  to  be  put  ashore  or  was  marooned  by  his  captain.  He  was 
evidently  a  resourceful  person  and  not  without  ambition,  as  it  took 
him  plenty  of  time  and  labor  to  make  a  bare  living  on  Charles  Island, 
which  he  chose  to  be  his  future  home.  Building  himself  a  hut  for 
shelter,  he  started  a  garden  where  he  grew  vegetables  to  sell  to  the 
numerous  whale  ships  that  visited  the  island  for  water  and  tortoises. 
To  show  how  numerous  these  vessels  were  in  the  early  days  (1832- 
1833),  in  a  period  of  about  a  year  thirty-one  stopped  at  Charles 
Island.  On  May  14,  1813,  Midshipman  Feltus,  of  the  frigate  Essex, 
visited  the  wreck  of  his  habitation  and  probably  got  information  con- 
cerning him  from  the  whalers.  He  mentions  in  his  diary  that  Watkins 
was  on  the  island  for  about  five  years  before  the  arrival  of  the  Essex, 
and  stayed  there  about  two  years  before  making  his  escape  in  a  whale- 
boat  he  stole  while  its  crew  were  inland  on  a  search  for  tortoises 
and  water.  This  would  date  tlie  first  permanent  resident  at  about 
1807.  After  the  departure  of  Watkins,  the  islands  remained  unin- 
liabited  until  General  Josr  Villamil,  a  native  of  Louisiana,  obtained  a 


106  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Or.  Papkrs 

concession  to  establish  a  colony  there.  This  he  had  in  mind  before  the 
war  with  Great  Britain  but  was  assured  that  the  Spanish  Government 
would  never  permit  it.  However,  when  Ecuador  gained  complete  in- 
dependence from  the  mother  country,  Villamil,  who  had  now  received 
the  title  of  general  for  his  services  in  the  war  for  liberation,  renewed 
his  liopes  of  founding  a  colony  in  the  Galapagos  and  obtained  permis- 
sion from  the  Government  of  Ecuador  to  promote  his  scheme. 

He  chose  Charles  Island  for  the  site  of  his  venture  and  in  January, 
1832,  Colonel  Hernandez  and  twelve  colonists  were  dispatched  to  the 
island.  They  were  followed  by  General  Villamil  with  additional  set- 
tlers toward  the  end  of  the  year.  The  colony  prospered,  supplying  the 
numerous  whale  ships  with  meat  and  vegetables  and  finally  grew  to 
a  population  of  some  two  hundred  fifty  souls.  Unfortunately,  the 
Government  of  Ecuador  made  use  of  the  island  to  dispose  of  its  un- 
desirable citizens,  and  Villamil,  as  well  as  the  rest  of  the  settlers,  ob- 
jecting to  the  intrusion,  abandoned  the  settlement,  leaving  the  island 
to  a  few  convicts  and  their  guards. 

In  1869,  Senor  Manuel  J.  Cobos,  of  a  prominent  Guayaquil  family, 
started  a  settlement  on  Chatham  which  he  named  Progreso.  The  early 
days  of  the  venture  proved  somewhat  difficult,  its  founder  being  a 
tyrant  and  cruel  beyond  all  reason  to  the  slaves  who  labored  for  him. 
Flogging  was  common  and  even  executions  were  in  order  when  the 
master  saw  fit.  Finally  in  desperation  under  such  tyranny,  some 
peons  broke  into  his  room  one  night  as  he  slept  and  killed  him  with 
their  machetes. 

Today,  Progreso  is  the  seat  of  the  government  and  a  flourishing 
colony  situated  on  a  plateau  some  three  miles  above  Wreck  Bay  to 
which  it  is  connected  by  a  wagon  road. 

The  principal  crops  are  coffee  and  sugar,  but  there  are  many 
fruits  grown  such  as  papayas,  bananas,  oranges,  and  lemons.  Com- 
merce is  carried  on  through  the  port  of  AVreck  Bay,  which  is  a  port 
of  entry,  and  all  vessels  calling  at  the  Galapagos  should  report  there 
on  arrival  and  clear  on  departure.  The  sugar  cane  is  processed  at  the 
local  mill  and  all  the  products  sent  to  the  mainland  are  carried  on 
the  plantation  schooner  Sail  Cristobal,  formerly  the  Manuel  J.  Cohos, 
a  veteran  of  some  79  years  service. 

About  the  same  time,  or  possibly  a  year  later,  one  Seiior  Valdizan 
obtained  a  concession  to  gather  orchilla,  known  as  dyer  s  moss,  which 
was  of  eonsidera])le  value  and  found  commonly  on  many  of  the  islands. 
However,  his  efforts  were  short-lived,  as  like  Cobos  he  met  his  death 
at  the  hands  of  assassins,  and  his  orchilla  gatherers  returned  to  the 
mainland  or  joined  the  colony  on  Chatham. 


No.  2.-)] 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


107 


~-~ir'ii'fir-~  -m 

Fig.  IS.  Tlie  schooner  ^(/«  Vri.stoJnil.  t'ornieiiy  the  Manuel  J.  Cobos.  was 
built  at  Puna,  Ecuador,  eighty  years  ago  and  has  served  El  Progreso  well  over 
fifty  years.  Now  equipped  with  an  engine  and  wireless,  it  is  still  in  service 
(1954),  carrying  the  products  of  the  plantation  to  the  mainland. 

No  attempt  was  made  to  establish  further  colonies  until  Don  An- 
tonio Gil,  another  prominent  citizen  of  Guayaquil,  investigated 
Charles  Island  about  1893  and  decided  after  a  short  stay  that  it  was 
not  desirable.  Instead  he  chose  Albemarle  Island  and  landed  on  the 
southern  coast  at  a  point  called  Turtle  Cove.  Here  a  small  village 
was  erected  which  was  called  Villamil,  and  another  some  2,000  feet 
up  the  great  southern  volcano  just  at  the  upper  edge  of  the  tree  belt. 
This  village  was  named  Santo  Thomas.  In  1906,  there  was  a  contented 
population  of  some  200  inhabitants  living  off  the  cattle  which  roamed 
aliout  the  grasslands  surrounding  the  huge  crater,  and  a  small  amount 
of  sulphur  which  was  dug  from  a  deposit  in  the  crater  wall  and  trans- 
ported by  burros  to  the  beach  at  Villamil.  Cattle  were  occasionally 
driven  down  the  mountain  to  the  l)each  and  transported  on  hoof  or 
slaughtered  on  the  mountain  top  and  shipped  as  hides.  Like  Pro- 
greso, Villamil  had  its  transportation  problem  and  this  was  met  with 
the  brigantine  Nellie,  a  "home-made"  looking  vessel  with  a  wood- 
burning  boiler.  In  1906,  this  settlement  was  still  a  well-ordered  com- 
munity. 


108  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

The  last  attempt  at  colonization  was  made  shortly  after  the  turn 
of  the  century  when  some  Norwegian  promoters  brought  about  sixty 
of  their  countrymen  to  start  farming  and  fruit-growing  on  Charles 
Island.  The  promoters  managed  to  escape  before  the  prospective  set- 
tlers discovered  their  plight,  though  by  some  miracle  they  managed 
to  live  out  most  of  a  year.  Some  went  to  Chatham  and  a  few  to  Inde- 
fatigable Island,  where  they  managed  to  raise  enough  food  to  live  on 
and  sell  vegetables  to  the  fleet  of  tuna  boats  frequenting  Galapagos 
waters.  Some  of  these  are  still  there  nursing  their  ideas  about  real 
estate  speculators. 

After  the  Norwegians,  there  came  a  handful  of  escapists  and  adven- 
turers, now  that  the  islands  had  gained  plenty  of  notoriety.  First  and 
foremost  of  these  was  Dr.  Karl  Hitter  and  his  consort  who  settled  on 
Charles  Island  in  1929.  All  of  these  have  long  since  disappeared  and 
most  of  them  have  added  nothing  but  unfavorable  notoriety  to  the 
history  of  the  Galapagos. 

At  the  present  writing,  a  single  family^  the  Wittmers,  now  live  on 
Charles  Island  leaving  Margret  Wittmer  as  the  custodian  of  the 
famous  barrel  "post  office." 

THE  GALAPAGOS  "POST  OFFICE" 

Unique  among  post  offices  on  the  shores  of  the  Pacific  is  the  one 
at  Post  Office  Bay,  Charles  Island,  in  the  Galapagos  Archipelago.  This 
"post  office,"  a  barrel  nailed  to  a  post,  was  doing  an  active  business 
as  far  back  at  1794,  when  the  Congress  of  the  United  States  passed 
the  first  laws  for  the  management  of  the  postal  service,  and  even 
though  times  have  changed  with  unbelievable  rapidity  and  its  serv- 
ices are  no  longer  necessary,  it  is  still  functioning. 

Who  nailed  up  the  first  barrel  in  Post  Office  Bay,  and  when?  No 
record  has  yet  turned  up.  Perhaps  it  was  in  some  long-lost  ship's  log. 
Captain  James  Colnett,  Royal  Navy,  went  to  the  Galapagos  in  the 
year  1793  on  board  the  merchant  ship  Rattler  to  look  into  the  possi- 
bilities of  whaling  in  those  waters.  As  far  as  can  be  ascertained,  he 
made  no  mention  in  either  his  diary  or  his  log  of  erecting  a  post 
office,  though  it  is  marked  on  his  chart  which  is  dated  1793.  British 
whalers  were  in  the  Pacific  earlier,  the  whaler  Amelia,  Captain  Shields, 
sailing  from  London  for  the  Pacific  in  1787.  It  is  possil)le,  therefore, 
that  some  British  whaler  set  it  up  and  that  Captain  Colnett  found  it 
on  his  an-ivnl,  though  there  seems  to  be  no  proof  that  such  is  the  case. 

In  this  modern  worhl  wiiere  time  and  distance  have  been  reduced  to 
insignificance,  we  are  accustomed  to  sending  lottei's  aci'oss  the  seas 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


109 


Fig.  19.  Captain  Linbi-idge  of  the  schooner  Mat-y  Sachs  stands  by  while 
Rollo  H.  Beck,  famous  Galapagos  explorer,  mails  a  letter  in  the  barrel  erected 
bv  H.M.S.  Leander. 


in  a  few  days  by  fast  ships  or  by  air  in  a  few  hours.  One  hundred 
and  fifty  years  ago.  or  more,  when  the  whalers  of  New  England  made 
cruises  of  one,  two,  or  even  three  years  in  quest  of  the  sperm  whale 
or  cachalot  as  they  called  it,  things  Avere  quite  different.  It  was  then 
that  the  "post  office"  on  Charles  Island  was  in  its  prime,  used  by  the 
whalers  cruising  the  Galapagos  waters — their  best  way  of  sending 
word  to  the  folks  at  liome,  even  though  it  may  have  taken  a  year  or 
more  for  a  letter  to  reach  its  destination. 

It  was  customary  for  a  homeward-bound  whaler  to  call  at  Post 
Office  Bay  if  possible,  pick  up  the  mail,  and  carry  it  to  her  home  port. 
Eventually,  through  the  courtesy  of  merchants  and  l)y  devious  ways, 
it  would  get  to  the  families  and  friends  of  the  men  who  had  trusted 
their  letters  to  a  barrel  on  a  lonely  beach  in  the  Pacific. 

Of  historical  interest  it  is  that,  during  the  War  of  1812,  Captain 
David  Porter,  commanding  the  U.  S.  frigate  Essex,  used  the  "post 


office"  strategically 


Ile  states  in  his  journal : 


no 


CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF    SCIENCES 


[Ot .  Papi:rs 


In  the  morning  I  stood  to  the  westward,  with  a  pleasant  breeze 
from  the  east,  which  run  us,  by  2  P.  M.,  as  far  as  the  harbour  of 
Charles  Island.  On  arriving  opposite  to  it,  we  could  perceive  no  ves- 
sels; but  understanding  that  vessels  that  stopped  there  for  refresh- 
ments, such  as  turtle  and  land  tortoise,  and  for  wood,  were  in  the 
practice  of  depositing  letters  in  a  box  placed  for  the  purpose  near  the 
landing-place,  (which  is  a  small  beach  sheltered  by  rocks,  about  the 
middle  of  the  bay)  I  dispatched  Lieutenant  Downes  to  ascertain  if 
any  vessels  had  been  lately  there,  and  to  bring  off  such  letters  as 
might  be  of  use  to  us,  if  he  should  find  any.  He  returned  in  about 
three  hours,  with  several  papers,  taken  from  a  box  which  he  found 
nailed  to  a  post,  over  which  was  a  black  sign,  on  which  was  painted 
Hathaway 's  PostofRce. 

Through  the  years,  of  course,  the  barrel,  which  was  marked  "Post 
Office,"  had  to  l)e  replaced  —  when  the  hoops  rusted  the  cask  would 
fall  apart.  Now  and  then  a  box  of  some  sort  would  replace  the  bar- 
rel. Various  vessels  took  on  the  repairing  and  replacing  of  the  beach- 
side  mailbox,  but  chiefly  British  men-of-war  going  to  station  at 
Esquimault  or  en  route  home  to  be  paid  off. 

On  October  4,  1905,  the  expedition  of  the  California  Academy 
of  Sciences  to  the  (Jahipagos  Island  visited  Post  Office  Bay  and  found 
the  barrel  in  fair  condition.  The  hoops  were  somewhat  rusted  but 
holding  together.  An  inscription  on  it  read:  "Erected  by  11. M.S. 
Leander/'  Crews  of  various  vessels  calling  had  painted  or  carved  the 
names  of  their  ships  on  the  barrel.  Among  them  were  His  ^lajesty's 
ships  Virago  and  Amphion,  the  French  cruiser  Protet,  the  U.S.S.  Ore- 
gon, and  the  U.S.F.S.  Albatross. 


Fig.  20.  H.M.S.  Leander.  the  ship  responsible  for  putting  up  the  barrel 
which  was  serving  the  Ijancl  post  office  when  the  expedition  of  the  California 
Academy  of  Sciences  visited  Post  Office  Bay  in  1905. 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


111 


a 'Of. 


pOST-OfFlCE 


IftPAGOS 


Mr.  Joseph  H,  sievin, 
California  Acadery  of  Goionoos, 
.Golden  Gate  Park, 
San  Francisco,  California 


^      S      ^. 


Fig.  21.    Envelope  addressed  to  the  author  and  mailed  from  the  Barrel  Post 
Office  on  Charles  Island. 

A  member  of  the  Academy's  expedition  mailed  a  letter  which  was 
afterward  found  to  have  been  delivered  just  a  year  to  the  day  after 
it  was  dropped  into  the  barrel.  It  was  picked  np  by  the  British  yacht 
Deerhoimd,  finally  reaching  the  office  of  the  Postmaster  General  in 
AVashington.  The  rnst  from  the  barrel  hoops  had  obliterated  the  ad- 
dress so  that  only  the  surname  of  the  addressee  and  the  city  were 
legible.  Nevertheless,  the  Post  Office  Department  delivered  the  letter 
safely. 

A  letter  mailed  to  the  w^riter  on  January  3,  1932,  arrived  about 
a  month  later,  having  been  picked  up  by  Vincent  Astor's  yacht  Nour- 
makal.  This  was  brought  to  Papeete  and  came  up  on  the  regular  mail 
steamer.    Service  has  improved  somewhat  in  the  last  few  decades. 


SHIPWRECKS 

Throughout  the  years,  many  vessels  have  left  their  bones  upon 
Galapagos  shores.  When  Porter  was  cruising  along  the  Albemarle 
coast  in  search  of  the  enemy,  he  sighted  the  wreckage  of  a  vessel 
within  five  miles  of  Point  Christopher.  The  shore  was  covered  with 
what  he  took  to  be  barrel  staves,  which  led  him  to  believe  the  vessel 
was  a  whaler,  l)ut  the  surf  Avas  too  high  to  attempt  a  landing  and  he 
could  not  be  certain  w^hether  the  wreck  was  that  of  a  British  or 
American  vessel. 

In  later  years  (1850),  the  whale  ship  Lafayette,  of  New  Bedford, 
was  lost  on  Albemarle,  35  months  out  with  600  bbls.  of  sperm  oil.  She 
went  ashore  in  the  night  as  the  captain  was  running  in  to  come  to 


112  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

anchor.  The  vessel  was  stove  in  by  hitting  a  rock  and  became  a  total 
loss.  The  whale  ship  Golconda,  of  New  Bedford,  took  off  the  captain, 
mate,  and  part  of  the  crew.  Two  boats  which  left  the  ship  were  never 
heard  of  again. 

The  ships  Damon,  of  Newport,  the  Brandt,  of  New  Bedford,  and 
the  bark  Cathenvood  w^ere  lost  between  1847  and  1855,  while  the 
ship  President  which  ran  aground  was  more  fortunate  than  her  sisters, 
reaching  home  in  a  damaged  condition. 

His  Majesty's  ship  Magicienne  had  an  experience  too  in  touching 
bottom,  which  can  best  be  told  by  her  log. 

The  Magicienne  Eocks,  named  after  the  ship,  are  not  shown  on 
tlie  general  charts  of  the  islands,  but  are  marked  on  the  detailed 
anchorage  of  Gardner  Bay  on  Admiralty  Chart  No.  1376. 

His  ^Majesty's  steam  vessel  Magicienne,  Nicholas  Vansittort  com- 
manding, a  wooden  ship  built  in  1847  with  tonnage  of  1325,  was  in 
Gardner  Bay,  Hood  Island,  October  14,  1857,  where  she  hit  bottom 
w^hile  weighing  anchor  and  narrowly  escaped  disaster. 

October  15,  1857 

7:05  Weighed  went  on  ahead  easy  set  job  went  on  easy  proceed- 
ing out  of  Gardner  Bay  sliip  took  the  ground  stopped  and  reversed 
engine  occasionally  started  10  tons  of  water  out  of  boat  preparatory 
to  laying  out  bower  anchor  transported  guns  aft  lighted  two  more 
fires  at  8:35  ship  floated  clear  of  rock  up  and  in  boats  and  proceeded 
at  9:05  with  two  boilers  and  8  fires 

Passed  Gardner  Island  steering  for  the  northern  part  of  Charles 
Anchored   in  Post  Office  Bay  Charles   Island     ship   making   l^o 
inches  of  water  an  hour  keep  one  pump  at  work  during  the  night 

October  16 

The  leak  having  gained  during  the  night  and  10  lo  in-  being  in  the 
well  worked  two  pumps  and  reduced  it  to  5  in.  at  8  a.m. 

Proceed  out  of  the  Bay  for  Indefatigable  Isl.  under  steam  with 
two  boilers  and  made  all  plain  sail 

Anchored  in  Conway  Bay 

October  17 

Ship  making  water  Ivj  in.  an  hour  keep  one  pump  at  work  ship 
making  y^  in.  an  hour  with  one  pump  working 

October  18,  1857 

The  ship  made  7  in.  of  water  in  10  hours,  without  pumping 

October  19 

Midnight  ship  making  Is  in.  of  water  per  hour  weighed  and  pro- 
ceeded out  of  Conway  Bay  for  Albemarle  anchored  in  the  east  bay 


No.  25J  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  113 

October  20 

Weighed  and  proceeded  out  of  bay  for  James  Island    Anchored  at 
James  Bay 

Oct.  21 

Ship  making  about  %  in-  of  water  an  hour 

Oct.  22 

At  James  Bay  ship  making  \->  in.  water  an  hour 

Oct.  23 

Proceeded  out  of  James  Bay 

Oct.  24 

Passed  Bindloe  ship  under  sail 

The  ship  arrived  at  Panama  October  31,  1857,  and  was  repaired. 

Any  seaman  can  pictnre  the  anxious  moments  the  captain  spent 
and  the  relief  it  was  not  to  have  to  report  the  loss  of  one  of  His 
]\Iajesty's  ships. 

It  was  only  by  the  greatest  fortnne  that  the  schooner  Academy, 
of  onr  California  Academy  of  Sciences  Expedition  to  the  Galapagos 
Islands,  did  not  leave  her  bones  on  the  coast  of  Albemarle,  as  she 
hit  a  reef  coming  to  anchor  there.  But  smooth  weather  and  a  suf- 
ficient supply  of  ground  tackle  saved  the  day.  Sunken  reefs  and  lee 
shores  are  not  to  be  trifled  with  when  depending  on  wind  alone  for 
motive  power. 

Captain  Emil  Petersen,  of  the  Norwegian  bark  Alexandra,  had  a 
most  unfortunate  experience  on  his  visit  to  the  Galapagos.  His  ves- 
sel, bound  from  Newcastle  to  Panama,  with  a  cargo  of  coal  was 
caught  in  the  equatorial  calms  and  lack  of  provisions,  and  especially 
water,  caused  the  captain  to  yield  to  the  demands  of  the  crew,  who 
had  practically  mutinied,  to  abandon  ship  and  take  to  the  boats.  On 
May  8,  1906,  the  vessel  was  abandoned  and  the  boats  headed  for  the 
Galapagos.  According  to  their  reckoning,  on  the  third  day  the 
mountains  of  Albemarle  were  sighted,  distant  about  25  miles.  Dur- 
ing the  night,  however,  the  currents  took  them  off  and  next  day,  the 
island  was  lost  to  view,  and  it  was  not  until  May  20,  1906,  that  they 
made  Indefatigable,  landing  in  the  vicinity  of  Conway  Bay.  Unfor- 
tunately, this  was  miles  away  from  the  waterhole  at  Academy  Bay, 
which  they  did  not  find  until  months  later.  They  sustained  them- 
selves, however,  by  drinking  the  blood  of  seals  they  were  able  to  kill 
and  by  chewing  the  pulp  of  cactus  to  quench  their  thirst. 

What  a  misfortune  it  was  for  them  that  they  did  not  land  a  few 
miles  to  the  south,  for  on  May  20,  1906,  the  day  of  their  landing, 


114  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

our  Academy  expedition  was  becalmed  close  to  the  Indefatigable 
coast  five  miles  south  of  Nameless  Island  and  probably  less  than  ten 
miles  from  the  castaways.  During  their  journey  in  search  of  water, 
they  reported  seeing  footprints  in  a  small  cove,  the  remains  of  a  fire, 
a  tin  can  and  some  overturned  rocks.  This  must  certainly  have  ])een  one 
of  our  former  landings  as  it  was  customary  in  places  where  doves 
were  common,  as  on  this  part  of  the  coast  of  Indefatigable,  to  bring 
a  frying  pan  ashore  and  have  fresh  meat  for  lunch,  together  with 
a  can  of  fruit  to  quench  our  thirst.  Also,  it  was  a  normal  procedure 
when  hunting  to  turn  stones  for  lizards,  insects,  and  landshells.  On 
this  occasion  light  winds  and  airs  prevented  the  schooner  from  mak- 
ing any  northing  and  we  drifted  down  towards  Charles  Island  with- 
out catching  sight  of  the  castaways. 

Even  today  the  Galapagos  Islands  have  their  shipwrecks  as  the 
surrounding  waters  have  become  the  fishing  grounds  for  the  Ameri- 
can tuna  fleet  which  started  sending  their  vessels  there  about  1928. 
Numbered  among  those  which  met  destruction  in  the  Galapagos 
area  are  the  clippers  St.  Veronica,  which  was  wrecked  on  Albemarle 
Point,  the  Radio,  which  went  high  and  dry  on  a  Narborough  beach, 
the  Sun  Jacket  and  the  Dominator,  both  of  which  sank,  and  the  Glory 
of  the  Seas  and  Southern  Cross,  which  were  both  destroyed  by  fire.  It 
behooves  the  navigator  in  these  waters  to  be  more  than  cautious,  fac- 
ing both  unknown  currents,  sunken  rocks,  and  reefs  just  awash. 

It  will  probably  never  be  known  how  many  ships  have  left  their 
bones  on  these  inhospitable  shores. 

EXPEDITIONS  TO  THE  GALAPAGOS 

Before  the  first  organized  scientific  parties  reached  tlio  islands, 
they  were  visited  by  four  well-known  naturalists. 

Hugh  Cuming,  on  the  Discoverer,  whose  cruise  to  the  Galapagos 
is  rather  obscure,  visited  the  islands  about  1829,  some  giving  the  date 
as  1831-32.  Cuming,  a  born  naturalist  and  ardent  collector  of  shells 
and  plants,  was  apprenticed  to  a  sailmaker  in  his  youth  and  learned 
about  slii])s  and  sails.  Gloving  to  Chile  when  a  young  man,  he  felt 
the  urge  to  go  farther  afield  on  his  collecting  trips  and  he  built  his 
own  vessel,  the  Discoverer,  and  was  thus  enabled  to  reach  the  Galapa- 
gos. Though  in  general  his  expedition  cannot  l)e  classed  as  a  note- 
worthy one,  it  is  so  1o  the  boliinicnl  woi-ld,  his  ])lant  collections  having 
l)een  exhibited  a1  1lic  (ii'st  meeting  of  tlie  Zoological  Society  of 
London  in  1832. 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  115 

In  1868,  Dr.  Simeon  Ilabel  left  New  York  bound  for  the  Galapagos, 
spending  approximately  six  months  in  the  archipelago  making  large 
collections  of  birds,  reptiles,  insects,  and  mollusks,  wliich  he  brought 
to  Vienna  to  study. 

Dr.  Theodor  Wolf,  in  1875,  on  board  the  Ecuadorian  vessel  Vene- 
cia, Captain  Petersen,  collected  plants  on  Albemarle,  Charles,  Chat- 
ham, and  Indefatigable  islands,  l)ut  all  of  these  collections  were  de- 
stroyed while  in  storage  in  Guayaquil. 

Next  came  George  Baur  who  has  written  extensively  on  the  Gala- 
pagos and  who  was  a  great  believer  in  the  subsidence  theory.  He 
spent  from  June  10,  1891,  to  September  6  visiting  Albemarle,  Abing- 
don, Bindloe,  Barrington,  Charles,  Chatham,  Duncan,  Hood,  Inde- 
fatigable, James,  Jervis,  and  Tower  islands.  Besides  collecting  in 
the  various  branches  of  natural  history,  he  brought  back  twenty-one 
tortoises  from  Duncan  and  southern  Albemarle. 

The  Hudson  Bay  Company's  ])rig  WiUiafn  and  Ann,  Captain  Henry 
Hanwell,  with  David  Douglas,  a  famous  botanist,  and  Dr.  John 
Scouler  of  Glasgow  on  board,  spent  three  days  in  January,  1825,  on 
James  Island  and  made  the  first  extensive  botanical  collection  from 
the  Galapagos.  Douglas,  speaking  of  his  visit,  remarked,  "The  woods 
teemed  with  tortoises,  some  weighing  400  lbs.,  and  the  shores  with 
turtle."  Of  the  birds  he  said:  "Many  of  the  smaller  kinds  perched  on 
my  hat,  and  even  unconsciously  settled  upon  the  gun  (the  instrument 
of  their  destruction^  which  I  carried  on  my  shoulder." 

The  U.S.F.S.  Albatross,  Lieutenant  Commander  Z.  L.  Tanner,  was 
active  in  Galapagos  waters  from  April  4-16,  1888  and  March  28- 
April  4,  1891.  She  visited  Albemarle,  Charles,  Chatham.  Duncan, 
Hood,  and  James.  Fifteen  tortoises  from  Albemarle  and  Duncan 
islands,  besides  collections  of  birds,  plants,  etc.,  were  taken  on  the 
voyage. 

In  the  late  1880 's.  Lord  Walter  Kothschild,  of  Tring.  England,  be- 
came interested  in  the  giant  tortoises  of  the  world  and  wished  to  se- 
cure the  various  species  found  in  the  Galapagos.  To  accomplish  this, 
in  1897  the  Webster-Harris  Expedition  was  organized,  being  named 
after  Mr.  Frank  H.  Webster  to  whom  Lord  Rothschikl  entrusted  the 
organization,  and  Mr.  C.  II.  Harris  who  led  the  expedition  in  the 
field.  It  left  San  Francisco  June  21,  1897,  on  the  schooner  Likt  and 
Mattie,  Captain  Linbridge,  and  reached  the  Galapagos  on  July  25. 
After  a  stop  of  approximately  eight  months,  the  expedition  returned 
with  sixty  living  tortoises. 


116  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

Though  a  few  of  the  visiting  ships  had  naturalists  on  board,  the 
first  organized  expedition  was  that  conducted  by  Professor  Louis 
Agassiz,  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology  at  Harvard  Uni- 
versity, on  the  United  States  Coast  and  Geodetic  Survey  steamer 
Hassler,  Commander  P.  C.  Johnson,  which  arrived  at  Charles  Island 
on  June  10,  1873.  Besides  Professor  Agassiz,  two  other  distinguished 
scientists  were  on  board :  Dr.  Franz  Steindachner  of  the  Royal  Zoolog- 
ical Museum  at  Vienna,  Austria,  and  Count  Louis  Francois  de  Pour- 
tales,  assistant  in  the  U.S.  Coast  Survey.  The  stay  of  the  Hassler  was 
a  sliort  one,  only  nine  days,  but  the  following  notes  of  J.  Henry  Blake, 
the  conchologist  and  artist  of  the  expedition,  give  an  insight  into  the 
many  interesting  events  that  occurred  while  there: 

After  passing  Hood  I.  in  tlie  niglit  or  early  moi-ning,  which  is  the 
most  Southern  I.,  we  came  in  sight  of  Cliarles  I.  and  anchored  in 
Post  Office  Bay  about  12.15  noon  on  the  10th  of  June,  1872. 

As  we  neared  the  Island  an  immense  school  of  porpoises  —  there 
must  have  been  one  thousand  of  them,  for  they  extended  a  great 
distance  on  either  side  of  the  ship  —  came  toward  the  sliip  in  a  per- 
fect line  until  within  a  few  hundred  feet,  then  they  turned  suddenly 
and  went  with  great  speed  to  the  eastward,  some  of  them  jumping 
six  feet  into  the  air.  The  day  before  this  (9th)  some  lifty  black  fish 
(Globicephalus)  came  up  after  us,  passed  under  the  ship  and  con- 
tinued on  their  course  to  the  N.  W.  Some  half  dozen  "frigate  birds" 
came  off  to  the  ship  and  attempted  to  light  on  our  topmasts,  but 
the  sharp  ends  of  the  lightning  conductors  which  projected  above 
the  masts,  prevented,  when  they  began  to  bite  at  our  pennant  in  a 
very  revengeful  manner. 

As  we  neared  Charles  I.  it  showed  the  characteristic  volcanic  ma- 
terial of  which  this  and  all  the  islands  are  wholly  composed,  which 
is  very  black  as  seen  from  the  ship  covered  in  many  places  with  green 
vegetation,  conspicuous  among  which  is  a  tall  cactus.  As  we  came 
up  with  the  land  and  passed  around  to  Post  Office  Bay,  the  extinct 
volcanoes,  either  in  cone  shape  or  sharp  peaks  and  ridges  where  a 
part  of  the  cone  is  broken  away,  gave  the  land  a  very  rough  ap- 
pearance. 

As  soon  as  we  anchored  we  went  ashore  landing  on  a  beautiful 
beach  where  we  pulled  our  seine  with  great  success  taking  some 
seventeen  species  of  fish.  The  lines  were  put  over  on  board  ship  which 
were  taut  almost  instantly  with  fish  and  large  numbers  were  taken 
in  this  way.  I  collected  some  twenty  species  of  mollusca  besides 
holothurians,  starfish,  etc.  On  the  beach  we  found  quantities  of  red 
crab  which  live  in  holes  on  the  shore.  On  the  rocks  was  another 
species  of  same  brilliant  color  which  interested  me  very  much  in 
running  over  the  rocks  and  actually  jumping  across  from  one  rock 
to  another,  a  distance  of  a  foot  or  more. 

I  saw  several  of  the  large  black  lizards  CAmblyrhyncus  cristatus) 
which  when  dry  resembles  very  closely  the  black  volcanic  clinkers 


No.  25J  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  117 

strewn  along  the  shore  over  which  they  crawl.  There  is  considerable 
vegetation  in  the  valleys,  a  bnsh  5  or  6  ft.  high  and  some  trees  30 
or  more  feet  high,  and  mangrove  near  the  shore.  The  tall  straight 
cactus  is  abundant.  Birds  were  plentiful  and  the  smaller  ones  ex- 
tremely tame.  Some  half  a  dozen  lighted  on  a  cactus  near  where  I  was 
sitting  and  were  so  tame  I  put  my  hand  within  a  few  inches  of  them. 

Our  ship's  doctor  who  went  with  a  gun  brought  back  many  large 
birds  such  as  gannets,  penguins,  frigate  birds,  flamingos,  etc.  On  one 
small  island  at  the  eastern  end  of  Post  Office  Bay  is  a  sea  lion  rookery 
and  where  hundreds  could  be  seen  at  any  time.  Two  of  our  company 
went  there  in  our  ship's  little  dingy  and  found  them  very  plentiful 
but  they  surrounded  the  boat  so  dangerously  near  the  occupants  did 
not  dare  to  shoot  at  them  for  fear  of  being  capsized.  Towards  eve- 
ning the  Captain  with  others  went  in  to  take  a  look  at  them,  and 
landing,  on  the  shore  below  them,  the  Captain  shot  one  measuring 
six  or  seven  feet,  as  they  rushed  towards  the  water  into  which  they 
plunged,  making  a  noise  louder  than  the  waves  on  the  shore.  Some 
of  them  were  of  immense  size  and  many  could  be  killed.  At  night 
our  gill  nets  were  set  but  only  a  few  sharks  were  caught. 

The  next  day  I  was  detained  aboard  to  care  for  the  many  speci- 
mens already  taken.  But  a  fishing  party  brought  back  many  fish 
among  them  a  large  grouper,  some  of  them  weighing  30  lbs.  They 
had  also  in  their  boat  several  pigs  and  some  8  or  10  tortoises  (T. 
nigra)  which  they  had  bought  of  the  natives  of  the  island. 

Some  large  sea  turtles  were  seen  but  none  were  captured.  They 
obtained  many  specimens  of  the  iguana  (A.  Cristatus)  which  attain 
the  length  of  three  feet.  At  one  place  visited  by  the  party,  were 
fifty  or  more  of  this  species.  Some  30  or  40  were  brought  on  board, 
some  of  which  were  allowed  to  run  about  deck.  Two  half  grown  seals 
were  brought  on  board.  There  were  many  birds  flying  about  the  ship 
eating  the  fish,  etc.  thrown  over.  The  pelicans  attracted  the  most 
attention  as  they  filled  their  large  pouches  and  flew  away  some  so 
full  they  could  not  raise  themselves  from  the  water,  but  dragged 
their  overfilled  pouches  along  its  surface.  There  were  seven  persons 
on  this  Island,  and  they  were  short  of  provisions.  They  had  had  no 
rain  for  months  and  had  lost  many  cattle  and  mules  because  of  it. 
One  of  the  natives,  the  Chief,  signalled  from  the  shore  and  our  boat 
brought  him  aboard  our  ship  where  he  spent  the  night.  We  gave  him 
food  and  clothing.  He  said  that  at  one  time  there  were  sixty  men  on 
the  islands  which  had  been  leased  at  $4000  per  annum  but  mutiny 
and  other  causes  had  greatly  reduced  the  number. 

The  weather  during  our  stay  at  the  island  was  delightful.  It 
was  somewhat  warm  on  shore  during  the  day,  yet  not  what  one  would 
expect  at  the  equator,  and  the  clouds  which  hung  over  the  island 
would  descend  at  night  hiding  the  tops  of  the  mountains. 

We  weighed  anchor  on  the  morning  of  the  12th  and  steamed  for 
Albemarle  Island,  but  finding  the  harbor,  Iguana  Cove,  too  insecure 
and  too  great  a  sea  on  shore  for  landing,  we  did  not  stop,  but  put 
our  steamer  at  a  slow  rate  of  speed  all   night   intending  to   reach 
Tagus  Cove  in  the  morning. 


118  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papi-rs 

Oil  our  way  from  Charles  Island,  a  large  school  of  blackfish  (Globi- 
cephalus)  came  up  with  us  and  kept  company  about  half  an  hour. 
They  were  easily  seen  in  the  water  and  at  times  came  within  a  few 
feet  of  the  ship's  side.  I  think  it  was  the  same  species  seen  off  Juan 
Fernandez,  with  its  prominent  white  spot  near  the  dorsal  fin. 

We  also  ran  into  an  immense  school  of  porpoises  (sharp  nosed) 
which  presented  a  beautiful  sight  as  they  started  at  a  rapid  rate 
making  a  long  line  of  foam  and  spray. 

The  western  side  of  Albemarle  as  seen  from  our  ship  is  low  with 
a  regular  rise  to  the  mountains  further  back  from  the  coast  to  the 
height  of  4700  feet.  It  is  covered  with  vegetation  wherever  it  can 
find  I'oothold.  and  supporting  moisture.  From  Iguana  Cove  to  the 
S.  W.  part,  it  is  almost  a  mass  of  black  lava  which  has  come  from 
the  mountains  above.  Some  of  the  lava  streams  were  quite  wide, 
others  narrow  and  some  had  cooled  before  they  had  half  reached  the 
base.  At  the  base  of  the  mountain,  where  this  great  mass  of  lava 
has  spread  out  were  innumerable  smaller  craters  of  different  size. 
We  steamed  along  the  western  shore,  around  Narborough  Island  and 
into  Tagus  Cove,  which  is  almost  in  the  narrows  between  Albemarle 
and  Narborough,  where  we  anchored  about  8.30  A.  M.  June  13th,  1872. 

We  went  to  the  shore  and  found  it  no  easy  matter  to  land  because 
of  the  steep  landing  place.  But  by  backing  the  boat  in,  and  the  men 
holding  it  at  their  oars,  we  took  our  chance  and  jumped  for  the 
shore.  As  we  neared  the  shore  we  saw  many  large  red  crabs  and  water 
iguanas  (Am.  Cristatus)  clinging  to  the  bank.  These  iguanas  are 
black  and  about  three  feet  long,  very  disagreeable  looking,  but  could 
scramble  about  in  a  lively  manner  over  the  lava. 

They  live  wholly  in  or  near  the  salt  water  where  they  feed  on  the 
algae.  I  never  saw  one  inland.  They  even  swam  off  to  where  our  ship 
was  anchored.  We  had  not  proceeded  far  from  the  shore  before  we 
came  to  the  large  reddish  species  of  iguana  (A.  Demarlii)  which  is 
seldom  met  with  on  the  beach.  As  we  went  further  inland  we  met 
many  of  this  species  and  procured  15  or  20  specimens.  They  would 
run  in  a  very  clumsy  manner  and  we  could  easily  outrun  them.  After 
running  awhile  they  would  stop  and  face  us,  looking  very  ferocious 
but  in  reality  stupid,  which  gave  us  a  good  opportunity  to  club  them. 
Some  times  they  would  jump,  standing  on  their  hind  legs  trying  to 
bite.  I  made  a  rough  sketch  to  show  color,  which  is  in  the  possession 
of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  as  well  as  all  specimens,  etc. 
They  were  yellow  on  the  forward  part,  the  rest  of  the  body  to  the  tip 
of  the  tail  being  a  reddish  brown  excepting  a  few  large  brick  red 
patches  on  the  body.  The  row  of  spines  from  the  back  of  the  head  to 
the  tail  corresponded  to  the  color  of  the  body,  the  longest  being  on  the 
head.  The  A.  Denuulli  is  twice  as  large  as  the  black  species  (Cristatus) 
and  some  will  weigh  12  or  1.5  pounds.  It  feeds  on  cactus  largely. 

The  next  day,  June  14,  the  party  brought  from  the  shore  15  more 
specimens  of  the  large  iguana. 

We  left  Tagus  Cove  and  arrived  at  James  Bay,  James  Island  at 
11.30  A.  M.  on  the  l.Sth.    We  landed  and  made  large  collections  in 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  119 

all  departments.  I  collected  many  shells  such  as  Cypria,  Emargenella, 
Cassldaria,  Terebra.  Chiton,  Doris,  etc.  Also  many  radiates.  The 
birds  seem  especially  tame  on  this  island  and  would  almost  allow 
me  to  touch  Ihem  with  my  hand.  While  collecting  on  the  beach,  one 
bird  perched  on  the  rim  of  my  collecting  pail  by  my  side  and  others 
skipped  about  me  in  a  very  friendly  manner.  Many  large  birds  were 
shot  including  20  flamingos  some  of  which  we  had  served  for  the 
table,  but  the  orange  colored  tough  flesh  was  not  much  relished  by 
our  mess.  Some  wild  pigs  were  seen.  I  noticed  three  specimens  of 
lizards,  one  an  Amblarynchus  Demarlii  which  was  not  so  large  as 
those  seen  on  the  other  Islands.  I  found  asleep  on  the  shore  a  turtle 
several  feet  long.  This  island  like  all  the  others  is  wholly  volcanic 
and  about  the  same  in  vegetation. 

We  left  James  Island  about  9.30  A.  M.  and  with  a  strong  head 
wind,  steamed  over  to  Jervis  Island  anchoring  on  the  north  side 
in  20  fathoms  about  3  P.  M.  With  our  glass  we  could  see  many  seals 
and  one  large  sea  turtle  on  the  beach.  Boats  were  lowered  and  we 
visited  the  shore,  the  first  boat  capturing  the  sea  turtle  which 
weighed  100  pounds.  I  was  in  the  second  boat  and  as  we  neared  the 
shore  seals  surrounded  the  boat,  while  many  more  were  lying  about 
on  the  land.  Directly  above,  when  we  landed  was  an  interesting 
family,  a  mother  and  two  small  seals  lying  in  a  shallow  excavation 
which  had  been  made  by  moving  their  bodies  about,  all  of  whom 
did  not  appear  to  be  much  disturbed  by  our  presence.  (I  think  Mrs. 
Agassiz  speaks  of  them  in  her  article  in  "Atlantic  Monthly"  for  May 
1873.)  So  we  seated  ourselves  about  them  and  studied  them  as  much 
as  we  pleased.  The  mother  seal  was  about  six  feet  long,  light  gray 
or  silver  gray  color,  the  hair  being  very  dry,  a  rather  small  char- 
acteristic doglike  head.  The  two  young  seals,  were  about  three  feet 
long  and  resembled  much  the  old  one,  excepting  the  short  puppy 
like   noses.   I   saw  other   similar  families   which   I   did   not  disturb. 

One  large  seal  I  singled  out  and  drove  along  the  beach  to  study 
its  movements,  in  its  walking  or  galloping  which  they  did  like  other 
four  footed  animals.  It  was  interesting  to  see  how  gracefully  they 
went  along  the  beach  and  how  rapidly  they  got  over  the  ragged  vol- 
canic rocks.  The  seals  were  very  plentiful  lying  along  the  beach  or 
In  the  water  near  the  shore,  also  in  a  small  lagoon  back  from  the 
beach  and  bones  of  the  dead.  We  collected  considerably  in  the  differ- 
ent departments.  I  saw  a  small  A.  Cristatus  and  Dr.  Steindachner 
thinks  he  got  a  young  specimen  of  the   same. 

There  was  another  small  species  of  lizard,  Tropidurus  which  was 
very  numerous,  of  which  we  got  several  dozen.  We  were  told  by  the 
inhabitants  of  Charles  Island  that  there  were  some  40  people  living 
on  this  island,  but  those  of  the  party  who  went  to  find  them  had  a 
fruitless  search.  Some  stakes  in  the  ground  near  where  we  landed 
were  the  only  signs  of  the  inhabitants  we  saw. 

Leaving  Jervis  Island  about  5  o'clock  on  the  morning  of  the 
17th  of  June  we  steamed  with  very  pleasant  weather  for  Indefatigable 
Island  where  we  arrived  about  11  A.  M. 


120  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

Our  stay  at  this  island  was  shortened  by  the  fact  that  our  pro- 
visions were  getting  reduced,  and  our  collections  were  not  very 
large.  Some  new  species  of  fish  were  taken  making  our  list  of  fishes 
taken  while  at  the  islands  53  species  as  determined  at  the  time.  We 
caught  many  fish  from  the  ship  and  party  sent  off  "Eden  Point" 
caught  many  large  grouper  (Serranus)  one  of  them  weighed  23  lbs. 
After  taking  all  we  wanted  for  specimens  and  the  mess,  about  200 
lbs.  were  thrown  overboard.  I  saw  none  of  the  large  red  iguana  and 
none  were  taken  although  their  holes  were  seen.  A  small  species 
with  red  on  the  sides  of  the  neck  were  taken.  Saw  footprints  of  man 
and  dog. 

About  noon,  June  19,  1872,  we  bade  good  bye  to  the  Galapagos 
Islands  after  a  very  delightful  sojourn  of  nine  days,  and  shaped  our 
course  for  Panama.  As  we  steamed  away  we  could  see  James,  Albe- 
marle, Jervis  and  Indefatigable  Islands  in  sight  at  one  time  besides 
smaller  ones  two  of  which  were  quite  interesting  because  of  their 
shape.  The  first  was  a  solid  mass  with  flat  top,  perpendicular  sides 
some  200  feet  high,  with  no  small  rocks  about  its  base  so  that  the 
sea  was  breaking  against  the  steep  walls. 

The  other.  Daphne  Island  was  like  an  inverted  bowl  with  very 
symmetrical  sides  and  over  the  top  edge  could  be  seen  a  portion  of 
the  crater.  These  two  small  islands  were  near  each  other  looking 
lonely  enough  with  not  another  rock  of  any  kind  near. 

As  I  have  said  our  stay  at  the  Galapagos  was  too  brief  to  enable 
one  to  make  a  thorough  investigation  in  regard  to  any  particular 
animal  and  I  am  afraid  I  have  given  little  that  is  valuable.  Although 
each  member  of  our  party  had  his  specialty  yet  we  all  tried  to  im- 
prove as  much  as  possible  in  the  limited  time  spent  in  the  Islands. 

A  diligent  .search  was  inade  hy  two  meiuljers  of  tlie  expedition  for 
the  barrel  "post  office"  at  Post  Office  Bay,  Charles  Island,  but  it  was 
nowhere  to  be  found  and  ])robably  had  fallen  down  and  weathered 
away,  being  replaced  when  another  of  His  Majesty's  ships  arrived. 
The  Hassler  party  also  made  collections  on  Indefatigable,  James,  Jer- 
vis, and  Albemarle  islands. 

In  1898  Messrs.  Edmund  Heller  and  Eobert  E.  Snodgrass,  re]v 
resenting  the  Department  of  Zoology  of  Stanford  University,  sailed 
oil  the  sealing  schooner  Jnlid  E.  Wholen,  Captain  W.  P.  Xoyes,  for 
the  Galai)agos.  They  spent  from  December  10,  1898,  to  June  26,  1899, 
visiting  all  Ihc  l;ii'",er  islands  and  many  of  the  smaller  ones,  and 
brought  back  large  herpetological  and  botanical  collections. 

This  was  the  last  of  the  commercial  ventures  after  the  Calapagos 
fur  seal,  the  numbers  being  so  depleted  it  was  no  longer  considered 
l)rofita])le  to  hiiiil  lliein.  The  net  result  of  this  voyage  was  224  skins. 
Since  that  time,  a  single  one  of  these  fur  seals  was  fotmd  bv  the 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


121 


Fig.  22.  A  famous  oxpedition  vessel  was  the  thirty-one  ton  schooner  Mary 
Sachs  which  visited  the  Galapagos  and  Revillagigedos,  finally  leaving  her  bones 
on  Banks  Island  in  the  Arctic  Ocean  while  on  the  Stefansson  Expedition 
in  1917. 


Expedition  of  the  California  Academy  of  Sciences  and  seven  or  eight 
more  were  taken  by  Captain  Allan  Hancock,  owner  of  the  Vehro  III. 
These  last  were  taken  to  the  San  Diego  Zoo,  giving  the  first  oppor- 
tunity in  recent  years  to  study  them  thoroughly. 

In  1901  ]\Ir.  Rollo  H.  Beck,  w^ho  later  headed  the  expedition  for 
the  California  Academy  of  Sciences,  visited  the  Galapagos  on  the 
schooner  ?Iary  Sachs,  Captain  Linbridge,  and  was  quite  successful 
in  his  quest  for  the  giant  land  tortoises.  He  secured  twenty-three  dead 
and  twenty-seven  living  specimens,  all  of  which  w^ent  to  enrich  Lord 
Rothschild's  collection  in  his  private  museum  at  Tring.  This  museum  i.s 
now  an  adjunct  of  the  British  Museum  of  Natural  History. 

By  far  the  most  extensive  natural  history  survey  of  the  Galapagos 
was  that  made  on  the  expedition  sent  out  l)y  the  California  Academy 
of  Sciences.  That  expedition  left  San  Francisco  on  June  25,  1905, 
arriving  at  Hood  Island,  the  southernmost  island  of  the  archipelago, 
on  September  24,  1905.  Under  the  leadership  of  Mr.  Rollo  H.  Beck, 
the  most  intensive  collecting  was  carried  on  for  an  entire  year,  the 


122  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papkrs 


Fig.  23.  The  schooner  Academy  made  the  longest  cruise  to  the  Galapagos 
Islands  of  any  of  the  expedition  vessels.  Depending  upon  the  wind  for  power, 
she  had  none  of  the  advantages  of  the  later  vessels.  She  spent  a  full  year  in 
this  archipelago,  taking  her  departure  from  Culpepper,  the  northernmost  of 
the  islands,  on  September  25,  1906,  and  arrived  in  San  Francisco  on  November 
29,  on  the  five  hundred  and  nineteeenth  day  of  the  voyage. 

little  schooner  Academy  bidding-  good-bye  to  the  "Encliantcd  Islands" 
on  September  25,  1906,  taking  departnre  from  Culpepper  Island 
at  1 :45  p.m.  on  the  455th  day  of  the  voyage.  The  expedition  brought 
back  by  far  the  largest  collections  of  birds,  mammals,  reptiles,  insects, 
and  plants  that  have  ever  been  taken.  The  reptile  collection  included 
all  but  one  of  the  fifteen  species  of  giant  land  tortoises  known  to  inhal)it 
the  islands.'-' 

The  Norwegian  Zoological  Expedition  to  the  (ialapagos  in  1924 
was  conducted  by  Alf  Wollebaek  on  board  the  cutter  Monsunen.  ^Many 
papers  concerning  the  various  branches  of  natural  history  have  been 
published  by  ^VFeddeleser  Fra  Zoologiske  ]Museum,  Osla,  and  Ilakon 
Nielchc,  a  member  of  the  expedition,  gives  an  account  of  tlie  voyage 
and  a  graphic  description  of  the  wreck  of  the  Monsunen  on  Vanikoro 
Island,  one  of  the  Santa  Cruz  Islands,  in  Let's  See  if  the  World  Is 
Round. 

The  British  yacht  St.  (ieorge,  in  1924,  with  James  Ilornell  as 
scientific  director,  made  extensive  collections  of  birds,  mammals,  and 


"  Skeletal  material  of   the  extinct   Charles  Island  tortoise  was  received   from   the   late   Dr.   C.   H. 
Townsend  at  a  later  date. 


No.  25J 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS 


123 


Fig.  24.  The  Oaxaea  was  one  of  the  several  Q  boats,  or  mystery  ships  as 
they  were  sometimes  called,  built  to  combat  the  submarine  menace  during 
World  War  I.  Upon  cessation  of  hostilities,  she  was  purchased  by  Captain 
Allan  Hancock  who  used  her  to  carry  the  products  of  his  ranch,  which  was 
located  near  Mazatlan,  Mexico,  to  the  markets  of  the  United  States.  It  was  on 
this  vessel  that  he  made  his  first  voyage  to  the  Galapagos. 


marine  life.  Foiii-  members  of  the  expedition  have  written  of  their 
experiences  on  tlie  cruise,  their  works  being  listed  in  the  selected 
bibliography. 

No  doubt  William  Beebe's  two  most  interesting  and  entertaining 
volumes :  Galapagos — World's  End,  describing  the  results  of  his  first 
voyage  to  the  "Enchanted  Islands"  on  the  1923  Harrison  Williams 
(Jalapagos  Expedition  aboard  the  yacht  Noma,  and  Ai'cturus  Adven- 
ture, giving  an  account  of  his  second  visit  on  the  Arcturus  Oceano- 
graphic  Expedition  in  1925,  started  a  flow  of  visitors. 

The  first  of  these  volumes  interested  Captain  Allan  Hancock,  of 
Los  Angeles,  enough  to  motivate  him  to  make  a  trip  to  the  islands 
in  1928  on  his  S.S.  Oaxaea.  Evidently  this  voyage  thoroughly  aroused 
his  interest  in  the  "World's  End,"  for  in  1931,  when  his  motor  vessel 
Velero  III  was  commissioned,  his  eyes  turned  toward  the  Galapagos 
once  more  and  he  became  the  host  and  benefactor  to  innumerable 
students  from  various  museums  and  universities  who  were  eager  to 
follow  the  steps  of  Darwin.  The  years  1931-1935  saw  the  Velero  III 
in  (Jalapagos  waters.  Under  the  name  of  the  Allan  Hancock  Pacific 
Expeditions,  numerous  papers  on  the  results  of  these  voyages  have 
been  i)ublished  by  the  University  of  Southern  California. 


124 


CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES 


[Oc.  Papers 


Fig.  25.  Captain  Allan  Hancock,  on  his  exploration  cruiser  Velero  III.  was 
host  to  many  institutions  and  his  favorite  cruising  ground  was  the  Galapagos 
area.  With  a  cruising  radius  of  10,000  miles  and  ideally  fitted  for  research  in 
most  any  field  of  endeavor,  the  Velero  III  greatly  added  to  our  knowledge  of 
the  Galapagos  fauna. 


The  Honorable  CTifford  Pinehot's  voyage  on  his  yacht  3Ianj  Pinclrot 
in  1929  resulted  in  the  publication  by  the  United  States  National  ]Mu- 
seum  of  papers  on  the  insects,  birds,  and  fishes  taken  on  the  voyage. 

Also,  in  1929,  the  Cornelius  Crane  Pacific  Expedition  from  the 
Field  ^Museum  of  Natural  History,  Chicago,  with  Karl  P.  Schmidt  as 
head  of  the  scientific  staff,  spent  ten  days  in  the  islands  in  January, 
1929.  This  voyage  was  made  on  the  brigantine  lUyria.  Mr.  Sidney 
Shurecliffe,  a  member  of  the  party,  gives  an  account  of  the  Galapagos 
sto]i  in  Jungle  Islands — The  Illyria  in  the  South  Seas. 

The  Vincent  Astor  Expedition  of  3930,  on  the  yacht  Nourmahal, 
explored  the  interior  of  Indefatigable  Island,  climbed  to  an  elevation 
of  1,200  feet,  and  brought  back  several  of  the  giant  land  tortoises. 

William  K.  Vanderbilt,  on  his  yacht  Ara,  visited  the  Islands  in 
1928.  Again  in  1931-1932  during  his  cruise  around  the  world  on  the 
yacht  Alva,  he  stopped  at  the  Galapagos.  Among  the  specimens  col- 
lected on  his  first  voyage  was  a  new  species  of  shark,  the  band-tailed 
cat  shark  (Pristurus  arae)  which  is  described  in  liis  book  To  Galapa- 
gos on  the  Ara.  The  findings  of  the  cruises  of  the  Ara  and  Alva  are 
pul)lished  in  the  Bulletin  of  tlie  Vanderbilt  Marine  Museum  at  TTunt- 
ingfon,  Ijong  Ishand,  New  York. 

The  Templeton  Crocker  Expedition  of  1932  spent  from  Ai>ril  15 
to  June  in  ill  tlic  islands  making  collections  of  insects,  fishes,  shells. 


No.  25 J 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


125 


Fig.  26.  Templeton  Crocker's  yacht  Zaca.  118  feet  over  all.  was  a  strongly- 
constructed  two-masted  schooner  and  a  deep-sea  vessel.  Her  cruise  to  the  Ga- 
lapagos was  a  noteworthy  one,  both  from  the  standpoint  of  surveying  and  that 
of  natural  history. 

fossils,  and  birds,  the  artist  Mr.  Toshio  Asaeda  making  many  water 
colors  of  fishes  and  taking  a  large  series  of  photographs.  The  expedi- 
tion visited  thirteen  of  the  islands:  Albemarle,  Bindloe,  Brattle, 
Charles,  Chatham,  Duncan,  Hood,  Indefatigable,  James,  Jervis,  Nar- 
borough,  South  Seymour,  and  Tower. 

The  Philadelphia  Academy  of  Natural  Sciences  lists  two  expedi- 
tions to  the  islands:  the  Dennison  Crockett  on  the  yacht  Chiva  in  1936, 
and  the  following  year  the  George  Vanderbilt  South  Pacific  Expedi- 
tion on  the  yacht  Cressida.  The  Trail  of  the  Money  Bird  by  Dillon 
Ripley  speaks  of  this  voyage. 

An  important  expedition  of  late  years  is  the  Swedish  Deep-Sea 
Expedition  conducted  by  the  noted  oceanographer  Dr.  Hans  Petter- 
son  on  the  Swedish  motor  schooner  Alhatross  in  1947-1948,  under 
the  command  of  Captain  N.  Kraftt.  Swedish  scientists  having  devel- 
oped a  satisfactory  apparatus  for  bringing  up  core  samples  from  great 


126  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papkrs 

ocean  deptlis,  visited  the  Galapagos,  taking  samples  from  great  depths 
on  the  Galapagos  plateau.  They  were  the  first  to  accomplish  this  feat. 
Besides  the  oceanographic  work,  a  landing  party  spent  five  days  on 
James  Island  collecting  plant  life  for  Professor  Carl  Skottsberg, 
Swedish  authority  on  Pacific  island  flora. 

Sponsored  by  the  Office  of  Naval  Research  and  ]\Ir.  Woodrow  G. 
Krieger,  whose  yacht  Observe)-  was  turned  over  to  the  expedition.  Dr. 
Bruce  AV.  lialstead,  of  the  School  of  Tropical  and  Preventive  Medicine 
at  Loma  Linda,  California,  conducted  an  expedition  to  Galapagos 
waters  from  December  4,  1952,  to  January  28,  1953  for  the  purpose 
of  studying  the  poisonous  and  venomous  fishes  found  in  those  waters. 

AIR  BASE 

Aviation  was  practically  in  its  infancy  when  World  War  I  broke 
out  and  the  air  fleets  of  the  time  were  not  considered  the  hazard  they 
are  today.  At  that  time  Uncle  Sam  had  only  to  keep  his  eye  on  the 
Galapagos  to  see  that  no  enemy  occupied  them;  as  a  matter  of  fact, 
Galapagos  waters  were  not  considered  a  theatre  of  war  in  that  con- 
flict, though  Admiral  von  Spec,  with  the  German  Asiatic  Fleet  en 
route  to  the  Falkland  Islands,  stopped  at  Villamil  to  secure  fresh 
meat. 

When  the  second  war  broke,  however,  it  was  an  entirely  different 
matter,  the  air  forces  of  our  enemies  being  a  power  that  had  to  be 
reckoned  with  at  once  and  with  all  possible  speed.  The  eyes  of  the 
United  States  were  at  once  focused  on  the  Galapagos  as  a  base  from 
which  to  patrol  the  waters  adjacent  to  the  Panama  Canal,  and  Ecua- 
dor, being  informed  of  the  necessity  of  an  air  base  there,  gave  per- 
mission for  its  establishment. 

Seymour  Island  was  chosen  as  the  most  advantageous  site  and,  be- 
ing flat  and  low,  did  not  offer  the  difficulties  that  existed  on  other 
islands.  Also,  the  prevailing  winds  being  from  the  southeast  and 
favorable  for  landings,  the  planes  could  come  in  from  the  open  ocean 
with  no  islands  of  any  height  to  pass  over.  As  soon  as  the  arrange- 
ments with  the  Government  of  Ecuador  were  concluded,  equipment  for 
llio  construction  of  the  base  was  landed  with  war-time  speed,  and  before 
long  a  well-established  air  base  was  in  o])eration  with  quonset  huts, 
machine  shops,  air  strips,  and  a  plant  for  distilling  sea  water.  As  time 
went  on  reci-eation  lialls  and  a  library  were  added,  and  even  a  ncws- 
pa])ci',  caUod  Thr  IxocJ:,  was  in  circulation. 

Fi-om  the  Seymour  Island  base,  the  Sixth  Army  Air  Force  patrolled 
the  waters  adjacent  lo  the  Galapagos  and  the  Canal,  evidently  with 


No.  1*5 j  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  127 

success  as  no  damage  was  done  to  that  all  important  waterway  tliroiigh- 
out  the  conflict.  On  July  15,  1946,  the  American  flag  was  hauled  down 
and  shortly  afterwards  the  base  was  abandoned. 

The  establishment  of  the  Sixth  Army  Base,  however,  did  not  bring 
liio  first  })lanes  to  the  (xalapagos.  These  arrived  in  1934,  when,  one 
William  Kobinson,  on  his  yacht  Svaap,  was  making  a  study  of  the  flora 
and  fauna  of  the  islands.  Stricken  with  appendicitis  while  at  anchor 
in  Tagus  Cove,  the  situation  became  desperate  and  help  had  to  be 
found.  By  good  fortune,  the  tuna  clipper  Santa  Cruz  was  in  the  vicin- 
ity and  contact  being  made  with  her,  a  wireless  message  was  dispatched 
to  Panama  for  help.  The  Navy  came  to  the  rescue  and,  as  soon  as  per- 
mission was  given  for  the  flight,  two  planes  with  surgeons  on  board 
were  on  their  way  to  Tagus  Cove,  followed  by  the  destroyer  Hah.  The 
miracle  of  wireless  saved  the  patient's  life  and  the  first  flight  of  planes 
to  the  Galapagos  was  recorded. 

TORTOISES 

Tlie  gigantic  land  tortoises  from  which  the  archipelago  gets  its' 
name,  were  known  as  "turpin,"  "termpin,"  or  "terrapin""  to  the 
whalers.  They  are,  of  course,  the  most  striking  objects  of  the  Galapa- 
gos fauna.  Formerly  inhabiting  the  islands  by  the  thousands,  they 
without  doubt  made  the  whaling  industry  possible  in  the  early  days 
by  providing  a  constant  supply  of  fresh  meat,  thus  preventing  scurvy, 
the  scourge  of  the  ancient  mariner.  As  these  animals  can  go  for 
long  periods  without  food  or  water,  the  whale  ships  could  stow  away 
great  numbers  of  them  between  decks  and,  as  far  as  fresh  meat  was 
concerned,  there  was  always  a  plentiful  supply,  enabling  the  vessels 
to  stay  at  sea  for  extended  cruises.  New  England  whalers  having^ 
been  known  to  make  voyages  of  two  years  and  more. 

Even  though  the  early  buccaneers  made  use  of  Galapagos  tortoises 
for  food  as  early  as  1684,  inroads  on  the  tortoise  population  really 
began  with  the  advent  of  the  first  whalers  in  the  Pacific  in  the  late 
1700"s,  and  from  that  time  on  to  the  late  1850's,  the  whaling  industry 
caused  a  tremendous  drain  on  the  tortoise  population.  Besides  the 
actual  records  of  over  13,000  tortoises,  mentioned  in  Dr.  Townsend's 
report  on  the  American  Whalers'  logs  examined,^"  an  additional  thou- 
sand are  mentioned  as  being  taken  by  various  wlialers  and  merchant 
ships  whose  logs  were  not  examined.  Then,  too,  many  British  whalers, 
whose  logs  were  not  available,  also  took  a  heavy  toll.   As  an  example 


^^  Zoologka,  vol.  IV,  no.  3,  1925. 


128  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

of  the  number  of  tortoises  taken  by  a  single  ship,  in  October  1820, 
the  whaler  Essex  of  Nantucket,  in  command  of  Captain  George  Pol- 
lard, took  300  tortoises  from  Hood  Island  and  60  from  Charles. 

Hunting  for  fur  bearing  animals  was  a  common  occupation  in  early 
times,  as  it  is  now,  and  many  hardy  mariners  came  to  the  shores  of 
the  Galapagos  in  quest  of  the  fur  seal.  These  vessels  also  took  their 
toll  of  tortoises. 

George  Little  was  a  small  boy  on  the  ship  Dromo,  600  tons  and 
mounting  26  guns,  w^hen  he  sailed  from  Boston  bound  for  the  Galapa- 
gos in  quest  of  fur  seals.  On  May  11,  1807,  the  ship  anchored  in  Ste- 
phens Bay,  Chatham  Island,  and  according  to  his  own  account  which 
follows,  the  Dromo  took  170  tortoises  from  the  vicinity  of  the  anchor- 


age: 


May  11,  1801 :  Our  five  boats  were  all  hoisted  out  at  daylight,  and 
sixty  men  went  on  shore  with  the  intention  of  making  two  parties, 
one  to  take  a  terrapin,  and  the  other  turtle.  We  succeeded  beyond 
our  most  sanguin  expectations,  having  taken  upwards  of  twenty  fine 
large  turtle,  and  as  many  terrapin,  some  of  which  were  of  immense 
size,  weighing  from  fifty  to  three  hundred  pounds.  We  found  con- 
siderable difficulty  in  capturing  the  terrapin,  not  only  on  account 
of  their  size,  but  also  from  their  color,  which  bore  exactly  the  same 
appearance  as  the  ground,  a  dark  brown,  and  which  oftentimes  eluded 
the  vigilance  of  the  keenest  eye.  We  remained  in  this  place  four 
days  [this  place  refers  to  Stephens  Bay  at  Chatham  Island]  dur- 
ing which  time  we  caught  150  turtle  and  succeeded  in  getting  on 
board  170  terrapin. 

May  16,  1807 :  Got  under  way  and  stood  to  sea,  our  intention  being 
to  run  to  James  Island.  The  wind  being  light,  we  did  not  make  it 
until  the  20th,  at  9  A.  M.  Ran  close  in  to  leeward,  and  anchored  at 
20  fathoms,  the  shore  presenting  a  fine  long  sandy  beach,  on  which 
we  landed  with  our  boats  without  any  difficulty. 

James  Island  is  situated  in  12'  south  latitude,  and  90°  41'  West 
longitude,  and  although  not  so  large  as  Chatham,  yet  in  its  soil  it 
is  similar  in  may  parts  of  the  island;  but  on  the  south  side  vegeta- 
tion is  more  abundant.  Here,  again,  we  were  doomed  to  disappoint- 
ment; no  water  was  to  be  found  after  a  search  of  five  days;  but  we 
caught  a  few  fine  turtle  and  procured  a  quantity  of  brushwood.  Ter- 
rapin was  nowhere  to  be  found. 

The  terrapin  is  the  best  fresh  sea  stock  that  can  be  procured,  be- 
cause they  are  attended  with  no  expense,  and  will  live  for  months 
without  food  or  water.  In  proof  of  this,  as  soon  as  they  were  taken, 
we  stowed  the  greater  part  of  them  down  in  the  forepeak  and  used 
them  as  occasion  required,  the  last  of  which  was  not  killed  until  about 
seven  months  after  it  was  taken,  and  when  prepared  for  cooking  was 
quite  as  fat  as  any  of  the  former. 


No.  25] 


SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 


129 


Fig.  27.  A  typical  wateiliole  scene  of  1901  on  top  of  Villamil  Mountain, 
Albemarle  Island,  the  site  of  probably  the  largest  tortoise  colony  on  the  islands 
until  the  oil  hunters  began  operations. 


Later,  in  December  1824,  Captain  Benjamin  Morrell  in  the  sealing 
scliooner  Wasiy  took  100  tortoises  off  Charles  Island. 

During  the  gold  rush  days  in  California  when  food  was  somewhat 
of  a  problem,  trading  schooners  fitted  out  for  voyages  to  South  Amer- 
ica and  brought  back  cargos  of  onions  and  potatoes  for  the  California 
market  and,  if  they  were  lucky  in  their  venture,  tortoises  from  the 
Galapagos.  With  the  high  prices  at  the  time,  potatoes  selling  at  25 
cents  a  pound  and  onions  at  a  dollar  apiece,  many  ship  owners  thought 
the  venture  worth  while.  On  January  12,  1850,  the  schooner  Three 
Hills  left  San  Francisco  bound  for  the  Calapagos,  thence  to  go  to 
Porta,  Peru,  to  take  on  a  cargo  of  potatoes  and  onions  and  then  to 
return  to  the  Galapagos  for  a  deckload  of  tortoises.  Besides  picking 
up  225,000  pounds  of  potatoes  and  50,000  pounds  of  onions  at  one  dol- 
lar each,  it  was  planned  to  take  on  board  100  tortoises  which  were 
to  be  sold  at  $50  each.  The  Three  Hills,  however,  met  the  fate  of 
many  a  visitor  to  the  Enchanted  Isles.  Being  caught  in  a  calm  and 
drifting  about  with  the  variable  currents,  she  lost  most  of  her  pota- 
toes and  onions.  Instead  of  100  tortoises  at  50  dollars  each,  only  20 
were  secured  and  sold  at  $10  each,  so  instead  of  making  a  net  profit 
of  $88,125.00  on  her  cargo  as  was  planned,  she  suffered  a  loss  of 
$3,350.00. 


130 


CALIFORNIA    ACADEMY    OF    SCIENCES 


[Oc.  Papi:rs 


Some  five  years  later,  however,  on  May  13,  1855,  a  San  Francisco 
paper  announced  the  arrival  of  the  schooner  Tarlton  with  a  cargo  of 
580  tortoises,  the  largest  quantity  ever  brought  in  at  one  time.  As 
late  as  1902,  the  schooner  W.  S.  Phelps,  captain  Richard  Nye,  arrived 
at  San  Francisco  with  37  tortoises  w^hich  the  captain  considered  the 
most  profitable  part  of  his  cargo. 

Oil  hunters  w^ere  another  source  of  destruction  and  caused  the 
practical  extermination  of  the  tortoise  population  in  certain  areas, 
sucli  as  Villamil  Mountain  on  southern  Albemarle.  These  hunters 
systematically  killed  off  the  larger  tortoises  as  they  contained  the  most 
fat.  That  the  remainder  survive  is  due  to  the  fact  it  no  longer  paid 
to  hunt  them. 

It  excited  interest  just  how  the  whalers  hunted  these  giant  creatures 
and  got  them  on  board  ship.  The  following  sailor's  epistle  sent  home^^ 
gives  a  very  excellent  account  and  shows  that  the  life  of  a  whaler 
was  no  "bed  of  roses": 


fSSS^SIfi 


Fig.  :^8.  Tho  oil  huiittTs  left  this  scene  of  devastation  behind  them.  The 
largest  tortoises  containing  the  most  fat  were  practically  exteiniinated.  leaving 
only  the  smaller  ones  which  were  not  worthy  of  their  attention. 


1'  Taken  from  Thr  Friiiid.  a  ioiirnal  devoted  to  seamen  and  marine  intelliKence  in  g;-ncral 


No.  25J  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  131 

For  three  days  the  crew  of  our  ship  had  been  ashore  on  Chatham 
Island  and  brought  back  with  them  two  or  three  boat  loads  of  the 
most  desirable  animals  which  abound  on  these  islands.  They  always 
come  back  nearly  exhausted,  and  their  feet  and  hands  were  well  torn 
with  briars.  Clothes  which  were  whole  in  the  morning  were  rags  at 
night,  and  new  shoes  were  all  gone  save  possibly  a  small  portion  of 
the  upper  leather.  Hats  were  shocking  bad,  and  the  appearance  of 
all  betokened  hard  service.  I  should  here  remark  that  for  four  days 
we  had  been  anchored  off  Chatham  Island,  one  of  the  largest  of  the 
Gallipagos  group.  Our  ship  lay  about  two  miles  from  a  sand  beach 
which  had  been  selected,  as  affording  a  good  place  to  land.  At  10 
A.  M.  we  lowered  a  boat  and  pulled  ashore.  The  surf  was  somewhat 
heavy,  breaking  over  a  reef,  but  we  found  the  landing  very  good. 
Having  hauled  our  boat  up  alongside  the  three  boats  already  on 
shore,  our  party,  consisting  of  Captain  A.,  Mr.  M.,  3rd  mate,  the  ship- 
keeper  and  self,  started,  just  taking  a  drink  of  water  from  the  boat 
kegs  on  shore.  We  had  provided  ourselves  with  a  few  oranges  and 
a  small  flask  of  lime  juice  mixed  v/ith  water.  The  path  took  us 
immediately  into  thick  bushes,  many  of  which  were  cotton  bushes 
here  growing  wild,  which,  saving  in  the  path,  were  very  thick.  Other 
bushes  were  covered  with  long  sharp  briars  and  were  entwined  all 
around,  so  that  to  force  your  way  through  them  subjected  you  to  hav- 
ing your  hands  and  ankles  torn.  A  small  bush  bore  red  berries, 
which  we  tasted,  but  so  bitter  were  they  that  our  mouths  were  hours 
recovering  their  natural  taste.  The  path  soon  became  very  rough 
and  was  covered  with  bits  of  lava,  broken  and  very  destructive  from 
the  sharp  edges  to  feet  and  shoes.  Ahead  of  us  was  a  lofty  mountain, 
and  on  our  right  hand  another,  barren  and  rough  in  the  extreme. 
The  first  two  miles  went  off  pretty  well,  Captain  A.  being  naturally 
a  fast  traveler,  led  the  way,  followed  closely  by  us,  Indian  file.  Mr. 
M.  took  with  him  a  tin  horn,  and  as  we  passed  along,  would  blow 
a  blast,  hoping  soon  to  fall  in  with  some  of  our  shipmates  on  the 
road  to  the  boats.  Presently  shouts  answered  our  horn,  and  the  chief 
and  second  mates  of  our  ship  met  us.  The  former  had  one  large  ter- 
rapin, the  second  two  of  smaller  size,  slung  to  their  backs.  Behind 
them  was  Jackson  with  a  still  larger  one.  They  cheered  us  heartily. 
We  stopped  a  moment  and  were  directed  by  them  which  path  to  pur- 
sue, as  our  path  forked  just  ahead.  They  looked  very  much  fatigued, 
and  pointed  to  a  still  more  distant  mountain,  which  they  had  crossed 
and  found  terrapin  in  abundance.  They  had  with  them  part  of  a 
bottle  of  water  and  did  not  need  any  assistance.  Passing  along  half 
a  mile  toward  the  mountain  we  met  Jim  Hall,  a  kanaka.  Under  a 
cabbage  tree  lay  Jim  with  a  terrapin  of  large  size  and  small  one,  a 
heavy  load  for  the  man.  The  tree  afforded  him  some  shade,  but 
he  was  evidently  much  exhausted.  Mr.  M.  gave  him  an  orange, 
which  he  ate  with  much  satisfaction.  The  cabbage  tree  is  a  curious 
shrub  growing  about  15  feet  in  height.  The  leaves  are  like  the 
prickly  pear,  of  oval  shape  and  about  one  foot  in  circumference,  of 
light  green  color.  The  trunk  is,  in  some  cases,  as  large  as  a  man's 
body,  and  when  cut  appears  like  a  cabbage  stalk,  the  outer  bark 


132  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papi:rs 

like  a  pitch  pine  tree.  There  is  much  juice  in  the  leaves,  and  they 
afford  excellent  food  for  the  terrapin.  As  a  substitute  for  water, 
nothing  could  by  more  valuable  to  this  singular  animal,  for  their 
island  home  being  sometimes  for  months  without  rain  and  no  springs 
of  fresh  water  being  found,  nature  has  kindly  provided  them  with 
this  tree,  which  answers  well  for  food  and  water.  The  sun  was 
blazing  down  upon  us,  and  before  we  were  half  way  to  the  ground, 
I  almost  regretted  having  started.  Every  moment  the  road  grew 
more  rough  and  the  sharp  edges  of  lava  made  serious  inroads  into 
the  soles  and  sides  of  our  shoes.  We,  in  the  course  of  an  hour, 
reached  the  base  of  the  mountain  for  which  we  were  steering.  Rugged 
indeed  was  the  side  presented  to  us.  It  rose  very  nearly  perpen- 
dicular to  the  height  of  fifteen  hundred  feet.  Huge  masses  of  calcined 
lava  seemed  to  form  its  foundation,  and  no  doubt  it  had  been  a  vol- 
cano. But  our  time  would  not  permit  us  to  ascend  its  summit. 
Just  here  we  met  two  other  of  our  kanakas.  They  were  boys,  but 
each  bore  his  terrapin.  One,  a  very  small  lad  of  12  years,  had 
one  of  considerable  size,  and  he  held  it  up  to  our  captain  with  much 
satisfaction.  They  had  part  of  a  bottle  of  water  with  them.  On 
questioning  them  as  to  the  best  on  which  to  find  terrapin,  they 
offered  to  go  and  show  us  plenty,  but  we  declined,  as  they  had  al- 
ready brought  down  a  load  before.  After  rounding  the  base  of  the 
mountain,  we  concluded  to  divide  our  party,  the  "old  man,"  as  the 
master  of  whale  ships  is  always  called,  and  myself  taking  the  right 
hand,  and  Mr.  M.  and  the  shipkeeper  the  left.  We  were  on  terra- 
pin ground,  and  now  to  find  them.  We  looked  among  the  bushes 
and  rocks,  but  could  see  none.  Presently  we  heard  Mr.  M.  shout- 
ing: "Town  0!",  which  is  a  signal  when  a  terrapin  is  found.  We 
did  not  join  them  as  they  were  some  distance  from  us.  After  look- 
ing in  vain  for  some  time  for  the  game  we  were  in  search  of,  we 
travelled  on  and  reached  the  top  of  a  smaller  mountain.  Its  sides 
were  quite  smooth,  but  covered  with  bushes.  Having  descended  on 
the  other  side,  we  reached  a  valley  abounding  with  rough  stones, 
the  passage  across  which  was  very  difficult.  Bushes  full  of  thorns 
we  met  at  every  step,  and  if  you  took  hold  of  them  to  keep  you 
from  slipping  from  the  stones,  your  hands  would  be  severely  lac- 
erated. The  ground  now  rising,  led  us  to  a  huge  crater  more  than 
a  mile  in  circumference,  and  in  depth  several  hundred  feet.  It 
presented  a  singular  and  grand  spectacle,  its  vast  size,  the  sides 
and  bottom  overgrown  with  trees  and  bushes,  the  rough  lava, 
the  awful  stillness  around,  all  was  grand  and  sublime.  We  were 
amazed  as  we  stood  upon  the  edge  of  this  mighty  work  of  Him 
whose  skill  formed  the  mountain  and  the  seas.  Our  heads  swam 
as  we  looked  down  its  awful  depth,  the  reflection  striking  us. 
Should  we  fall,  hope  would  no  longer  be  a  virtue.  From  top  to 
bottom  is  was  a  straight  line.  All  around  was  immense  blocks 
of  lava,  all  black  as  coal.  A  short  distance  from  this  we  came  to 
another  crater  of  smaller  size.  It  was  overgrown,  as  the  first  men- 
tioned, with  trees  and  bushes,  and  could  not  have  been  burning 
for  many  years.    It  was,   if  possible,   still   more  rough,   and   W(>   did 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  133 

not  dare  look  at  its  depth,  as  the  top  overhung  the  opening  in 
part,  and  one  look  satisfied  us.  On  the  edge  of  this  crater  we 
each  ate  an  orange.  Our  thirst  was  very  great,  but  we  could  not 
as  yet  taste  our  water.  No  terrapin  appeared  about,  and  we  con- 
cluded to  descend  into  another  valley  of  great  extent.  Having 
passed  this  and  ascended  a  rising,  we  saw  a  line  of  cabbage  trees. 
Under  one  we  saw  a  very  large  male  terrapin,  far  above  our 
ability  to  carry,  and  on  looking  a  little  farther,  we  found  almost 
under  every  tree  one  of  the  same  kind.  These  huge  creatures 
sat  unconcerned,  and  it  was  our  impression  that  they  had  been 
here  for  the  last  five  hundred  years.  When  distuibed,  they  draw 
in  their  feet,  drop  tlieir  lower  shell  on  the  ground  and  make  a 
hissing  noise  not  unlike  a  snake.  They  do  not  offer  to  bite,  neither 
will  they  run.  Some  of  them  were  eating  cabbage  leaves,  which 
had  fallen  from  the  trees.  Here  again  how  wonderful  are  the 
arrangements  of  Him  who  provides  food,  but  few  facilities  for  ob- 
taining food,  neither  being  able  to  climb  trees,  or  to  kill  other 
animals,  so  slow  is  their  motion.  Under  these  trees,  which  afford 
them  comfortable  shade,  they  rest,  watching  the  fall  of  a  leaf,  and 
when  it  falls  they  eat  it.  If  one  sliould  not  fall  for  a  month,  why, 
he  could  remain  without  eating,  but  from  paths  leading  from  tree 
to  tree,  no  doubt  they  move  from  one  to  another.  We  now  went  a 
little  further  and  found  two  of  about  the  right  size.  With  two 
bits  of  canvas,  as  straps,  we  fastened  their  legs  and  placed  them 
on  our  backs,  precisely  as  a  soldier  does  his  knapsack,  the  strings 
passing  under  our  arms.  The  weight  of  each  was  about  fifty  to 
sixty  pounds.  We,  now  having  secured  our  prizes,  each  took  a 
swallow  of  water.  At  the  first  start  we  found  but  little  difficulty, 
the  path  being  quite  smooth,  but  soon  we  came  to  stones  and 
bushes,  and  the  weight  on  our  backs  made  us  stagger,  as  we 
jumped  from  one  rock  to  another.  We  lost  our  way  and  struck  into 
the  thickest   range   of  bushes   we   had  yet  met  with.     It  was   now 

three    o'clock.    The    sun    blazed    down    like    what nothing    like 

the   sun   on   the   line our    mouths   were    parched    and    each    step 

we  took  only  led  us  from  better  to  worse.  Every  few  minutes  we 
would  lose  sight  of  each  other  in  the  bushes  and  have  to  halloo 
in  order  not  to  get  lost.    We  walked   about  half  a  mile  and  then 

took    off   our    load   and    rested again    all    ready sharp    stones 

grew  more  thick,  and  we  were  disheartened  at  losing  the  path. 
We  altered  our  course  and  hoped  of  meeting  a  better  one,  but  none 
could  we  find.  Again  we  rested.  I  wished  the  terrapin  were  all 
in  Jerico,  for  with  or  without  them,  we  had  at  least  ten  miles 
to  travel  before  we  could  reach  the  beach.  Here  we  concluded  to 
eat  our  last  two  oranges,  and  you  cannot  imagine  our  disappoint- 
ment when,  on  feeling  for  them,  to  find  that  I  had  lost  them  from 
my  pocket.  It  appears  a  small  matter,  but  I  can  assure  you  that 
their  value  to  us  at  that  time,  was  very,  very  great. 

Occasionally  we  would  get  a  glimpse  of  the  ocean  and  our  ship 
in  the  distance,  and  never  did  I,  in  my  boyish  days,  so  long  to 
get  home  as  I  now  did  to  be  safe  on  board  the  good   craft.    Just 


334  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

now  Capt.  A.  slipped  and  fell  from  one  rock  to  another  below  him, 
bruising  his  knee.  He  recovered  himself  without  any  further  in- 
jury. We  could  find  no  traces  of  a  path,  and  we  were  about  to 
leave  our  terrapin  behind,  but  the  reflection  that  all  our  shipmates 
would  laugh  at  us,  induced  us  to  press  on,  and  if  we  did  fail,  to 
try  at  least  to  fall  in  with  some  of  them  and  let  them  see  that  we 
had  at  least  tried  to  do  our  duty.  Here  I  should  remark,  that 
from  the  time  we  had  landed  until  we  left  in  our  boats  to  go  on 
board,  we  had  been  followed  by  a  host  of  large  flies  of  a  bluish 
green  color,  who,  without  cessation,  would  light  upon  our  faces 
and  hands  and  particularly  the  lips,  their  bite  was  sharp,  and  it 
was  only  by  constant  brushing  that  we  could  partially  keep  them 
away.  I  have  seen  flies  before,  but  never  any  that  would  for  so 
many  miles  follow  a  traveler.  Often  we  passed  the  spots  in  the 
sand  where  the  terrapin  deposits  its  eggs.  They  were  nicely  cov- 
ered over  and  there  left  for  the  sun  to  complete  the  work  of  incu- 
bation. In  size  they  were  a  little  larger  than  a  goose  egg.  perfectly 
round,  and  the  shell  of  same  like  that  of  the  fowl.  How  long 
they  remain  before  hatching  I  could  not  ascertain  or  how  long 
before  the  animal  reaches  maturity.  We  now  retraced  a  part  of 
our  steps  and  struck  a  path  more  clear  of  bushes  and  clinkers, 
and  found  quite  a  good  path.  Here  we  ventured  to  take  another 
swallow  of  water.  After  another  hour's  travel  we  met  the  cooper, 
our  boat  steerer,  and  the  steward.  So  intent  were  they  in  pursuit 
of  game,  that  though  we  passed  within  a  few  feet,  they  did  not 
notice  us  until  we  "sung  out"  to  them.  They  had  been  twice  to 
the  boats,  each  time  with  terrapin,  and  told  us  that  we  had  gone 
in  the  wrong  direction;  that  they  should  soon  return  to  the  boats, 
for  their  terrapin  ground  was  close  by.  The  cooper  gave  us  a 
draught  of  water,  each  of  his  party  having  a  full  bottle  with  them. 
We  now  started  in  good  spirits  and  soon  fell  in  with  the  chief 
mate,  who  had  brought  for  us  a  small  keg  of  water  at  a  cross- 
road, and  was  waiting  for  us  to  come.  He  kindly  offered  to  take 
either  of  our  terrapin  for  us,  and  we  allowed  him  to  take  one  from 
Tjs  by  turns.  We  had  about  five  miles  to  travel,  and  after  winding 
around  the  base  of  the  mountain  first  spoken  of,  the  path  was 
excellent  in  comparison  to  that  which  we  had  passed  over.  From 
his  water  keg  I  drank  freely.  Never  did  water  taste  so  good;  lips 
were  parched,  tongue  dry  and  swollen.  We  soon  reached  the  beach, 
and  with  some  satisfaction  laid  down  our  terrapin.  They  were  pro- 
nounced good  size,  and  an  old  sailor  patted  me  on  the  shoulder 
and  said  "Well  done".  The  ensign  was  flying  at  the  mizzen  peak 
of  oui-  ship,  and  looking  out  to  seaward  we  saw  a  small  brig  stand- 
ing close  to  shore.  As  this  was  just  in  the  midst  of  the  Mexican 
War,  and  privateers  might  be  about,  the  old  man  gave  orders  to 
launch  the  boats  and  go  aboard.  She  proved  to  be  a  Columbian 
schooner  who  visited  these  islands  to  take  terrapin  oil  to  the  Span- 
ish main.  Our  boats  l)rought  off  that  day  thirty-seven  terrapin, 
which,  with  those  on  board,  made  one  hundred  and  thirty  collected 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  135 

in  four  days.    Some  of  these  were  of  large  size  and  were   carried 
by   three    men,    some   so    small    that   one    man    could    carry    two. 

It  is  a  happy  provision  of  nature  that  these  animals  are  placed 
on  these  islands;  they  furnish  a  most  excellent  recruit  for  ships 
cruising  in  this  part  of  the  Pacific  Ocean,  and  when  it  is  remem- 
bered that  they  may  be  on  board  for  six  or  nine  months  without 
food  or  water,  it  will  be  seen  that  they  are  almost  invaluable. 
Aye!    says  the  old  man,  if  we  only  had  these   in   New  York,  what 

a  beautiful  sum  they  would  fetch and  how  well  they  would  fill 

the  bellies  of  some  of  the  hungry  men  at  Washington and  how 

for  four  months  have  we  lived  on  terrapin   soup  every  other  day 

morning,   noon  and   night sea  pies   made   savory   with   good 

things who    would    not    go    a    whaling.      The    next    morning    we 

weighed  anchor  and  stood  along  to  a  settlement  about  a  day's 
sail  from  where  we  took  our  terrapin,  and  purchased  fifty  more 
of  large  size.  The  residents  here  are  about  twenty  in  number,  the 
chief  man  is  named  Williams,  an  Englishman.  His  colony  is  com- 
posed of  Spaniards,  and  Americans  and  two  slaves.  He  visited  our 
ship  and  received  trade  for  his  terrapin,  cloth,  etc.,  charging  us 
from  50  to  75  cts.  each  for  them.  He  has  two  or  three  hundred 
of  them  always  on  hand  for  such  ships  as  may  call  on  him.  After 
a  delay  of  a  few  hours  we  stood  away  for  another  cruising  ground. 

[Signed]     Camillas 

PKESERVATION  OF  THE  GALAPAGOS  FAUNA 

The  ]:>i'obleni  of  conserving:  the  Galai^agos  fauna  had  been  promi- 
nent in  the  minds  of  naturalists  for  many  years,  but  it  was  not  until 
com]iaratively  recently  that  they  became  thoroughly  alarmed  at  the 
conditions  which  existed.  The  reptiles  most  in  danger,  of  course,  are 
the  giant  tortoises  and  the  iguanas,  particularly  the  land  forms.  Like- 
wise in  great  danger  are  many  species  of  birds,  jDarticularly  the  cor- 
morants, penguins,  flamingos,  and  doves.  It  was  not  until  such  men 
as  Robert  Moore  of  The  American  Committee  for  International  Wild 
Life;  Dr.  John  C.  Merriam,  President  of  tlie  Carnegie  Institution  of 
AVashington;  Mr.  11.  \V.  Parker  of  the  British  Museum  of  Natural 
History,  London,  England;  ^Iv.  Harry  S.  Swarth  of  the  California 
Academy  of  Sciences;  and  many  others  too  numerous  to  mention 
started  an  active  campaign  that  the  wheels  were  set  in  motion  and 
the  Government  of  Ecuador  was  contacted.  After  several  months  of 
study,  a  plan  was  submitted,  and  with  some  modifications  a]>]iroved, 
and  His  Excellency,  President  Abolardo  Montalvo,  published  the  de- 
cree known  as  "Poder  Executive  No.  807,  Parte  Tercera."  This,  in 
short,  names  the  birds,  animals,  and  rej^tiles  that  are  strictly  pro- 
tected, names  the  islands  that  are  set  aside  as  game  preserves,  and 
declares  that  all  vessels  visiting  the  Galapagos  must  call  first  at  Chat- 


136 


CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 


Fig.  29.  Monument  erected  at  Wreck  Bay,  Chatham  Island,  the  first  of  the 
Galapagos  Islands  on  which  Darwin  landed  during  the  memorable  voyage  of 
the  Beagle. 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  137 

ham  Islaiul,  tlie  scat  oi'  the  government.  The  American  Committee  for 
International  Wikl  Life  Protection  issued  a  circular  for  the  benefit 
of  American  yachtsmen  calling  attention  to  the  Ecuadorian  laws  and 
also  to  the  U.  S.  Tariff  Act  of  1930  and  Customs  Order  T.  D.  48173, 
of  February  20,  1936,  which  makes  it  mandatory  to  confiscate  all 
Galapagos  fauna,  alive  or  dead,  taken  contrarj^  to  Ecuadorian  law. 

Mr.  Wolfgang  von  Hagen,  naturalist  and  explorer  who  has  written 
much  concerning  the  Galapagos,  was  another  one  who  became  inten- 
sively interested  in  the  preservation  of  the  fauna  and  entertained 
the  idea  of  paying  tribute  to  Danvin  on  the  one-hundredth  anniver- 
sary of  his  landing  on  the  islands.  To  this  end,  he  enlisted  the  help 
of  the  British  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science,  the  Lin- 
nean  Society  of  London,  and  the  American  ^Museum  of  Natural  His- 
tory, the  last  organization  supplying  a  mold  from  which  was  cast  the 
bronze  bust  placed  on  the  pedestal  at  Wreck  Bay,  Chatham  Island,  the 
island  on  which  Darwin  first  landed. 

The  following  inscription,  written  by  the  late  Major  Leonard  Dar- 
win, at  that  time  Darwin's  only  surviving  son,  w^as  placed  thereon: 

CHARLES  DARWIN 

Landed  on  the  Galapagos  Islands  in 
1835  and  his  studies  of  the  distribu- 
tion of  ariimals  and  phmts  thereon  led 
him  for  the  first  time  to  consider  the 
problem  of  organic  evolution.  Thus 
was  started  the  revolution  in  thought 
on  this  subject  which  has  since  taken 
place 

Erected  in  1935 

Also,  to  commemorate  this  momentous  occasion,  the  Government 
of  Ecuador  issued  a  set  of  six  stamps  with  appropriate  designs,  the 
one  Sucre  having  a  portrait  of  Columbus,  for  whom  the  islands  were 
named,  the  two  sucre  shows  an  island  coastal  scene,  the  2,  5,  10,  and 
20  centavos  a  map  of  the  islands,  an  iguana,  a  tortoise,  and  the  head 
of  Darwin  respectively. 

Darwin  states  in  his  diary  that  on  September  17,  1835,  he  landed 
on  Chatham  Island  and  although  the  monument  marking  his  landing 
is  at  Wreck  Bay,  he  apparently  set  foot  ashore  at  Stephens  Bay,  ac- 
cording to  the  log  of  H.M.S.  Beagle,  as  shown  by  the  following  entries : 

A.  M.     Wednesday  16th  September  1835 

5  — Saw  Woods    (Hood)    Isld  to   Stbd  — tacked 


138 


CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES 


[Oc.  Pap::rs 


X 


^^x 


'■'-mt' 


/"' 


K 


s^  of  the  jdisLPibii- 

plants  tnepeon  ^ 


f: d;  big]  §m:  it^'Urs^  Ume  lo consid. 

^f^c^^^wnoFt5?^ui.-  evcii^ion .  Thus  -^^  , 

Fig.  oU.    Plaque  ol  monument  erected  in  lionur  oi  Cliailes  Darwin  at  Wreck 
Bay.  Chatham  Island. 

P.  M.     at  1.40  Hove  to,  sounded — made  sail 
at  2.10  trimmed 

at  3.10  rounded  to  for  soundings — made  sail  again  standing 
for  the  S.  W.  end  of  Chatham   Island  at  4.15   shortened  sail 
and  came  to  with  Best  Bower  under  the  north  west  end  of 
Chatham  Island     veered  to  40  fms  and  furled  sails 
Thursday  17th  Septemher  1835 


No.  25J 


SLEVIX:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS 


139 


'--r 


Fig.  31.  The  Albatross  II.  practically  a  sea-going  tug,  was  loaned  by  the 
United  States  Fish  and  Game  Commission  for  a  voyage  to  the  Galapagos  for 
the  purpose  of  bringing  back  enough  tortoises  for  breeding  purposes  in  order 
to  save  the  race  from  extinction. 


A.  M. 

at  8.35  weighed  trimmed  and  made  sail  as  requisite  standing 
along  the  north  side  of  Chatham  Island  at  11  shortened  sail 
and  came  to  in  Stephens  Bay  in  12  fms  at  anchor  in  Ste- 
phens Bay" 

A  noted  conservationist,  the  late  Dr.  C.  II.  Townsend,  formerly 
with  the  U.  S.  Bureau  of  Fisheries,  made  a  voyage  to  the  Galapagos 
in  1928  under  the  auspices  of  the  New  York  Zoological  Society  on 
board  the  U.S.F.S.  Albatross  II,  Captain  G.  A.  Carlson  commanding. 
Tlie  vessel  was  loaned  by  the  Bureau  of  Fisheries  for  tlie  voyage,  the 
express  purpose  of  which  was  to  gather  a  number  of  tortoises  for 
breeding  and  spot  them  in  favorable  localities  in  hopes  that  they  would 
reproduce,  thereby  helping  to  preserve  the  race  in  case  those  in  their 
native  habitat  should  not  be  able  to  withstand  the  ravages  of  their 
enemies.  The  voyage  was  a  decided  success,  one  hundred  and  eighty 
tortoises  being  secured.  These  have  been  scattered  in  colonies  in  Flor- 
ida, Louisiana,  Texas,  Arizona,  California,  Bermuda,  Hawaii,  and 
Australia.  Whether  the  scheme  is  a  success  still  remains  to  l)e  seen, 
but  it  is  at  least  an  effort  to  help  preserve  these  grotesque  creatures 
from  extermination. 

It  is  hoped  by  naturalists  the  world  over  that  this  remarkable 
Galapagos  fauna  may  be  preserved  for  those  who  may  follow  and 
walk  in  the  footsteps  of  Charles  Darwin,  whose  voyage  on  the  Beagle 
made  these  "Enchanted  Isles"  immortal. 


140  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

SELECTED   BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Agassiz,  Alexander 

1892.  General  sketch  of  the  expedition  of  the  Albatross  from  February 
to  May  1891.  Tlie  Galapagos  Islands.  Bulletin  of  the  Mxiseum  of 
Comparative  Zoology,  23(1) :  56-74, 

Agassiz.  Elizabeth  C. 

1873.  A  cruise  through  the  Galapagos.  Atlantic  Monthly,  May  1873,  pp. 
579-584. 

Allan,  R.  C. 

1836.  Remarks  on  some  of  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Nautical  Magazine, 
5:66-68. 

Anderson,  Charles  R. 

1902.  The  White  Whales  Wake  Melville  in  the  South  Seas.  New  York. 
522  pp. 

Anonymous 

1936.  The  Galapagos  as  they  were  in  1817.  Illustrated  London  News, 
98(2556): 687-689. 

1957.    To  save  the  Galapagos.   Zoo,  2(1) :  14-17. 

Banning.  George  H. 

1933.  Hancock  Expedition  of  1933  to  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Bulletin  of 

the  Zoological  Society  of  San  Diego,  no.  10.  May  1933,  30  pp. 

Barker.  G.  N. 

1938.  Third  Presidential  Cruise  of  the  U.S.S.  Houston,  printed  on  board 
U.S.S.  Houston,  1938,  75  pp. 

Barlow,  Nora 

1932.  Robert  Fitz-Roy  and  Charles  Darwin.  Cornhill  Magazine,  April  1932, 
pp.  493-510. 

1934.  Charles  Darwin's  Diary  of  the  Voyage  of  H.M.S.  Beagle,  edited  from 

the  manuscript.   Cambridge,  1934,  451  pp. 

Barrow,  John 

1836.  Sketch  of  the  surveying  voyages  of  His  Majesty's  ships  Adventure 
and  Beagle,  1825-1836.  Commanded  by  Captain  P.  P.  King,  P. 
Stokes,  and  Fitz-Roy,  Royal  Navy.  Communicated  by  Sir  John 
Barrow.  Journal  of  the  Royal  Geographical  Society  of  London, 
6:   pp.  311-343. 

Baur,  George 

1889.  The  gigantic  land  tortoises  of  the  Galapagos  Islands.  American 
Naturalist,  23:1039-1057. 

1891.  Comments  on  the  distribution  of  birds  and  reptiles  on  the  Galdpagos 
Islands.  Americaji  Naturalist,  25:902-907. 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  141 

Bai  R.   Gi;ok(;k — Cont'd 

1892.  Professor   A.   Agassiz   on   the   origin   and    flora   of   the   Galdpagos 

Islands.  Science,  19(477)  :47. 

1893.  The  differentiation  of  species  on  the  Galdpagos  Islands  and   the 

origin  of  the  group.    In  Biological   Lectures,   Marine   Biological 
Laboratory,  Woods  Hole,  Massachusetts,  1893,  pp.  67-68. 

Beagleiiole,  J.  C. 

1934.    Exploration  of  the  Pacific.  London.  410  pp. 

Beck,  R.  H. 

1903.  In  the  home  of  the  giant  tortoise.  Seventh  Annual  Report  of  the 

New    York   Zoological    Society    (Reprint),    New    York,    April    1, 
1903,  pp.  1-17. 

1904.  Bird  life  among  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Condor,  6(1):5-11. 

Beebe,  William 

1923.    Five  hours  in  Galdpagos.  Bulletin  of  the  Neiv  York,  Zoological  So- 
ciety. 27(1)  :  19-26. 

1923.    Galapagos  reptiles  and  birds  in  the  Zoological  Park.   Bulletin  of 
the  New  York  Zoological  Society,  26(5) : 99-106. 

1923.    Galapagos,  Isles  of  the  tortoises.  Asia,  23:809-815. 

1923.  Williams  Galapagos  Expedition.  Zoologica,  5(1):  3-20. 

1924.  Galapagos:  World's  End.  New  York  and  London,  443  pp. 

1924.  Strangest  islands  in  the  seven  seas.  Travel,  23:33-37. 

1925.  Adventures  in  exploration  at  the  World's  End.  Mentor,  13:1-19. 

1925.  Logging  the  Arcturus,  a  visit  to  the  Galapagos.  Bulletin  of  the  New 

York  Zoological  Society,  no.  4,  July,  1925,  pp.  103-116. 

1926.  The  Arcturus  Adventure.  New  York,  1925,  439  pp. 

1926.    Birth  of  a  volcano;   how  Galapagos  World's  End  became  World's 
Beginning.    World  Today,  47:243-257. 

1926.    Birth  of  a  volcano.   Ladies  Home  Journal,  32:237-242. 

1926.    The  Arcturus  Oceanographic  Expedition.  Zoologica,  8:1-45. 

1928.    A  volcanic  aftermath    (Galapagos  Islands).   Bulletin   of   the  New 
York  Zoological  Society,  31(4) :  111-113. 

1937.  Turtle    sanctuary,    Harper's    Monthly   Magazine,    November,    1937, 

pp.  653-660. 

1937    A   week   in   paradise.   Harper's   Monthly   Magazine,    October,    1937, 
pp.  521-529. 

Beebe,  William,  and  Ruth  Rose 

1925.    Second  half  of  Arcturus  adventure  experiences   in  the  Galapagos 
Islands.  Bulletin  of  the  Neio  York  Zoological  Society,  28:119-129 

Benchley,  Belle  J. 

1938.  Treasure  trove.  Zoonooz,  March,  1938,  pp.  1-7. 


142  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papiors 

Blomberg,  Rolf 

1951.    Strange  reptiles  of  the  Galdpagos.  Natural  History,  60(5)  : 234-239. 

BOETTGER,   O. 

1895.  Referet  iiber  "Baur's  differentiation  of  species  on  tlie  Galapagos 
Islands  etc.,"  Zoologischer  Centralblatt,  2:461-463. 

BoGxoLY,  Jose  A.  and  Jose  M.  Espinosa 

1917.  Las  Islas  Encandos  O'el  Archipielago  de  Colon.  Guayaquil,  1917, 
210  pp. 

Breder,  C.  M.,  Jr. 

1925.  A  relative  of  the  Galapagos  tortoise.  Origin  of  the  giant  tortoises 
in  Galapagos  Islands.  Bulletin  of  the  New  York  Zoological  So- 
ciety, 28(3): 64-65. 

British  Foreign  Office 

1920.  Handbooks  prepared  under  the  direction  of  the  Historical  Section 
of  the  Foreign  Office,  nos.  140-143,  London,  1920,  pp.  1-37. 

Brown,  Barnum 

1931.    The  largest  known  land  tortoise.  Natural  History,  31(2)  :183-187. 

BuRNEY,  James 

1816.  A  Chronological  History  of  the  Voyages  and  Discoveries  in  the 
South  Sea  or  Pacific  Ocean  to  the  Year  1723  Including  a  History 
of  the  Buccaneers  of  America.  Vol.  4,  London,  1816,  580  pp. 

Byron,  Lord 

1826.  Voyage  of  the  H.M.S.  Blonde  to  the  Sandwich  Islands  in  the  Years 
1824-1825.    London,  260  pp. 

Calmax,  W.  T. 

1936.  Centenary  of  Darwin's  visit  to  the  Galdpagos  Islands.  Nature,  138 
(3479):15-16. 

Cary,  Byron 

1834.  Note  on  a  large  specimen  of  the  Galapagos  tortoise.  Proceedings 
of  the  Zoological  Society  of  London,  1834,  p.  113. 

CiiAPiN,  James  P. 

1936.  Islands  of  the  west  coast  of  South  America — Further  e.xplorations 
on  the  schooner  Zaca  to  Selkirk's  Juan  Fernandez,  the  rainless 
guano  islands  of  Peru,  and  exotic  Galdpagos.  Journal  of  the 
American  Museum  of  Natural  History,  37:31-38. 

CiiUBB,  Lawrence  John 

1933.  Geology  of  Galapagos,  Cocos,  and  Easter  islands  with  petrology  of 
Galdpagos  Islands  by  Constance  Richardson,  Bernice  P.  Bishop 
Museum  Bulletin.  110:1-67. 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  143 

Clark,  Huukrt  Lyman 

1917.  Reports  of  the  scientific  results  of  the  Alhatross  in  charge  of  A. 
Agassiz  by  the  U.  S.  Fish  Commission  from  1904  to  March  1905. 
Bulletin  of  the  Musriini  of  Comparative  Zoology,  61(12). 

Clovi:r,  Sam  T. 

1932.    A  pioneer  heritage.  Los  Angeles,  1932.  Pp.  140-162  and  182-240. 

Cochran,  D.  M. 

192S.    Turtles  of  the  Galapagos.  Nature  Magazine,  12:322-324. 

COLLENETTi:,   C.   L. 

1925.  Sea-Girt  Jungles — The  Experience  of  a  Naturalist  with  the  St. 
George  Expedition.  London.  Pp.  72-116. 

COLNETT,  J, 

1798.  Voyage  to  the  South  Atlantic  and  Round  Cape  Horn  into  the  Pa- 
cific Ocean,  for  the  Purpose  of  Extending  the  Spermaceti  Whale 
Fisheries.  London,  179  pp. 

Conway,  Ainsle,  and  Frances  Conway 

1947.    The  Enchanted  Islands.   New  York,  280  pp. 

Cooke,  Edward 

1712.  Voyage  to  the  South  Sea  and  Round  the  World.  Performed  in  the 
years  1708,  1709,  1710,  1711,  by  the  ships  Duke  and  Duchess. 
London,  pp.  144-150. 

Dalrymple,  Alexander 

1770.  A  Historical  Collection  of  the  Several  Voyages  and  Discoveries  in 
the  South  Pacific  Ocean.  Vol.  2,  London,  pp.  122-124. 

Dampier,  William 

1679.    A  New  Voyage  Around  the  World.  London. 

Darbyshire,  M.  B. 

1936.    Aboard  the  Velero  III.  Country  Life,  70:31-36. 

Darwin,  Charles 

1952.  Journal  of  Researches  into  the  Geology  and  Natural  History  of  the 
Various  Countries  visited  by  H.M.S.  Beagle  (A  facsimile  reprint 
of  the  first  edition,  1839).  New  York-London.  1952,  6239  pp. 

Delano,  Amasa 

1817.  A  Narrative  of  Voyages  and  Travels  in  the  Northern  and  Southern 
Hemispheres  Comprising  Three  Voyages  Around  the  World  To- 
gether with  a  Voyage  of  Survey  and  Discovery  in  the  Pacific 
Ocean  and  Oriental  Islands.    Boston,  pp.  369-385. 

Dodd.  Enw.  H.,  Ju. 

1930.  Great  Dipper  to  Southern  Cross.  New  York,  pp.  78-113.  [An  account 
of  the  cruise  of  the  schooner  Chance.'\ 


144  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

Douglas,  A.  J.  A.,  and  P.  H.  Johnson 

1926.  The  South  Seas  of  Today — An  account  of  the  cruise  of  the  yacht 
St.  George  to  the  South  Pacific.  London,  pp.  56-72. 

Du  Petit  Thouars,  Abel 

1846.  Voyage  Autour  de  Monde  sur  la  Frigate  La  Venus  Pendant  les 
Annees  1836-1839.    Paris. 

Eardley-Wilmot,  S. 

1873.  Our  Journal  in  the  Pacific  by  the  Officers  of  H.M.S.  Zealous.  Ar- 
ranged and  edited  by  Lieutenant  S.  Eardley-Wilmot,  London, 
333  pp. 

Eisajian,  Josiah  R. 

1952.  Operation  "Clinkers."  Carnegie  Magazine,  Feb.  1952,  pp.  42-45  and 
58,  and  82-85  and  101. 

EspADA,  Marcos  Jiminez  de  la 

1892.  Las  Islas  de  Los  Galapagos  y  Otras  Mas  a  Poniente.  Sociedad  Geo- 
graphica  de  Madrid,  51  pp. 

Fahnestock,  Bruce,  and  Sheridan 

1938.    Stars  to  Windward.  New  York,  295  pp. 

FoRTESQiE,  Granville 

1911.  The  Galapagos  Islands.  Bulletin  of  the  Pan  American  Union,  Feb- 
ruary, 1911,  pp.  222-239. 

Garman,  Samuel 

1917.  The  Galapagos  Tortoises.  Memoirs  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative 
Zoology,  30(4) : 261-296. 

Garth,  John  S. 

1936.    Galdpagos.  Pacific  Geographic  Magazine,!  {2):  20-25,40. 

Gerrault,  Alain 

1930.    In  Quest  of  the  Sun.  New  York,  303  pp. 

GoRMAZ,  Francisco  Vidal 

1890.  Capitan  de  Navio  de  la  Armada  Nacional  Las  Islas  de  Los  Galapa- 
gos y  Otras  Mas  a  Poniente.  Del  Anuario  hidrografica,  tomo 
15,  47  pp. 

Grant,  Madison 

1928.  Conservation  of  wild  life.  Bulletin  of  the  Neiv  York  Zoological  So- 
ciety, 31(5): 147-148. 

GuNTHER,  Albert 

1877.  Account  of  the  zoological  collection  made  during  the  visit  of  H.M.S. 
Peterel  to  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Proceedings  of  the  Zoological 
Society  of  London,  1877,  pp.  64-91. 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  145 

Hamilton,  Frederick 

1903.    Hunting  the  giant  tortoise.  Wide  World  Magazine,  11:25-30. 

Hariutz,  Alf 

1915.  Mandskapet  fra  Bark  Alexandra.  Kristiana,  1915. 
Heller,  Edmund 

1903.  Papers  from  the  Hopkins-Stanford  Galapagos  Expedition,  No.  14, 
Reptiles.  Proceedings  of  the  Washington  Academy  of  Science, 
5:48-59. 

Heyerdahl,  Thor 

1953.  American  Indians  in  the  Pacific.  New  York,  pp.  449,  548,  549,  561- 
568,  573,  597,  606,  617,  and  618. 

Hkks,  J.  B. 

1927.    Nature  notes  on  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Discovery,  8:112-114. 

Hobbs,  William  Herbert 

1945.  The  Fortress  Islands  of  the  Pacific.  Michigan,  pp.  9,  26,  64,  65, 
160,  161. 

Hodges,  G.  C. 

1917.    Galapagos  Islands — Pacific's  Key  to  Panama.  Sunset,  39:36-37. 
Holder,  Charles  F. 

1901.    The  turtles  of  the  Galapagos.  Scientific  American,  85(9) :  139—140. 
Howard,  Sydney 

1934.  Isles  of  Escape,  being  the  Adventures  of  Roydon  Bristow.  London, 
pp.  45-208. 

Howell,  John  Thomas 

1941.  Hugh    Cuming's    visit    to    the    Galapagos    Islands.    Lloydia,    4(4): 

291-292. 

1942.  Up  under  the  equator.  Sierra  Cluh  Bulletin,  27(4):  79-82. 

Johnson,  Irving,  and  Elixta  Johnson 

1942.    Westward  Bound  in  the  Yankee.   National  Geographic  Magazine, 

81:1-44. 
1949.    The  Yankee's  wanderland.  National  Geographic  Magazine,  95:1-50. 

KORWIN,  H. 

1931.  Galapagos  Islands,  or  Colon  Archipelago.  Bulletin  of  the  Pan  Amer- 
ican Union,  65:1140-1144. 

Kroeber,  a.  L. 

1916.  Floral  relations  among  the  Galapagos  Islands.  University  of  Cali- 

fornia Puhlications  in  Botany.  6(9)  :199-220. 

Lack,  David 

1940.    Evolution  of  the  Galapagos  finches.  Nature.  146(3697)  :324-327. 
1945.    The  Galapagos   Finches    (Geospezinae).   Occasional  Papers   of  the 

California  Academy  of  Sciences,  no.  21,  158  pp. 
1947.    Darwin's  Finches.  Cambridge,  218  pp. 


146  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

Lanier,  R.  J. 

1932.  The  Templeton  Crocker  Expedition.  (To  the  Revillagigedo,  Galapa- 
gos, and  Tres  Marias  Islands).  Aquarium  Journal,  5(8) : 44-45. 

Little,  George 

1845.  Life  on  the  Ocean  or  Twenty  Years  at  Sea  being  the  Personal  Ad- 
ventures of  the  Author.  Boston,  pp.  65-71. 

Lowe,  P.  R. 

1934.  On  the  need  for  the  preservation  of  the  Galapagos  fauna.   Birds. 

Proceedings   of   the   Linnaean    Society   of  London,    Session    146. 
pp.  84-89. 

Lucas,  Frederick  A. 

1922.  Historic  tortoises  and  other  aged  animals.  Natural  History.  22(4): 
301-305. 

Mann,  Alexander 

1909.    Yachting  on  the  Pacific.    London,  1909,  pp.  7-75. 

Mazet,  Rohert,  Jr. 

1938.  Fisherman's  Paradise — Settler's  Hell.    U.   S.  Naval   Institute  Pro- 

ceedings, 64(423): 717-732. 

Melville,  Herman 

1940.  The  Encantadas  or.  Enchanted  Isles  with  an  Introduction,  Critical 
Epilogue  and  Biographical  Notes  by  Victor  Wolfgang  von  Hagen. 
San  Francisco,  118  pp. 

Meredith,  De  Witt 

1939.  Voyages   of  the    Velrro   III.    Compiled   by   De   Witt   Meredith    for 

Captain  George  Allan  Hancock,  Los  Angeles,  286  pp.    (pictorial 
version). 

Mielche,  Hakon 

1938.  Let's  See  if  the  World  is  Round.    London,  330  pp. 

MixDTK,  Richard  W. 

1942.  The  Galapagos:  Pacific  Guardians  of  the  Panama  Canal.  U.  S.  Naval 
Institute  Proceedings,  68(471) :  651-654. 

Moore,  R.  T. 

1935.  The  protection  and  conservation  of  the  zoological  life  of  the  Galapa- 

gos Archipelago.  Science,   82(2135)  :519-521. 

MoRREix,  Benjamin 

1832.  A  Narrative  of  Four  Voyages  to  the  South  Sea  and  Pacific  Ocean. 
New  York. 

Murphy,  Robdrt  C. 

1939.  Men  of  war.   Natural  History.  44(3)  :133-143. 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS   ISLANDS  147 

Okk,  Rohekt  T. 

1942.  Darwin's  finches.  Bulletin  of  the  Neic  York  Zoological  Society, 
45(6): 142-145. 

Parkek,  H.  W. 

1934.  On  the  need  for  the  preservation  of  the  Galapagos  fauna.    Reptiles. 

Proceedings  of  the  Linnaean  Society  of  London,  Session  146,  pp. 
80-84. 

Perkins,  C.  B. 

1942.    Iguanas.  Zoonooz,  San  Diego,  July,  1942,  pp.  3  and  5. 

Peters,  Harold 

1937.  The  pilgrim  sails  the  seven  seas.  National  Geographic  Magazine, 
72:223-224. 

PiccoNE,  Antonio 

1889.  Nuove  Alghe  de  Viaggio  di  circumnaviga-zione  della  Vettor  Pisani. 
Memorie  Classe  di  scienze  fisiche,  mathematiche  e  naturali 
Academia  dei  Liiicei,  ser.  4,  6:10-63. 

PiNCHOT,    GiFFORD 

1930.  To  the  South  Seas,  the  Cruise  of  the  Mary  Pinchot  to  the  Galapagos. 

The  Marquesas,  and  the  Taumoto  Islands,  and  Tahiti.    Philadel- 
phia, pp.  98-281. 

Porter,  David 

1815.  Journal  of  A  Cruise  made  to  the  Pacific  Ocean  by  Captain  David 
Porter  in  the  United  States  Frigate  Essex  in  the  years  1812,  1813, 
1814.  2  vols.,  Philadelphia.  Second  edition.  New  York.  1822. 

Reynolds,  George  H. 

1936.  Tales  of  Whalers — Galapagos  Tortoises  vs.  Salt  Horse.  New  Bed- 
ford. 

Reynolds,  T.  N. 

1835.  Voyage  of  the  United  States  Frigate  Potovxic  under  the  command 
of  Commodore  John  Downes  during  the  Circumnavigation  of  the 
Globe  in  the  years  1831,  1832,  1833,  and  1834.  New  York,  560  pp. 

RiBADENEIRA,   JORGE   A. 

1942.  El  Volcan  Grande  en  la  Isla  Isabela  (Galapagos).  Flora  Epoca, 
2:113-114. 

RiDGEWAY,  Robert 

1897.  Birds  of  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Proceedings  of  the  United  States 
National  Museum.   19:450-670. 

Hitter,  Friedrech 

1931.  Eve  calls  it  a  day.  Atlantic  Monthly.  148:733-743. 

1931.    Adam  and  Eve  in  the  Galapagos.  Atlantic  Monthly.  148:409-418. 

1935.  Satan  walks  in  the  garden.  Atlantic  Monthly.  148:565-575. 


148  CALIFORNIA   ACADEMY   OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

Robinson,  William  Albert 

1936.    Voyage  to  Galapagos.  New  York,  279  pp. 

Rogers,  Woodes 

1717.  A  Cruising  Voyage  Around  the  World — First  to  the  South  Seas, 
thence  to  the  East-Indies,  and  Home.  Begun  in  1708  and  Finished 
in  1711.  London,  1717,  428  pp. 

Rose,  Ruth 

1924.  Pets  and  super-pets  on  Galapagos  Island.  Bulletin  of  the  Neio  York 
Zoological  Society,  27(1):   27-31. 

Rothschild,  Walter,  and  Chas.  M.  Harris 

1897.  The  discovery  of  the  flightless  cormorant.  Bulletin!  of  the  Neiv  York 
Zoological  Society,  28(1)  :12. 

ScAMMON,  Charles  M. 

1869.  On  the  cetaceans  of  the  western  coast  of  North  America.  Proceed- 
ings of  the  Philadelphia  Academy  of  Sciences,  21:60. 

1874.  The  Marine  Mammals  of  the  Northwestern  Coast  of  America  De- 
scribed and  Illustrated;  Together  with  an  Account  of  the  Ameri- 
can Whale-fishery.   San  Francisco,  1874,  319  pp. 

Schmidt,  Karl  P. 

1935.  Breeding  behavior  of  the  marine  iguana.  Zoological  Series  Field 
Museum  of  Natural  History,  20(9)  : 71-74. 

Seemann,  Berthold 

1853.  Narrative  of  the  Voyage  of  H.M.S.  Herald  During  the  Years  1845- 
1851  Under  Command  of  Captain  Henry  Kellett.  R.N..  Being  a 
Circumnavigation  of  the  Globe  and  Three  Cruises  to  the  Arctic 
Region  in  Search  of  Sir  John  Franklin.    Two  vols..  London. 

Shurcliff,  Sydney  N. 

1930.  Jungle  Islands — The  Illyria  in  the  South  Seas.  New  York,  pp.  71- 
105.  Contains  Essay  on  the  Zoogeography  of  the  Pacific  Islands 
by  Karl  P.  Schmidt,  pp.  280-285. 

Shillihear,  John 

1817.  A  Narrative  of  the  Brito^i's  Voyage  to  Pitcairn's  Island.  London. 
pp.  29-32. 

Slevin,  Joseph  R. 

193L  Log  of  the  schooner  Academy,  on  a  voyage  of  scientific  research  to 
the  Galapagos  Islands,  1905-1906.  Occasional  Papers  of  the  Cali- 
fornia Academy  of  Sciences,  no.  17,  162  pp. 

1935.  An  account  of  the  reptiles  inhabiting  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Bul- 
letin of  the  Neiv  York  Zoological  Society.  Vol.  38,  no.  1,  New  York. 
Jan.-Feb.,  1935,  pp.  2-24. 


No.  25]  SLEVIN:     THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  149- 

Slevin,  Joseph  R. — Cont'd 

1935.  An   Equatorial    Wonderland — -the    Galdpagos,    a    country    of    great 

volcanoes,  giant  tortoises,  and  flightless  birds.    'Natural  History, 
36:375-378. 

1936.  Tame  "wildfowl"  of  the  Galapagos  Islands:   an  archipelago  where 

the  unique  avifauna  lives  unmolested  by  man.  Illustrated  London 
News,  188(5065):  873-875. 

1937.  John  Marshall  Gamble.  Paradise  of  the  Pacific,  49(7)  :26. 

1940.  "Lost  grave"  of  Cowan  on  Galapagos.  Paradise  of  the  Pacific, 
52(6): 25-26. 

1950.    Post  ofllice  in  a  barrel.  Pacific  Discovery,  3(2): 28-29.  March-April. 

1955.  Charting  the  "Enchanted  Isles."  In:  Essays  in  the  Natural  Sciences 
in  honor  of  Captain  Allan  Hancock.  University  of  Southern  Cali- 
fornia Press,  pp.  99-110,  4  maps. 

SOLIS,  M.  ACOSTA 

1937.  Galapagos  observade  fito  logicamente.  Imprenta  de  la  Universidad 
Central,  Quito,  1937,  pp.  78. 

Stackpole,  Edouard 

1953.    The  Sea  Hunters — the  Great  Age  of  Whaling.  Philadelphia,  510  pp. 

Stbauch,  Doke 

1936.    Satan  Came  to  Eden.  New  York  and  London,  1936,  274  pp. 

Strout,  Edith  Bale 

1939.    At  home  on  the  oceans.  National  Geographic  Magazine,  76:33-86. 

SvENSON,  Henry  K. 

1935.  Plants  of  the  Astor  Expedition  1930  (Galapagos  and  Cocos  Islands). 
Aynerican  Journal  of  Botany,  22:208-277. 

1946.  Vegetation  of  the  coast  of  Ecuador  and  Peru  and  its  relation  to  the 
Galapagos  Islands.  Brooklyn  Botanic  Garden,  Contribution  104, 
pp.  394-498. 

SwARTH,  Harry  S. 

1931.  The  avifauna  of  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Occasional  Papers  of  the 
California  Academy  of  Sciences,  no.  18,  299  pp. 

1934.  The  bird  fauna  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  in  relation  to  species  for- 
mation. Biological  Revietvs,  9(2)  :213-234. 

Taber,  C.  a.  M. 

1891.    Origin  of  the  Galapagos  rookeries.  Science,  17:290. 

Tabnmoor,  Salvator  R. 

1854.  The  Encantadas  or  Enchanted  Isles.  Putnam's  Monthly  Magazine,^ 
3:311-319. 

Tee-Van,  John 

1923.  Capturing  a  giant  tortoise  on  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Bulletin  of 
the  New  York  Zoological  Society.  26(5)  :123-128 


150  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF   SCIENCES  [Oc.  Papers 

TOWNSEND,   C.   H. 

1924.  Impending  extinction  of  tlie  Galapagos  tortoises.  Bulleti7i  of  the 
Neio  York  Zoological  Society,  27(2): 55-56. 

1925a.  Whaler  and  tortoise.  Scientific  Monthly,  21:166-172. 

1925b.  The  Galapagos  tortoises  in  their  relation  to  the  whaling  industry. 
Zoologica.  4(3) : 55-135. 

1928.  The  Galapagos  Islands  revisited.  Bulletin  of  the  Neiv  York  Zoolog- 
ical Society.   31(5) :  148-169. 

1930.  The  Astor  Expedition  of  Galapagos  Islands.    Bulletin  of  the  Neic 

York  Zoological  Society.  33  (4)  :135-173. 

1931.  Giant   tortoises   nearing   extinction   are   being   propagated    in    the 

United  States.  Scientific  American,  144:42-44. 

1934.    The  fur  seal  of  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Zoologica,  18(2)  : 47-49. 
Tucker,  Gilbert  N. 

1943.  The  career  of  H.M.C.S.  Rainbow.  British  Columbia  Historical  Quar- 
terly, 7(1):  24. 

Van  Dvke,  Edwin  C. 

1953.    The  Coleoptera  of  the  Galapagos  Islands.    Occasional  Papers  of  the 
California  Academy  of  Sciences,  no.  22,  181  pp. 
Vanderbilt,  William  K. 

1927.    To  Galapagos  on  the  Ara.  New  York,  161  pp. 
Vinton,  K.  W. 

1951.    Origin  of  life  on  the  Galapagos  Islands.  American  Journal  of  Sci- 
ence, 249(5): 356-376. 
VON  Hagen,  Victor  Wolfgang 

1937.    Centenarians  of  the  Galapagos.  Travel,  49(1) :  32-33  and  46. 

1940.    Ecuador  the  Unknown.  New  York,  296  pp. 

1937a.  The    flamingoes    of   the   Galapagos    Islands.    :h'atural   History,   39: 

136-139. 
1937b.  Galapagos  land  iguanas.  Xature.  29(6)  :368-370. 
1937c.  Sea  iguanas  of  the  Galapagos.  Nature,  29(3)  :147-149. 
1949.    Ecuador  and  the  Galapagos  Islands.  University  of  Oklahoma  Press. 
290  pp. 
VON  Hagen,  Victor  Wolfgang,  and  Q.  Hawkins 

1940.    Treasure  of  the  Tortoise  Islands.  New  York,  202  pp. 

Wafer,  Lionel 

1699.    A  New  Voyage  and  Description  of  the  Isthmus  of  America.    Re- 
print from  original.  Edited  by  George  Parker  Winship,   Cleve- 
land, 1903,  212  pp. 
Wallace,  Alfred 

1876.    The  Geographical  Distribution  of  Animals.  London,  Vol.  2,  607  pp. 

WiNTOUR,  C.  J. 

1900.    The  strange  hunt  of  the  wild  hound.  Wide  World  Magazine,  5(26) : 
200-203. 
Wolf,  Teodoro 

1892.  Geografia  Y  Geologia  del  Ecuador  Publicada  por  orden  del  Supremo 
Gobierno  de  la  Republica  Leipsig,  1892,  Parte  V.  El  Archipelago 
de  Galapagos,  pp.  469-493.